misprints have been corrected, but in general the original spelling and typesetting conventions
(e.g. ellipses as * * *) have been retained. Accents in foreign language phrases are
inconsistent, and have not been standardised.
BLACKWOOD’S
EDINBURGH MAGAZINE.
No. CCCLXI.
NOVEMBER, 1845.
VOL. LXII.
CONTENTS.
| The Student of Salamanca. Part I. | 521 |
| Humboldt. | 541 |
| Hakem the Slave. | 560 |
| The Lay of Starkàther. | 570 |
| Mozart. | 572 |
| Account of a Visit to the Volcano of Kirauea. | 591 |
| The Days of the Fronde. | 596 |
| The Grand General Junction and Indefinite | |
| Extension Railway Rhapsody. | 614 |
| Sketches of Italy—Lucca | 617 |
| The Railways. | 633 |
EDINBURGH:
WILLIAM BLACKWOOD AND SONS, 45, GEORGE STREET;
AND 37, PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON.,
To whom all Communications (post paid) must be addressed.
SOLD BY ALL THE BOOKSELLERS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM.
PRINTED BY BALLANTYNE AND HUGHES, EDINBURGH.
BLACKWOOD’S
EDINBURGH MAGAZINE.
No. CCCLXI.
NOVEMBER, 1845.
VOL. LXII.
THE STUDENT OF SALAMANCA.
Part I.
Tremola la pendon.”
Cancion Patriotica.
It wanted about an hour of sunset
on the last day of September 1833,
when two young men, whose respective
ages did not much exceed twenty
years, emerged from a country lane
upon the high-road from Tarazona to
Tudela, in that small district of Navarre
which lies south of the river
Ebro.
The equipments of the travellers—for
such the dusty state of their apparel,
and the knapsacks upon their
shoulders, indicated them to be—were
exactly similar, and well calculated
for a pedestrian journey across the steep
sierras and neglected roads of Spain.
They consisted, with little variation, of
the national Spanish dress—short jackets
of dark cloth, somewhat braided
and embroidered, knee-breeches of the
same material, and broad-brimmed
hats, surrounded by velvet bands.
Only, instead of the tight-fitting
stockings and neat pumps, which
should have completed the costume,
long leathern gamashes extended from
knee to ankle, and were met below
the latter by stout high-quartered
shoes. Each of the young men carried
a stick in his hand, rather, as it
appeared, from habit, or for purposes
of defence, than as a support, and
each of them had a cloak of coarse
black serge folded and strapped upon
his otter-skin knapsack. With their
costume, however, the similarity in
their appearance ceased; nothing
could be more widely different than
their style of person and countenance.
The taller of the two, who was also
apparently the elder, was of a slender,
active figure, with well-moulded
limbs, and a handsome, intelligent
countenance, in which energy and
decision of character were strongly
marked. His complexion was dark
olive; his eyes and short curling hair
were of a coal black; what little beard
he had was closely shaven, excepting
upon the upper lip, which was fringed
by a well-defined mustache, as gracefully
curved and delicately penciled
as any that Vandyke ever painted.
At this time, however, there was a
shade over his countenance other than
that cast by the broad leaf of his sombrero;
it was the look of mingled
hope, anxiety, and suspense, sometimes
worn by persons who are drawing
near to a goal, their attainment
of which is still doubtful, and at which,
even when attained, it is not quite
certain whether pleasure or pain
awaits them.
No such thoughts or anxieties were
to be read upon the joyous, careless[Pg 522]
countenance of the second traveller—a
stout, square-built young man,
whose ruddy complexion and light-brown
hair contrasted as strongly
with the dark locks and olive skin of
his companion as they differed from
the generally received notions of Spanish
physiognomy. The face wore
no particular expression, excepting
that of good-humoured insouciance;
his hazel eye had a merry twinkle,
and a slight fulness of lip and chin
seemed to denote a reasonable degree
of addiction to the good things of this
life. Altogether, and to judge them
by their physiognomies only, one
would have chosen the first for a
friend, the latter for a pleasant and
jovial boon-companion.
On leaving the cross-road, the two
pedestrians took a northerly direction,
in which they proceeded for nearly a
quarter of an hour without exchanging
a syllable, the one absorbed in
meditations which the other was apparently
unwilling to disturb. At the
end of that time they paused, as if by
preconcerted arrangement, in front of
a small venta, or country inn, less
remarkable for the accommodation it
afforded, than for its pleasant situation
and aspect. It stood a little back
from the road, in a nook formed by
the recession of a line of wooded hills
which there skirt the highway. The
front of the house, composed of rough
blocks of grey stone, was overgrown by
the twisted branches of a venerable
vine, the age of which did not prevent
it from becoming covered each spring
with leaves and tendrils, nor from
yielding in the autumn an abundant
supply of delicious gold-coloured
grapes. At a short distance in front
of the door, which opened into the
stable, whence a wooden step-ladder
led to the upper floor, there stood a
huge oak, throwing its broad shadow
over a table and some benches placed
beneath it for the accommodation of
guests. On one side of the venta,
and detached from it, but in a right
line with its front, was a massive
fragment of wall, which had probably,
at no very remote period, formed part
of a chapel or convent. Its summit,
which was broken and irregular, rose
full thirty feet from the ground
throughout more than double that
length, and along the wall, at about
two-thirds of a man’s height, ran a
horizontal black line, indicating, as
did also the numerous marks and
bruises upon the whitewashed surface,
that this ancient piece of masonry
enabled the frequenters of the venta
to indulge in the favourite juego de
pelota, or a game at ball, to which the
Navarrese and the northern Spaniards
generally are much addicted, and at
which most of them excel.
On the arrival of our travellers,
the benches in front of the venta had
already two occupants, belonging to
classes of men which may rank
amongst the chief supporters of Spanish
roadside inns. One of them was
a corporal of dragoons, returning to
his garrison at Tudela, whence he
had probably been sent with a despatch,
or on some similar mission.
He was a strapping, powerful fellow,
well set up, as the phrase goes, and
whose broad shoulders and soldierly
figure showed to advantage in his
dark-green uniform. His horse—a
high-crested, fine-legged Andalusian,
whose jetty coat looked yet blacker
by contrast with the white sheep-skin
that covered the saddle, and the
flakes of foam with which his impatient
champings had covered his broad
chest—was tied up near the stable
door, the bridle removed, finishing
out of a nose-bag a plentiful feed of
maize. The dragoon’s sabre and his
brass and leopard-skin helmet were
hanging at the saddle-bow, their
owner having temporarily covered his
head with a smart foraging-cap of
green and scarlet cloth, which set off to
great advantage his bearded and martial
countenance. Having provided for
his horse, the trooper was now attending
to the calls of his own appetite,
and doing immense execution on some
goat’s-milk cheese and excellent white
bread, which he moistened by copious
draughts of the thick black wine of
Navarre.
Seated opposite to the soldier, and
similarly employed, was a hardy-looking
man, who had arrived in company
with two mules, which were also
tethered to a ring in the venta wall,
but at a respectful distance from the
dragoon’s charger. A heap of chopped
straw and Indian corn leaves was
lying before them, at which they assiduously
munched—not, however,[Pg 523]
without occasionally casting wistful
glances at the more luxurious repast
of their neighbour. The soldier and
the muleteer had apparently met before;
and when the new-comers approached
them, they were discussing
with great animation the merits of the
various players in a ball-match which
they had recently witnessed near
Tudela. Thence they glided into a
discussion concerning ball-players in
general; the muleteer, who was a
Navarrese, asserting the invincibility
of his country at the game of pelota,
whilst the corporal, who came from
the neighbourhood of Oviedo, was
equally confident of the superiority of
the Asturians.
Whilst the younger of the travellers
was ascertaining from the patrona
the state of the larder, which, as is
usual enough in Spanish inns, was
but meagrely provided, his companion
sought out the landlord of the
venta, whom he found in the chimney-corner,
enjoying a supplementary
siesta amidst a cloud of wood smoke.
“The Conde de Villabuena,” enquired
the young man, when he had
shaken the drowsy host out of his
slumbers—”is he still at his house
between this and Tudela?”
The ventero, a greasy, ill-conditioned
Valencian, rubbed his eyes, muttered
a coarse oath, and seemed half
disposed, instead of replying, to pick
a quarrel with his interrogator; but a
glance at the athletic figure and resolute
countenance of the latter, dissipated
the inclination, and he answered
by a surly affirmative.
“And his daughter also?” continued
the stranger in a lower tone.
“Doña Rita? To be sure she is,
or was yesterday; for I saw her ride
by with her father and some other
cavaliers. What eyes the little
beauty has; and what a foot! It was
peeping from under her habit as she
passed. Sant’Antonio, what a foot!”
And now thoroughly awakened, the
ventero launched out into a panegyric
on the lady’s beauty, interlarded by
appeals to various saints as to the
justice of his praise, which was continued,
in the manner of a soliloquy,
for some time after the stranger had
turned his back upon him and descended
the stairs.
At the door of the venta the young
man encountered his companion, who
was issuing forth with a jug of wine
in his hand.
“Well, Luis,” said the latter, “have
you ascertained it? Is she still here,
or has our journey been in vain?”
“She is here,” was the reply.
“Good. Then I hope you will put
aside your melancholy, and eat and
drink with better appetite than you
have lately done. We have plenty
of time; it will not be dark for the
next two hours. So let us to supper,
such as it is; ham as rancid as an old
oil-cask, eggs that would have been
chickens to-morrow, and wine—but the
wine may atone for the rest—it is old
Peralta, or the patrona is perjured. I
have had the table spread under the
tree, in hopes that fresh air may
sweeten musty viands, and in order
that we may see the ball-play of yonder
soldier and muleteer.”
The young man who had been addressed
by the name of Luis, glanced
in the direction of the ball-court,
where the two men to whom his companion
referred were preparing for a
match. The discussion as to the
superiority of Navarrese or Asturian
ball-players had increased in warmth,
until the disputants, each obstinate
in his opinion, finding themselves,
perhaps, at a loss for verbal arguments,
had agreed to refer the matter
to a trial of individual skill. The
challenge came from the dragoon,
who, as soon as he heard it accepted,
proceeded to lighten himself for his
task. With great alacrity he threw
aside his foraging-cap, stripped off his
pouch-belt and uniform coat, and unfastened
his spurs. The preparations
of the muleteer were even more rapidly
completed. When he had thrown
off his jacket—the back of which was
adorned, according to the custom of
his class, with flowers and various
quaint devices, cut out in cloth of
many colours, and sewn upon the
brown material of which the garment
was composed—he stood in his shirt
and trousers of unbleached linen,
with light sandals of plaited hemp
upon his feet. In this latter respect
he had the advantage of the soldier,
who, not choosing to play barefooted,
was obliged to retain his heavy boots.
In apparent activity, too, the advantage
was greatly on the side of the[Pg 524]
Navarrese, who was spare and sinewy,
without an ounce of superfluous flesh
about him, but with muscles like iron,
and limbs as elastic and springy as
whalebone. His very face partook of
the hard, wiry character of his person;
the cheekbones were slightly prominent,
and, although he evidently
wanted some years of thirty, two deep
furrows or lines, such as are rarely
seen on the countenance of so young
a man, curved outwards from either
nostril to considerably below the
mouth, increasing in depth when he
talked or smiled, and giving, in conjunction
with a quick grey eye, considerable
character to his frank, and by
no means disagreeable countenance.
The game began with great spirit,
and with much appearance of equality
between the players, who would both
have been deemed first-rate in any
ball-court in Europe. The great
strength of the dragoon seemed at
first to give him the advantage; the
tremendous blows he delivered sent
the ball against the wall with as much
seeming force as if it had been driven
out of a cannon, and caused it to rebound
to an immense distance, keeping
the muleteer continually at the
very top of his speed. The match
was to be the best two out of three
games. The first of the three was
won by the muleteer, after the victory
had been long and well contested.
“Bien!” said the dragoon, as he
wiped the perspiration from his face,
and took a deep draught out of a jug
of wine which the ventero presented
to him. “Bien—that is one for you;
the next may go differently. I only
missed the ball through my foot slipping.
Curse boots for playing ball
in, say I! Hola, Valenciano! have
you never a pair of shoes or espadrillas
to lend me?”
The landlord, who acted as umpire,
and who, as well as his wife and two
or three loitering peasants, was taking
an intense interest in the game, ran
into the house and brought out a pair
of sandals. These the soldier tied
upon his feet, in lieu of the boots to
which he attributed his defeat. Then,
with renewed confidence, he took his
place opposite the wall, where the
muleteer was waiting for him.
But if, as the dragoon said, an accident
had lost him the first game, it
soon became evident that the superior
activity and endurance of his antagonist
were equally certain to make
him lose the second. The idleness of
a garrison life, fat feeding, and soft
lying, had disqualified the soldier to
compete for any length of time with
a man like the Navarrese, accustomed
to the severest hardships, whose most
luxurious meal was a handful of
boiled beans, his softest couch a bundle
of straw or the packsaddles of his
mules. Constant exposure and unceasing
toil had given the muleteer
the same insensibility to fatigue attributed
to certain savage tribes.
Whilst his antagonist, with inflamed
features and short-drawn breath, and
reeking with perspiration, was toiling
after the ball, the Navarrese went
through the same, or a greater amount
of exertion, without the least appearance
of distress. Not a bead of moisture
upon his face, nor a pant from
his broad, well-opened chest, gave
token of the slightest inconvenience
from the violent exercise he was
going through. On the contrary, as
he went on and got warm in the harness,
he seemed to play better, to run
faster, to catch the ball with greater
address, and strike it with more force.
Sometimes he would be standing close
to the wall, when a mighty blow from
the strong arm of the dragoon sent
the ball scores of yards in his rear.
It seemed impossible that he should
arrive soon enough to strike it. But
before it had time to rebound, he was
behind it, and by a blow of his horny
palm, less forcible perhaps, but more
dexterously applied than the one his
opponent had given, he sent it careering
back to the wall with greater
swiftness than it had left it. He
rarely struck the ball in the air, even
when the opportunity offered, but
allowed it to rebound—a less dashing,
but a surer game than he would perhaps
have played, had he not considered
the honour of “Navarra la
bella” to be at stake, represented in
his person. Again, when the ball
fell near the wall, he would sometimes
swing his arm as though about to
strike it a violent blow, and, whilst
the dragoon was already beginning to
retire in the direction he expected it
to take, he would change his apparent
intention, and drop it gently just[Pg 525]
above the line, so that his opponent,
although rushing up in desperate
haste, could scarcely arrive in time
to avoid being put out. It was by
a feint of this description that the
second game was decided in favour
of the Navarrese.
“Viva la Navarra!” shouted the
winner, bounding like a startled roebuck
three or four feet from the
ground, in front of the discomfited
soldier.
“Viva el demonio!” growled the
latter in reply. “Do you think that
because you have beaten me to-day,
thanks to your herring guts and dog’s
hide, that you could do the same if I
were in training, or had a month’s
practice? You would find it very different,
Master Paco.”
“Viva la Navarra!” repeated
Paco, chucking the small hard ball up
into the air, to a height at which it
appeared scarcely bigger than a bullet.
Then replying to the words of the
dragoon; “At your orders, Señor
Velasquez,” said he, “I shall pass
through Tudela some time next month,
and shall be ready to give you your
revenge.”
And catching the ball as it fell, the
Navarrese, whom victory had put
into extravagant spirits, began tossing
it from one hand to the other,
catching it behind his back, and performing
various other small feats of
address, looking the while at the corporal
with a sort of jeering smile,
which greatly aggravated the irritation
of the latter.
“Pues,” said Velasquez at last,
after gazing at Paco for the space of
a minute with a stern look, which was
insufficient, however, to make the
other lower his eyes, or alter the expression
of his countenance; “Well,
what do you stare at? Oh! I forgot—you
may well stare. It is the first
time that you have seen an Asturian
caballero beaten at any thing by a cur
of a Navarrese.”
“Not at all,” replied the muleteer
coolly; “your Señoria is mistaken.
It is only the first time that I have
seen an Asturian caballero with a
pipeclayed belt over his shoulder,
and a corporal’s bars upon his arm.”
And he broke out into one of those
wild shrill laughs of scorn and defiance
with which the peasant soldiers
of Navarre have so often, during recent
Spanish wars, caused the rocks
and ravines of their native province
to ring again.
“Hijo de zorra!” muttered the
soldier, enraged beyond endurance by
this last taunt; and drawing back his
right arm, he dealt so heavy and unexpected
a blow upon the breast of
the muleteer that the latter reeled a
couple of paces backwards, and then
fell headlong and with considerable
violence to the ground. The dragoon
gazed for an instant at the fallen man,
as if expecting him to rise and attack
him in turn; but, seeing that he did
not do so, he turned round and walked
slowly in the direction of his charger.
He had taken but a few steps when
the Navarrese sprang to his feet, and
thrust his hand into the red sash
which girded his waist, as though
seeking a weapon. He found none,
and, instantly darting forward, he
passed the soldier, and reached his
mules a moment sooner than the former
did his horse. The next instant
a long brown barrel was projected
across the packsaddles, and behind
it was seen the blue cap and pale
countenance of Paco, who, with glittering
eye and face livid from fury,
was taking a deadly aim at the soldier,
now standing beside the shoulder of
his charger. Without a moment’s
hesitation the Navarrese pulled the
trigger. As he did so, the dragoon,
suddenly aware of his danger, threw
himself on one side, and at the same
time his horse, either startled by the
movement or tormented by a fly,
tossed his head violently up and backwards.
The muleteer’s bullet, intended
for the rider, entered the brain of
the steed. There was a convulsive
quivering of the animal’s whole frame,
and then, before the smoke cleared
away, the horse fell over so heavily
and suddenly that he bore down Velasquez
under him. The soldier lay
with the whole weight of the expiring
animal resting upon his legs and thighs;
and, before he could make an attempt
to extricate himself, the Navarrese,
with a large dagger-shaped knife
gleaming in his hand, sprang across
the space that separated him from his
antagonist. The fate of the latter
would speedily have been decided,
had not the innkeeper, his wife, and[Pg 526]
the two young men, who had been
observing with much interest these
rapidly occurring incidents, thrown
themselves between Paco and the
object of his wrath.
“Out of the way!” roared the infuriated
muleteer. “He has struck me,
and by the Holy Trinity I will have
his blood. He has struck me, a free
Navarrese!” repeated he, striking his
own breast with the points of his
fingers, one of the expressive and
customary gestures of his countrymen.
“Let him be, Señor Don Paco!”
yelled the ventero and his wife, greatly
alarmed at the prospect of a murder
in broad daylight and at their
very threshold. “You have done
enough already to send you to the
galleys. Get on your mules, and ride
away before worse comes of it.”
“A los infiernos!” shouted Paco.
“As the horse now is, so shall be the
rider.” And he gave a long sweep of
his arm, making the bright blade of
his knife flash in the last red sun-rays
like a curved line of burnished gold.
The point of the weapon passed within
an inch or two of the face of the innkeeper,
who started back with a cry
of alarm. At the same moment the
wrist of the Navarrese was caught in
a firm grasp by the elder of the two
travellers, and the knife was wrested
from his hand. The muleteer turned
like a madman upon his new antagonist.
The latter had laid aside the
hat which shaded his face, and now
fixed his eyes upon the angry countenance
of the Navarrese.
“Do you not know me, Paco?”
said he, repulsing the first furious
onset of the muleteer.
Paco stared at him for a moment
with a look of doubt and astonishment.
“Don Luis!” he at last exclaimed.
“The same,” replied the stranger.
“You have been too hasty, Paco, and
we expose ourselves to blame by not
detaining you to answer for your attempt
on yonder soldier’s life, and for
the death of his horse. But you had
some provocation, and I, for one, am
willing to take the risk. Begone, and
that immediately.”
“I shall do your bidding, Señorito,”
said Paco, “were it only for old acquaintance
sake. But let that cowardly
Asturian beware how he meets
me in the mountains. I have missed
him once, but will answer for not
doing so again.”
“And you,” retorted the soldier,
whom the innkeeper and a peasant
had dragged from under the dead
horse, and placed upon a bench,
where he sat rubbing his legs, which
were numbed and bruised by the
weight that had fallen upon them—”and
you, have a care how you show
yourself in Tudela. If there is a stirrup-leather
or sword-scabbard in the
garrison, I promise you as sound a
beating as you ever yet received.”
The Navarrese, who had returned
to his mules and was busied reloading
his gun, snapped his fingers scornfully
at this menace. Don Luis walked up
to him.
“Listen, Paco,” said he, in a low
voice, “take my advice, and avoid
this neighbourhood for a while. Are
you still in the service of Count Villabuena?”
“No, Señor,” replied the man, “I
have left his Señoria, and the mules
are my own. I shall be passing near
the count’s house to-morrow, if you
have any thing to send.”
“I have nothing,” answered Don
Luis. “Should you by chance see
any of the family, it is unnecessary to
mention our meeting.”
Paco nodded his head significantly,
seated himself sideways on one of his
mules, his gun across his knees, and,
leading the other by the bridle, trotted
off at a brisk pace down a mountain
path nearly opposite to the venta.
Ten minutes later the dragoon, having
regained, in some degree, the use of
his legs, resumed his boots, took his
saddle and valise on his shoulders,
and set out on foot for his garrison.
The sun had set, and the twilight
passed away, the night was clear and
starlight, but moonless, when Luis and
his companion left the venta and
resumed their progress northwards.
After following the highway for a
short league, they took a cross-road,
on either side of which the richly cultivated
plain was sprinkled with farmhouses,
and with a few country villas.
In spite of the darkness, which was
increased by the overhanging foliage
of the fruit-trees that on either hand
bordered the road, Luis moved rapidly
and confidently forward, in the[Pg 527]
manner of one perfectly acquainted
with the ground; and presently, leaving
the beaten track, he passed through
a plantation of young trees, crossed a
field, and arrived with his companion
at a low hedge surrounding a spacious
garden. Jumping over this boundary,
the young men penetrated some distance
into the enclosure, and soon
found themselves within fifty yards
of a house, of which the white walls
were partially visible, rising out of a
thick garland of trees and bushes in
which the building was embowered.
Several of the windows were lighted
up, and the sound of music reached
the ears of Luis and his companion.
“This is far enough, Mariano,”
said the former. “To the right,
amongst the trees, you will find an
old moss-grown bench, upon which I
have often sat in happier days than
these. There await my return.”
“Let me accompany you further,”
replied Mariano. “There is no saying
what reception the count may
give you.”
“I shall not see the count,” answered
Luis; “and if by chance
I should, there is nothing to apprehend.
But my plan, as I have
already explained to you, is only to
seek one moment’s interview with
Rita. I am well acquainted with the
arrangements of the house, and you
may depend that I shall be seen by
no one whom I wish to avoid.”
Mariano turned into the shrubbery,
and Luis, with rapid but silent
step, advanced towards the villa, favoured
in his clandestine approach by
the darkness of the night and the
trees of the thickly-planted garden.
The house was a square edifice,
without balconies, and the windows
that were lighted up were those of
the first floor. On the side on which
Luis first approached the building,
the windows were closed, but, upon
moving noiselessly round to the front,
he perceived one which the fineness
of the weather, still mild and genial
although at the end of September,
had induced the occupants of the room
to leave open. The sound of laughter
and merriment issued from it; but this
was presently hushed, and two voices,
accompanied by guitars, began to sing
a lively seguidilla, of which, at the
end of each piquant couplet, the listeners
testified their approbation by a
hum of mirthful applause. Before
the song was over, Luis had sought
and found a means of observing what
was passing within doors. Grasping
the lower branch of a tree which grew
within a few feet of the corner of the
house, he swung himself up amongst
the foliage. A large bough extended
horizontally below the open window,
and by climbing along this, he was
enabled to look completely into the
apartment; whilst, owing to the thickness
of the leafage and the dark colour
of his dress, there was scarcely a possibility
of his being discovered.
The room was occupied by about
twenty persons, the majority of whom
were visitors, inhabitants of Tudela or
of neighbouring country-houses. With
four or five exceptions, the party consisted
of men, for the most part elderly
or middle-aged. One of the ladies
and a young officer of the royal guard
were the singers, and their performance
seemed partially to interrupt the
conversation of a group of the seniors
who were seated round a card-table at
the further end of the apartment.
The cards, however, if they had been
used at all, had long been thrown
aside, and replaced by a discussion
carried on in low tones, and with an
earnestness of countenance and gesture,
which gave to those engaged in
it the appearance rather of conspirators
than of friends met together for
the enjoyment of each other’s society.
The ladies, and a few of the younger
men, did not appear disposed to let
the gravity of their elders interfere
with their own pleasures. The song
and the dance, the pointed epigram
and witty repartee, all the varied resourccs
which Spaniards know so well
how to bring into play, and which
render a Spanish tertulia so agreeable,
had been in turn resorted to.
When the seguidilla—during the continuance
of which Luis had gained his
post of observation—was brought to a
close, there seemed to ensue a sort of
break in the amusements of the evening.
The younger members of the
company, whose conversation had previously
been general, separated into
groups of two or three persons; and
in more than one of those composed
of the former number, the flashing
eye, coquettish smile, and rapidly significant[Pg 528]
motions of the fan, bespoke
the existence of an animated flirtation.
Two ladies, neither of whom could
have seen more than eighteen summers,
now left the sofa upon which
they had been sitting, and, with arms
intertwined, approached the open
window. Luis remained motionless
as the leaves that surrounded him,
and which were undisturbed by a
breath of wind. The ladies leaned
forward over the window-sill, enjoying
the freshness of the night; and one
of them, the lively brunette who had
taken a part in the seguidilla, plucked
some sprays of jasmine which reared
their pointed leaves and white blossoms
in front of the window, and began
to entwine them in the hair of
her companion—a pale and somewhat
pensive beauty, in whose golden locks
and blue eyes the Gothic blood of old
Spain was yet to be traced. Presently
she was interrupted in this
fanciful occupation by a voice within
the room calling upon her to sing.
She obeyed the summons, and her
friend remained alone at the window.
No sooner was this the case than a
slight rustling occurred amongst the
branches of the tree, and the name of
“Rita” was uttered in a cautious
whisper. The lady started, and but half
suppressed a cry of terror. The next
instant the leaves were put aside, and
the light from the apartment fell upon
the countenance of Luis, who, with
uplifted finger, warned the agitated
girl to restrain her emotion.
“Santa Virgen!” she exclaimed,
leaning far out of the window, and
speaking in a hurried whisper, “this
is madness, Luis. My father is unchanged
in his sentiments, and I
dread his anger should he find you
here.”
“I will instantly depart,” replied
Luis, “if you promise me an interview.
I am about to leave Spain—perhaps
for ever; but I cannot go
without bidding you farewell. You
will not refuse me a meeting which
may probably be our last.”
“What mean you?” exclaimed
the lady. “Why do you leave Spain,
and when? But we shall be overheard.
To-morrow my father goes
to Tudela. Be here at mid-day.
Brigida will admit you.”
She held out her hand, which Luis
pressed to his lips. At that moment
the clatter of a horse’s hoofs, rapidly
approaching, was heard upon the hard
ground of the avenue. The lady
hastily withdrew her land and left
the window, whilst Luis again concealed
himself behind the screen of
foliage. Scarcely had he done so,
when a horseman dashed up to the
house, forced his steed up the three
or four broad steps leading to the
door, and, without dismounting or
looking for a bell or other means of
announcing his arrival, struck several
blows upon the oaken panels with
the butt of his heavy riding-whip.
Whilst the party above-stairs hurried
to the windows, and endeavoured to
discern who it was that disturbed
them in so unceremonious a manner,
a servant opened the small grated
wicket in the centre of the door, and
enquired the stranger’s pleasure.
“Is the Conde de Villabuena at
home?” demanded the horseman. “I
must see him instantly.”
“The name of your Señoria,” enquired
the domestic.
“It is unnecessary. Say that I
have a message to him from friends
at Madrid.”
The servant disappeared, and in
another moment his place was occupied
by a grave, stern-looking man,
between fifty and sixty years of age.
“I am Count Villabuena,” said he;
“what is your business?”
The stranger bent forward over his
horse’s mane, so as to bring his face
close to the wicket, and uttered three
words in a tone audible only to the
count, who replied to them by an
exclamation of surprise. The door
was immediately opened, and Villabuena
stood beside the horseman.
“When?” said he.
“Yesterday. I have ridden night
and day to bring you the intelligence,
and shall now push on to the interior
of Navarre. At the same time as
myself, others of our friends started,
north and south, east and west. Early
this morning, Santos Ladron heard it
at Valladolid, and Merino in Castile.
To-day the news has reached Vittoria;
this night they will be at Bilboa and
Tolosa. It is from the northern provinces
that most is expected; but
‘El Rey y la Religion’ is a rallying-cry[Pg 529]
that will rouse all Spaniards
worthy of the name. You are prepared
for the event, and know what
to do. Farewell, and success attend
us!”
The stranger set spurs to his horse,
and galloped down the avenue at
the same rapid pace at which he had
arrived. The count re-entered the
house; and, as soon as he had done so,
Luis dropped from his tree, and hurried
to rejoin Mariano. In another
hour they had returned to the venta.
Luis Herrera was the son of a Castilian
gentleman, who had suffered
much, both in person and property,
for his steady adherence to the constitutional
cause in Spain. Severely
wounded whilst fighting against the
Royalists and their French allies in
1823, Don Manuel Herrera with difficulty
escaped to England, taking with
him his only son, then a boy of eleven
years of age. In 1830 he changed his
residence to the south of France, and
thence, taking advantage of his proximity
to the frontier, and wishing his
son’s education to be completed in
Spain, he dispatched Luis to Madrid,
with a recommendation to the Conde
de Villabuena, who, notwithstanding
that his political principles were diametrically
opposed to those of Don
Manuel, was one of the oldest friends
of the latter. The count welcomed
Luis kindly, and received him into
his house, where for some months he
prosecuted his studies in company
with the young Villabuenas, and, at
the end of that time, went with them
to the university of Salamanca. The
vacations were passed by the young
men either at the count’s house at
Madrid, or at a country residence
near Tudela, north of which, in the
central valleys of his native province
of Navarre, the Conde de Villabuena
owned extensive estates. The count
was a widower, and, besides his two
sons, had an only daughter, who, at
the time of Luis’s arrival was in her
sixteenth year, and who added to
great personal attractions a share of
accomplishment and instruction larger
than is usually found even amongst
the higher classes of Spanish women.
During the first sojourn of Luis at the
count’s house, he was naturally thrown
a great deal into Doña Rita’s society,
and a reciprocal attachment grew up
between them, which, if it occasionally
afforded the young Villabuenas a subject
of good-humoured raillery, on the
other hand was unobserved or uncared
for by the count—a stern silent man,
whose thoughts and time were engrossed
by political intrigues. When
Luis went to Salamanca, his attachment
to Rita, instead of becoming
weakened or obliterated, appeared to
acquire strength from absence; and
she, on her part, as each vacation
approached, unconsciously looked forward
with far more eagerness to the
return of Herrera than to that of her
brothers.
The autumn of 1832 arrived, and
the count and his family, including
Luis, were assembled at the villa near
Tudela. The attachment existing
between Rita and Luis had become
evident to all who knew them; and
even the count himself seemed occasionally,
by a quiet glance and grave
smile, to recognise and sanction its
existence. Nor was there any very
obvious or strong reason for disapproval.
The family of Herrera was
ancient and honourable; and, although
Don Manuel’s estates had been confiscated
when he fled the country, he
had previously remitted to England a
sum that secured him a moderate independence.
The state of things in
Spain was daily becoming more favourable
to the hopes of political
exiles. The declining health of Ferdinand
had thrown the reins of
government almost entirely into the
hands of Queen Christina, who, in
order to increase the number of her
adherents, and ensure her daughter’s
succession to the throne, favoured the
return to Spain of the Liberal party.
Although Don Manuel, who was known
to be obstinate and violent in his
political views, had not yet been included
in the amnesties published, it
was thought that he speedily would
be so; and then time and importunity,
and an adherence to the established
order of things, might perhaps procure
him the restitution of some part
of his confiscated property.
It chanced, that on the fourth day
after the arrival of Luis and the Villabuenas
from Salamanca, the two
latter rode over to the Ebro, below
Tudela, for the purpose of bathing.
They were not good swimmers, and[Pg 530]
were moreover unaccustomed to bathe
in so rapid and powerful a stream. A
peasant, who observed two horses
tied to a tree, and some clothes upon
the grass by the river side, but who
could see nothing of the owners, suspected
an accident, and gave the alarm.
A search was instituted, and the dead
bodies of the unfortunate young men
were found upon the sandy shore of an
island some distance down the river.
This melancholy event was destined
to have an important influence on the
position of Luis Herrera in the family
of Count Villabuena, and on his
future fortunes. Mingled with the
natural grief felt by the count at the
untimely death of his children, were
the pangs of disappointed pride and
ambition. He had reckoned upon the
gallant and promising young men, thus
prematurely snatched away, for the
continuance and aggrandizement of
his ancient name. Upon his daughter
he had hitherto scarcely bestowed a
thought. She would marry—honourably
of course, richly if possible; but
even in this last respect he would not
be inflexible, for where his pride of
birth did not interfere, Villabuena
was not an unkind father. But the
death of his sons brought about great
changes. The next heir to his title
and estates was a distant and unmarried
cousin, and to him the count
determined to marry his daughter,
whose beauty and large fortune in
money and unentailed estates, rendered
any objection to the match on
the part of her kinsman a most improbable
occurrence. As a first step
towards the accomplishment of this
scheme, the count resolved to put an
end at once to what he considered the
childish attachment existing between
Rita and Luis. Within a week after
the death of his sons, he had a conversation
with young Herrera, in
which he informed him of his intentions
with regard to his daughter, and
pointed out to him the necessity of
forgetting her. In vain did Luis declare
this to be impossible, and plead
the strength which his attachment
had acquired by his long permitted
intercourse with Rita. The count
cared little for such lover-like arguments;
he assured Luis that he was
mistaken, that time and absence
brought oblivion in their train, and
that after a few months, perhaps
weeks, of separation, he would wonder
at the change in his sentiments, and
laugh at the importance he had attached
to a mere boyish fancy. It so
happened, that on the day preceding the
one upon which this conversation took
place, a letter had been received from
Don Manuel Herrera, announcing his
speedy return to Spain, the much-desired
permission having at length
been obtained. In order to give Luis
an opportunity of speedily testing the
effects of absence, the count proposed
that he should at once set out for the
French frontier to meet his father.
Under the existing circumstances, he
said, it was undesirable that he should
remain under the same roof with his
daughter longer than could be avoided.
Although bitterly deploring the
prospect of an immediate and lasting
separation from Rita, Luis had no
choice but to adopt the course proposed;
nor would his pride have
allowed him to remain in the count’s
house an instant longer than his presence
there was acceptable. He feared
that the count would prevent his
having a last interview with Rita;
but this Villabuena did not think it
worth while to do, contenting himself
with repeating to his daughter the
communication he had already made
to Luis. When the latter sought his
mistress, he found her in tears and
great affliction. The blow was so
sudden and unexpected, that she could
scarcely believe in its reality, and
still less could she bring herself to
think that the count would persist in
his cruel resolution. “He will surely
relent,” she said, “when he sees how
unhappy his decision makes me; but
should he not do so, rest assured,
Luis, that I will never be forced into
this odious marriage. Sooner than
submit to it, a convent shall receive
me.” And once more repeating the
vows of constancy which they had so
often interchanged, the lovers separated.
At daybreak upon the following
morning, Luis set out for Bayonne.
The joy experienced by Don Manuel
Herrera upon once more treading his
native soil, did not so engross him as
to prevent his observing the melancholy
of his son. In reply to his
father’s enquiries, Luis informed him[Pg 531]
of his attachment to Rita, and of the
interdict which the count had put
upon its continuance. Don Manuel
was indignant at what he termed the
selfish and unfeeling conduct of Villabuena,
who would thus sacrifice his
daughter’s happiness to his own pride
and ambition. He then endeavoured
to rouse the pride of Luis, and to convert
his regrets into indignation; but,
finding himself unsuccessful, he resolved
to try the effect of change of
scene and constant occupation. He
set out with his son for Old Castile,
of which he was a native, and undertook
various journeys through the
province in search of a small estate,
such as his means would permit him
to purchase, and upon which he might
in future reside. This he at last
found, a few leagues to the south of
Burgos. The purchase completed,
there were still many arrangements to
make before Don Manuel could settle
down and enjoy the peaceful country
life which he had planned for himself,
and in making these arrangements he
took care to find his son abundant and
varied employment. But all his well-meant
efforts were in vain. Luis
could not detach his thoughts from
one all-engrossing subject; and at last,
although Count Villabuena had expressly
forbidden any correspondence
between his daughter and young Herrera,
the latter, after some weeks’
absence, unable to resist any longer
his desire to hear from Rita, ventured
to write to her. The letter was intercepted
by the count, and returned
unopened, with a few haughty lines
expressive of his indignation at the
ingratitude of Luis, who was requiting
the kindness he had received at
his hands by endeavouring to thwart
his plans and seduce the affections of
his daughter. The terms in which
this letter was couched roused the
ire of Don Manuel, who in his turn
forbade his son to expose himself to a
repetition of similar insults by any
communication with the count or his
daughter. Shortly afterwards Luis
returned to Salamanca to complete his
studies.
The profession of the law, to which
young Herrera was destined, had
never had any charms for him. His
own inclinations pointed to a military
career, which he had on various occasions
urged his father to allow him to
adopt; but Don Manuel had invariably
refused his request, alleging the
poor prospect of advancement in time
of peace, and in a service in which
nearly all promotion was gained by
interest and court-favour. Nevertheless,
from his earliest youth Luis had
devoted his leisure hours to the attainment
of accomplishments qualifying
him for the trade of war. He was
the boldest horseman, most skilful
swordsman, and best shot in the University
of Salamanca. His superiority
in these respects, his decided character,
and agreeable manners, had
gained him considerable popularity
amongst his fellow-students, who frequently
expressed their surprise, that
one whose vocation was evidently
military should abide by the dusty
folios and dry intricacies of the law.
More insupportable than ever did
his studies now appear to Luis, who
nevertheless persevered in them for
several months after his father’s return
to Spain, endeavouring by strenuous
application to divert his thoughts
from his hopeless attachment. Weary
at length of the effort, he determined
to abandon a pursuit so uncongenial
to his tastes, and to seek a more active
course of life, and one for which
he felt he was better suited. His
plan was to repair to Africa, and endeavour
to obtain a commission in
one of the foreign corps which the
French were raising for their campaign
against the Bedouins. Should he fail
in this, he would serve as a volunteer,
and trust to his courage and merits
for procuring him advancement. Previously,
however, to the execution of
this scheme, he resolved to see Rita
once more, ascertain from her own
lips whether there was a chance of
the count’s relenting, and, should
there be none, bid her a last farewell.
He would then return to his father’s
house, and obtain Don Manuel’s sanction
to his project.
Since the unfortunate death of the
young Villabuenas, Herrera’s chief
intimate at the University had been
Mariano Torres, a hot-headed, warm-hearted
Arragonese, entirely devoted
to Luis, to whom he looked up as a
model of perfection. To this young[Pg 532]
man Luis had confided his love for
Rita, and her father’s opposition,
and to him he now communicated his
new plans. To his infinite surprise,
scarcely had he done so when Mariano,
instead of expressing regret at
his approaching departure, threw his
three-cornered student’s hat to the
ceiling, tore off his gown, and declared
his intention of accompanying his
friend to Africa, or to any other part
of the world to which he chose to betake
himself. Luis tried to persuade
him to abandon so mad a resolution;
but Torres persisted in it, protesting
that it would suit his taste
much better to fight against Bedouins
than to become a bachelor of
arts, and that he had always intended
to leave the University with
his friend, and to accompany him
wherever he might go. Trusting
that, by the time they should reach
Navarre, Mariano’s enthusiasm would
cool down, and his resolution change,
Luis at length yielded, and the
two friends left Salamanca together.
Travelling by the public conveyances,
they reached Valladolid, and
subsequently the town of Soria,
whence they had still nearly twenty
leagues of high-road to Tudela. The
path across the mountains being considerably
shorter, and in order to
diminish the risk of being seen by persons
who might inform the count of
his arrival, Luis resolved to complete
the journey on foot; and after two
short days’ march, the young men
reached the neighbourhood of Count
Villabuena’s residence.
The church and convent clocks of
the right Catholic city of Tudela had not
yet chimed out the hour of noon, when
Luis, impatient for the interview promised
by Rita, entered the count’s
domain by the same path as on the
previous evening. Before he came in
sight of the house, he was met at an
angle of the shrubbery by Rita herself.
“I was sure you would take this
path,” said she, with a smile in which
melancholy was mingled with the
pleasure she felt at seeing her lover;
“it was your favourite in days gone
by. Our interview must be very brief.
My father was to have remained
at Tudela till evening, but something
has occurred to derange his plans.
He sat up the whole night in close
conference with some gentlemen. At
daybreak two couriers were dispatched,
and the count rode away with his
friends without having been in bed.
He may return at any moment.”
Luis drew the arm of his mistress
through his own, and they slowly
walked down one of the alleys of the
garden. Rita had little to tell him
favourable to the hopes which he
still, in spite of himself, continued
to cherish. The appeals which she
had ventured to make to her father’s
affection, and to his regard for her
happiness, had been met by severe
reproof. Her evident depression and
melancholy remained unnoticed, or at
least unadverted to, by the count. All
that she said only confirmed Luis in
his resolution of seeking high distinction
or an honourable death in a
foreign service. He was deliberating,
with eyes fixed upon the ground, on
the best manner of breaking his intentions
to Rita, when an exclamation
of alarm from her lips caused him
to look up, and he saw Villabuena
crossing on horseback the end of the
walk along which they were advancing.
The count’s head was turned towards
them, and he had without doubt seen
and recognised them.
Herrera’s resolution was instantly
taken. He would seek the count’s
presence, take upon himself the whole
blame of his clandestine meeting with
Rita, and appease her father’s anger
by informing him of his proposed self-banishment.
Before, however, he
had succeeded in calming Rita’s fears,
he again perceived the count, who
had left his horse, and was advancing
slowly towards them, with a grave,
but not an angry countenance. On
his near approach, Luis was about to
address him; but by a wave of his
hand Villabuena enjoined silence.
“Return to the house, Rita,” said
he in a calm voice: “and, you, Señor de
Herrera, remain here; I would speak
a few words with you.”
Tremblingly, and with one last lingering
look at Luis, Rita withdrew.
“We will walk, sir, if you please,”
said the count; and the two men
walked for some distance side by side
and in silence; Villabuena apparently[Pg 533]
plunged in reflection, Luis wondering
at his forbearance, and impatient for
its explanation.
“You are surprised,” said the
count at last, “after all that has
passed, that I show so little resentment
at your uninvited presence here,
and at Rita’s infringement of my positive
commands.”
Luis would have spoken, but Villabuena
resumed.
“You will be still more astonished
to learn, that there is a possibility of
your attachment receiving my sanction.”
Herrera started, and his face was
lighted up with sudden rapture.
“You will of course have heard,”
continued the count, “of the important
intelligence received here last
night, and with which this morning
all the country is ringing. I allude
to the death of Ferdinand VII.”
“I had not heard of it,” replied
Luis, much surprised; for, although
the desperate state of the king’s
health was well known, his malady had
lasted so long that men had almost
left off expecting his death.
“I know I can depend upon your
honour, Luis,” said the count; “and
I am therefore about to speak to you
with a confidence which I should repose
in few so young and inexperienced.”
Luis bowed.
“Although,” resumed Villabuena,
“his Majesty Charles the Fifth is at
this moment absent from Spain, his
faithful subjects will not allow that
absence to be prejudicial to him. They
intend to vindicate his just rights, and
to overturn the contemptible faction
which, headed by an intriguing woman,
supports the unfounded claims
of a sickly infant. In anticipation of
Ferdinand’s death, all necessary measures
have been taken; and, before
three days elapse, you will see a
flame lighted up through the land,
which will speedily consume and destroy
the enemies of Spain, and of her
rightful monarch. Navarre and Biscay,
Valentia and Arragon, Catalonia and
Castile, will rise almost to a man in
defence of their king; the other provinces
must follow their example, or
be compelled to submission. Although
confident of success, it yet behoves us
to neglect no means of securing it;
nor are we so blinded as to think that
the faction which at present holds the
reins of government will resign them
without a struggle. Avoiding overconfidence,
therefore, which so often
leads to failure, each man must put
his shoulder to the wheel, and contribute
his best efforts to the one great
end, regardless of private sacrifices.
What I have to propose to you is
this. Time was when our universities
were the strongholds of loyalty
and religion; but that time is unfortunately
past, and the baneful doctrines
of republicanism and equality
have found their way even into those
nurseries of our priesthood and statesmen.
We are well informed that at
Salamanca especially, many of the
students, even of the better class, incline
to the self-styled Liberal party.
You, Luis, are ready of speech, bold
and prompt in action, and, moreover,
you are known to have great influence
amongst your fellow-students. Return,
then, to Salamanca, and exert
that influence to bring back into the
right path those who have been led
astray. Urge the just claims of
Charles V., hold out the prospect of
military glory and distinction, and of
the gratitude of an admiring country.
Let your efforts be chiefly directed to
gain over young men of wealthy and
influential families, and to induce them
to take up arms for the king. Form
them into a squadron, of which you
shall have the command, and the
private soldiers of which shall rank
as officers in the army, and subsequently
be transferred to other corps
to act as such. Appoint a place of
rendezvous; and, when your men are
assembled there, march them to join
the nearest division of the Royalist
army. I guarantee to you a captain’s
commission; and as soon as the king,
with whom I have some influence,
arrives in Spain, I will strongly recommend
you to his favour. Our
campaign, however brief, must afford
opportunities of distinction to brave
men who seek them. With your
energy, and with the natural military
talents which I am persuaded you
possess, high rank, honours, and riches
may speedily be yours. And when
Charles V., firmly seated on the throne[Pg 534]
of Spain, points you out to me as one
of those to whom he owes his crown,
and as a man whom he delights to
honour, I will no longer refuse to you
my daughter’s hand.”
However distant the perspective of
happiness thus offered to his view,
and although the avenue leading to it
was beset with dangers and uncertainties,
it promised to realize the
ardent hopes which Luis Herrera had
once ventured to indulge. Sanguine
and confident, he would at once have
caught at the count’s proposal, but
for one consideration that flashed
across his mind. He was himself
wedded to no political creed, and had
as yet scarcely bestowed a thought
upon the different parties into which
his countrymen were split. But his
father, who had so strenuously adhered
to the Liberal side, who had poured
out his blood with Mina, fought
side by side with Riego, sacrificed
his property, and endured a long
and wearisome exile for conscience
and his opinions’ sake—what would be
his feelings if he saw his only son
range himself beneath the banner of
absolutism? The struggle in the mind
of Luis, between love on the one hand
and filial duty and affection on the
other, was too severe and too equally
balanced to be instantly decided. He
remained silent, and the count, mistaking
the cause of his hesitation, resumed.
“You are surprised,” said he, “to
find me so willing to abandon my
dearest projects for the sake of a
remote advantage to the king’s
cause. But remember that I promise
nothing—all is contingent on your
own conduct and success. And although
you may have thought me unfeeling
and severe, I shall gladly, if
possible, indulge the inclinations of
my only surviving child.”
It required all Herrera’s firmness
and sense of duty to prevent him from
yielding to the temptation held out,
and pledging himself at once to the
cause of Charles V.
“You will not expect me, Señor
Conde,” said he, “to give an immediate
answer to a proposal of such
importance. I feel sincerely grateful
to you, but must crave a short delay
for consideration.”
“Let that delay be as brief as possible,”
said Villabuena. “In the
present circumstances, the value of
assistance will be doubled by its
promptness. When love and loyalty
are both in one scale,” added he, with
a slight smile, “methinks a decision
were easy.”
They had now approached the gate
of the garden, and Luis, desirous of
finding himself alone, to arrange his
thoughts and reflect on his future
conduct, took his leave. The count
held out his hand with some of his
former cordiality.
“You will write to me from Salamanca?”
said he.
Herrera bowed his head, and then,
fearful lest his assent should be misconstrued,
he replied—
“From Salamanca, or from elsewhere,
you shall certainly hear from
me, Señor Conde, and that with all
speed.”
The count nodded and turned towards
the house, whilst Luis retook
the road to the venta.
He found Mariano impatiently waiting
his return, and eager to learn the
result of his interview with Rita.
Upon being informed of the proposal
that had been made to Luis, Torres,
seeing in it only a means of happiness
for his friend, strongly urged him to
accept it. To this, however, Luis
could not make up his mind; and
finally, after some deliberation, he
resolved to proceed to Old Castile,
and endeavour to obtain his father’s
consent to his joining the party of
Don Carlos. Should he succeed in
this, of which he could not help entertaining
a doubt, he would no longer
hesitate, but at once inform the count
of his decision, and hasten to Salamanca
to put his instructions into
execution. Without further delay
the two friends set out for Tarazona,
where they trusted to find some means
of speedy conveyance to the residence
of Don Manuel.
In the kingdom of Old Castile, and
more especially in its mountainous
portions and the districts adjacent to
the Ebro, an extraordinary bustle
and agitation were observable during
the first days of October 1833. There
was great furbishing of rusty muskets,[Pg 535]
an eager search for cartridges, much
dusting of old uniforms that had long
served but as hiding-places for moths,
and which were now donned by men,
many of whom seemed but ill at ease
in their military equipments. For
ten years Spain had been tranquil, if
not happy; but now, as if even this
short period of repose were too long
for the restless spirit of her sons, a
new pretext for discord had been
found, and an ominous stir, the forerunner
of civil strife, was perceptible
through the land. Whilst Santos
Ladron, an officer of merit, who had
served through the whole of the war
against Napoleon, raised the standard
of Charles V. in Navarre, various
partisans did the same in the country
south of the Ebro. In the northeastern
corner of Castile, known as
the Rioja, Basilio Garcia, agent for
the Pope’s bulls in the province of
Soria—a man destitute of military
knowledge, and remarkable only for
his repulsive exterior and cold-blooded
ferocity—collected and headed
a small body of insurgents; whilst, in
other districts of the same province,
several battalions of the old Royalist
volunteers—a loose, ill-disciplined militia,
as motely and unsoldierlike in
appearance as they were unsteady
and inefficient in the field—ranged
themselves under the orders of a general-officer
named Cuevillas, and of
the veteran Merino. To these soon
joined themselves various individuals
of the half-soldier half-bandit class, so
numerous in Spain—men who had
served in former wars, and asked no
better than again to enact the scenes
of bloodshed and pillage which were
their element. The popularity and
acknowledged skill of Merino as a
guerilla-leader, secured to him the
services of many of these daring
and desperate ruffians, who flocked
joyously to the banner of the soldier-priest,
under whose orders some of
them had already fought.
Through a tract of champaign
country in the province of Burgos, a
column of these newly-assembled
troops was seen marching early upon
the third morning after the interview
between Luis Herrera and Count Villabuena.
It consisted of a battalion
of the Realista militia, for the most
part middle-aged citizens, who, although
they had felt themselves bound
to obey the call to arms, seemed but
indifferently pleased at having left
their families and occupations. Their
equipment was various: few had
complete uniform, although most of
them displayed some part of one; but
all had belts and cartridge-box, musket
and bayonet. Although they had
as yet gone but a short distance, many
of them appeared footsore and weary;
and it was pretty evident that, in the
event of a campaign, their ranks
would be thinned nearly as much by
the fatigues of the march as by the
fire of the enemy. In front and rear
of the battalion marched a squadron
of cavalry, of a far more soldierly
aspect than the foot-soldiers, although
even amongst them but little
uniformity of costume was found.
The bronzed and bearded physiognomy,
athletic form and upright carriage,
which bespeak the veteran
soldier, were not wanting in their
ranks; their horses were active and
hardy, their arms clean and serviceable.
At the head of the column, a few
paces in advance, rode a small group
of officers, the chief amongst whom
was only to be distinguished by the
deference shown to him by his
companions. Insignia of rank he
had none, nor any indications of his
military profession, excepting the
heavy sabre that dangled against the
flank of his powerful black charger.
His dress was entirely civilian, consisting
of a long surtout something
the worse for wear, and a round hat.
Heavy spurs upon his heels, and an
ample cloak, now strapped across his
holsters, completed the equipment of
the cura Merino, in whose hard and
rigid features, and wiry person, scarcely
a sign of decay or infirmity was
visible after more than sixty years of
life, a large portion of which had
been passed amidst the fatigues and
hardships of incessant campaigning.
As if infected by the sombre and
taciturn character of their leader, the
party of officers had been riding for
some time in silence, when they came
in sight of a house situated at a short
distance from the road, and of a superior
description to the caserias and[Pg 536]
peasants’ cottages which they had
hitherto passed. It was a building of
moderate size, with an appearance
of greater comfort and neatness
about it than is usually found in
Spanish houses. Stables adjoined it,
and, at some distance in its rear, a
range of barns and outhouses served
to store the crops produced by the
extensive tract of well-cultivated land
in the centre of which the dwelling
was situated. The front of the house
was partially masked from the road
by an orchard, and behind it a similar
growth of fruit trees seemed intended
to intercept the keen blasts from a
line of mountains which rose, grey
and gloomy, at the distance of a few
miles.
“Who lives yonder?” abruptly enquired
Merino, pointing to the house,
which he had been gazing at for some
time from under his bushy eyebrows.
The officer to whom the question was
addressed referred to another of the
party, a native of that part of the
country.
“Señor de Herrera,” was the answer.
“We have been riding for
some minutes through his property.
He purchased the estate about a year
ago, on his return from France.”
“What had he been doing in
France?”
“Living there, which he could not
have done here unless he had been
bullet-proof, or had a neck harder
than the iron collar of the garrote.”
“Herrera!” repeated the cura musingly—”I
know the name, but there
are many who bear it. There was a
Manuel Herrera who sat in the Cortes
in the days of the constitutionalists,
and afterwards commanded a battalion
of their rabble. You do not
mean him?”
“The same, general,” replied the
officer, addressing Merino by the rank
which he held in the Spanish army
since the war of Independence. A
most unpriestly ejaculation escaped
the lips of the cura.
“Manuel Herrera,” he repeated;
“the dog, the negro,[1] the friend of
the scoundrel Riego! I will hang him
up at his own door!”
All the old hatreds and bitter party
animosities of Merino seemed wakened
into new life by the name of one of
his former opponents. His eyes
flashed, his lips quivered with rage,
and he half turned his horse, as if
about to proceed to Herrera’s house
and put his threat into execution.
The impulse, however, was checked
almost as soon as felt.
“Another time will do,” said he,
with a grin smile. “Let us once
get Charles V. at Madrid, and we will
make short work of the Señor Herrera
and of all who resemble him.”
And the cura continued his march,
silent as before.
He had proceeded but a short half
mile when the officer commanding the
cavalry rode up beside him.
“We have no forage, general,”
said he—”not a blade of straw, or a
grain in our corn-sacks. Shall I send
on an orderly, that we may find it
ready on reaching the halting-place?”
“No!” replied Merino. “Send a
party to that house on the left of the
road which we passed ten minutes
ago. Let them press all the carts
they find there, load them with corn,
and bring them after us.”
The officer fell back to his squadron,
and the next minute a subaltern and
twenty men detached themselves from
the column, and, at a brisk trot, began
retracing their steps along the
road. Upon arriving in sight of the
house to which they were proceeding,
they leaped their horses over a narrow
ditch dividing the road from the
fields and struck across the latter in
a straight line, compelled, however,
by the heaviness of the ground to
slacken their pace to a walk. They had
not got over more than half the distance
which they had to traverse,
when they heard the clang of a bell,
continuously rung; and this was followed
by the appearance of two men,
who issued from the stables and out-buildings,
and hurried to the house.
Scarcely had they entered when the[Pg 537]
shutters of the lower windows were
pushed to, and the heavy door closed
and barred. The soldiers were now
within a hundred yards of the dwelling.
“Hallo!” cried the officer contemptuously,
“they will not stand a
siege, will they? The old don is a
black-hearted rebel, I know; but he
will hardly be fool enough to resist
us.”
The trooper was mistaken. The
courage of Don Manuel Herrera was
of that obstinate and uncalculating
character which would have induced
him to defend his house, single-handed,
against a much larger force than that
now brought against it. When he
had learned, three days previously,
that risings were taking place in his
own neighbourhood in the name of
Charles V., he had attached very
little importance to the intelligence.
An old soldier himself, he entertained
the most unmitigated contempt for
the Realista volunteers, whom he
looked upon as a set of tailors,
whose muskets would rather encumber
them than injure any body else;
and who, on the first appearance of
regular troops, would infallibly throw
down their arms, and betake themselves
to their homes. As to the
parties of insurgent guerillas which
he was informed were beginning to
show themselves at various points of
the vicinity, he considered them as
mere bandits, availing themselves of
the stir and excitement in the country
to exercise their nefarious profession;
and, should any such parties attempt
to molest him, he was fully determined
to resist their attacks. In this
resolution he now persevered, although
he rightly conjectured that the horsemen
approaching his house were either
the rearguard or a detachment of the
disorderly-looking column of which he
had a short time previously observed
the passage.
“Hola! Don Manolo!” shouted
the officer, as he halted his party in
front of the house; “what scurvy hospitality
is this? What are you fastening
doors and ringing alarm-bells
for, as if there were more thieves than
honest men in the land? We come
to pay you a friendly visit, and, instead
of welcome and the wine-skin,
you shut the door in our faces. Devilish
unfriendly, that, Don Manolito!”
The speaker, who, like many of
Merino’s followers, was an inhabitant
of the neighbouring country, knew
Don Manuel well by name and reputation,
and was also known to him as
a deserter from the Constitutionalists
in 1823, and as one of the most desperate
smugglers and outlaws in the
province.
“What do you want with me, Pedro
Rufin?” demanded Don Manuel,
who now showed himself at one of
the upper windows; “and what is the
meaning of this assemblage of armed
men?”
“The meaning is,” replied Rufin,
“that I have been detached from the
division of his Excellency General
Merino, to demand from you a certain
quantity of maize or barley, or
both, for the service of his Majesty
King Charles V.”
“I know no such persons,” retorted
Don Manuel, “as General Merino or
King Charles V. But I know you well,
Rufin, and the advice I give you is to
begone, yourself and your companions.
We shall have troops here to-day or
to-morrow, and you will find the
country too hot to hold you.”
The officer laughed.
“Troops are here already,” he said;
“you may have seen our column
march by not half an hour ago. But
we have no time to lose. Once more,
Señor Herrera, open the door, and
that quickly.”
“My door does not open at your
bidding,” replied Don Manuel. “I
give you two minutes to draw off your
followers, and, if you are not gone by
that time, you shall be fired upon.”
“Morral,” said the officer to one of
his men, “your horse is a kicker, I
believe. Try the strength of the
door.”
The soldier left the ranks, and turning
his rawboned, vicious-looking
chestnut horse with its tail to the
house-door, he pressed his knuckles
sharply upon the animal’s loins, just
behind the saddle. The horse lashed
out furiously, each kick of his iron-shod
heels making the door crack and
rattle, and striking out white splinters
from the dark surface of the oak
of which it was composed. At the[Pg 538]
first kick Don Manuel left the window.
The soldiers stood looking on,
laughing till they rolled in their saddles
at this novel species of sledge-hammer.
Owing, however, to the
great solidity of the door, and the
numerous fastenings with which it was
provided on the other side, the kicks
of the horse, although several times
repeated, failed to burst it open;
and at last the animal, as if wearied
by the resistance it met with, relaxed
the vigour of its applications.
“Famous horse that of yours,
Morral!” said the officer; “as good
as a locksmith or a six-pounder. Try
it again, my boy. You have made
some ugly marks already. Another
round of kicks, and the way is open.”
“And if another blow is struck
upon my door,” said Don Manuel,
suddenly reappearing at the window,
to the soldier, “your horse will
go home with an empty saddle.”
“Silence! you old rebel,” shouted
Rufin, drawing a pistol from his
holster. “And you, Morral, never
fear. At it again, man.”
The soldier again applied his
knuckles to his horse’s back, and the
animal gave a tremendous kick. At
the same instant a puff of smoke
issued from the window at which Don
Manuel had stationed himself, the report
of a musket was heard, and the
unlucky Morral, shot through the
body, fell headlong to the ground.
“Damnation!” roared the officer,
firing his pistol at the window whence
the shot had proceeded; and immediately
his men, without waiting for
orders, commenced an irregular fire
of carbines and pistols against the
house. It was replied to with effect
from three of the windows. A man
fell mortally wounded, and two of the
horses were hit. Rufin, alarmed at
the loss the party had experienced,
drew his men back under shelter
of some trees, till he could decide on
what was best to be done. It seemed
at first by no means improbable that
the Carlists would have to beat a retreat,
or at any rate wait the arrival
of infantry, which it was not improbable
Merino might have sent to their
assistance when the sound of the firing
reached his ears. The lower windows
of the house were protected by strong
iron bars; and, although the defenders
were so few in number, their
muskets, and the shelter behind which
they fought, gave them a great advantage
over the assailants, whose carbines
would not carry far, and who
had no cover from the fire of their
opponents. At last a plan was devised
which offered some chance of success.
The party dismounted; and
whilst four men, making a circuit, and
concealing themselves as much as
possible behind trees and hedges, endeavoured
to get in rear of the building,
the others, with the exception of
two or three who remained with the
horses, advanced towards the front of
the house, firing as rapidly as they
could, in order, by the smoke and by
attracting the attention of the besieged,
to cover the manœig;uvre of their
comrades. The stratagem was completely
successful. Whilst Don Manuel
and his servants were answering
the fire of their assailants with some
effect, the four men got round the
house, climbed over a wall, found a
ladder in an out-building, and applied
it to one of the back-windows, which
they burst open. A shout of triumph,
and the report of their pistols, informed
their companions of their entrance,
and the next moment one of them
threw open the front door, and the
guerillas rushed tumultuously into the
house.
It was about two hours after these
occurrences, that Luis Herrera and
Mariano Torres arrived at Don Manuel’s
residence. They had been delayed
upon the road by the disturbed
state of the country, which rendered
it difficult to procure conveyances, and
had at last been compelled to hire a
couple of indifferent horses, upon
which, accompanied by a muleteer,
they had made but slow progress
across the mountainous district they
had to traverse. The news of the
Carlist insurrection had inspired Luis
with some alarm on account of his
father, whom he knew to be in the
highest degree obnoxious to many of
that party. At the same time he had
not yet heard of the perpetration of
any acts of violence, and was far from
anticipating the spectacle which met
his eyes when he at last came in view
of the Casa Herrera. With an exclamation[Pg 539]
of horror he forced his horse,
up a bank bordering the road, and,
followed by Mariano, galloped towards
the house.
Of the dwelling, so lately a model
of rural ease and comfort, the four
walls alone were now standing. The
roof had fallen in, and the tongues of
flame which licked and flickered round
the apertures where windows had
been, showed that the devouring
element was busy completing its
work. The adjoining stables, owing
to their slighter construction, and to
the combustibles they contained, had
been still more rapidly consumed.
Of them, a heap of smoking ashes and
a few charred beams and blackened
bricks were all that remained. The
paling of the tastefully distributed garden
was broken down in several places;
the parterres and melon-beds were
trampled and destroyed by the hoofs
of the Carlist horses, which had seemingly
been turned in there to feed, or
perhaps been ridden through it in utter
wantonness by their brutal owners.
The ground in front of the house was
strewed with broken furniture, and
with articles of wearing apparel, the
latter of which appeared to have belonged
to the Carlists, and to have
been exchanged by them for others of
a better description found in the house.
Empty bottles, fragments of food,
and a couple of wine-skins, of which
the greater part of the contents had
been poured out upon the ground, lay
scattered about near the carcass of a
horse and three human corpses, two of
the latter being those of Carlists, and
the third that of one of the defenders of
the house. A few peasants stood by,
looking on in open-mouthed stupefaction;
and above the whole scene of
desolation, a thick cloud of black
smoke floated like a funereal pall.
In an agony of suspense Luis enquired
for his father. The peasant to
whom he addressed the question,
pointed to the buildings in rear of the
house, which the Carlists, weary perhaps
of the work of destruction, had
left uninjured.
“Don Manuel is there,” said he,
“if he still lives.”
The latter part of the sentence was
drowned in the noise of the horse’s
feet, as Luis spurred furiously towards
the buildings indicated, which consisted
of barns, and of a small dwelling-house
inhabited by his father’s steward.
On entering the latter, his
worst fears were realized.
Upon a bed in a room on the ground
floor, Don Manuel Herrera was lying,
apparently insensible. His face was
overspread with an ashy paleness, his
eyes were closed, his lips blue and
pinched. He was partially undressed,
and his linen, and the bed upon which
he lay, were stained with blood. A
priest stood beside him, a crucifix in
one hand and a cordial in the other;
whilst an elderly peasant woman
held a linen cloth to a wound in
the breast of the expiring man. In
an adjacent room were heard the sobbings
and lamentations of women and
children. With a heart swollen almost
to bursting, Luis approached the bed.
“Father!” he exclaimed as he took
Don Manuel’s hand, which hung
powerless over the side of the couch—”Father,
is it thus I find you!”
The voice of his son seemed to
rouse the sufferer from the swoon or
lethargy in which he lay. He opened
his eyes, a faint smile of recognition
and affection came over his features,
and his feeble fingers strove to
press those of Luis. The priest made
a sign to the woman, and, whilst she
gently raised Don Manuel’s head, he
held the cordial to his lips. The effect
of the draught was instantaneous and
reviving.
“This is a sad welcome for you,
Luis,” said Don Manuel. “Your
home destroyed, and your father
dying. God be thanked for sending
you now, and no sooner! I can die
happy since you are here to close my
eyes.”
He paused, exhausted by the exertion
of speaking. A slight red foam
stood upon his lips, which the priest
wiped away, and another draught of
the cordial enabled him to proceed.
“My son,” said he, “my minutes
are numbered. Mark my last words,
and attend to them as you value my
blessing, and your own repose. I
foresee that this country is on the eve
of a long and bloody struggle. How
it may end, and whether it is to be
the last that shall rend unhappy Spain,
who can tell? But your course is[Pg 540]
plain before you. By the memory of
your sainted mother, and the love
you bear to me, be stanch to the
cause I have ever defended. You are
young, and strong, and brave; your
arm and your heart’s best blood are
due to the cause of Spanish freedom.
My son, swear that you will defend
it!”
No selfish thought of his own happiness,
which would be marred by the
oath he was required to take, nor any
but the one absorbing idea of smoothing
his dying father’s pillow by a
prompt and willing compliance with
his wishes, crossed the mind of Luis
as he took the crucifix from the hand
of the priest, and, kneeling by the bedside,
swore on the sacred emblem to
obey Don Manuel’s injunctions both
in letter and spirit, and to resist to his
latest breath the traitors who would
enslave his country. His father listened
to the fervent vow with a well-pleased
smile. By a last effort he
raised himself in his bed, and laid his
hand upon the head of his kneeling
son.
“May God and his saints prosper
thee, Luis,” said he, “as thou observest
this oath!”
He sank back, his features convulsed
by the pain which the movement
occasioned him.
“Mother of God!” exclaimed the
woman, who was still holding the
bandage to the wound. The bleeding,
which had nearly ceased, had recommenced
with redoubled violence,
and a crimson stream was flowing
over the bed. The death-rattle was
in Don Manuel’s throat, but his eyes
were still fixed upon his son, and he
seemed to make an effort to extend
his arms towards him. With feelings
of unutterable agony, Luis bent forward
and kissed his father’s cheek.
It was that of a corpse.
For the space of a minute did the
bereaved son gaze at the rigid features
before him, as if unable to comprehend
that one so dear was gone from him
for ever. At last the sad truth forced
itself upon his mind; he bowed his
face upon the pillow of his murdered
parent, and his overcharged feelings
found relief in a passion of tears. The
priest and the woman left the apartment.
Mariano Torres remained
standing behind his friend, and after
a time made an effort to lead him
from the room. But Luis motioned
him away. His grief was of those
that know not human consolation.
It was evening when Mariano, who
had been watching near the chamber
of death, without venturing to intrude
upon his friend’s sorrow, saw the door
open and Luis come forth. Torres
started at seeing him, so great was
the change that had taken place in
his aspect. His cheeks were pale
and his eyes inflamed with weeping,
but the expression of his countenance
was no longer sorrowful; it was stern
even to fierceness, and his look was
that of an avenger rather than a
mourner. Taking Mariano’s arm, he
led him out of the house, and, entering
the stable, began to saddle his horse
with his own hands. Torres followed
his example in silence, and then both
mounted and rode off in the direction
of the high-road. Upon reaching it,
Mariano first ventured to address a
question to his friend.
“What are your plans, Luis?”
said he. “Whither do we now proceed?”
“To provide for my father’s funeral,”
was the reply.
“And afterwards?” said his friend,
with some hesitation.
“To revenge his death!” hoarsely
shouted Herrera, as he spurred his
horse to its utmost speed along the
rough road that led to the nearest
village.
FOOTNOTE:
We hear much, and much that is
true, of the ephemeral character of
a large part of our literature; but
to no branch of it are the observations
more truly applicable, than to
the greater number of travels which
now issue from the British press. It
may safely be affirmed that our writers
of travels, both male and female, have
of late years arrived at a pitch of weakness,
trifling, and emptiness, which is
unparalleled in the previous history
of literature in this or perhaps any
other country. When we see two
post octavos of travels newly done up
by the binder, we are prepared for a
series of useless remarks, weak attempts
at jokes, disquisitions on
dishes, complaints of inns, stale anecdotes
and vain flourishes, which almost
make us blush for our country,
and the cause of intelligence over the
world. The Russian Emperor, who
unquestionably has the power of
licensing or prohibiting any of his
subjects to travel at his own pleasure,
is said to concede the liberty only to
the men of intelligence and ability in
his dominions; the fools are all obliged
to remain at home. Hence the
high reputation which the Muscovites
enjoy abroad and the frequent disappointment
which is felt by travellers
of other nations, when they visit their
own country. It is evident, from the
character of the books of travels
which every spring issue from the
London press, with a few honourable
exceptions, that no such restraining
power exists in the British dominions.
We have no individuals or particular
works in view in these observations.
We speak of things in general. If any
one doubts their truth, let him enquire
how many of the numberless travels
which annually issue from the British
press are ever sought after, or heard
of, five years after their publication.
Our annual supply of ephemeral
travels is far inferior in point of
merit to the annual supply of novels.
This is the more remarkable, because
travels, if written in the right
spirit, and by persons of capacity and
taste, are among the most delightful,
and withal instructive, species of composition
of which literature can boast.
They are so, because by their very
nature they take the reader, as well as
the writer, out of the sphere of everyday
observation and commonplace remark.
This is an immense advantage:
so great indeed, that, if made use of
with tolerable capacity, it should give
works of this sort a decided superiority
in point of interest and utility over
all others, excepting History and the
higher species of Romance. Commonplace
is the bane of literature, especially
in an old and civilized state;
monotony—the thing to be principally
dreaded. The very air is filled with
ordinary ideas. General education,
universal reading, unhappily make
matters worse; they tend only to multiply
the echoes of the original report—a
new one has scarce any chance of
being heard amidst the ceaseless reverberation
of the old. The more ancient
a nation is, the more liable is it
to be overwhelmed by this dreadful
evil. The Byzantine empire, during a
thousand years of civilisation and opulence,
did not produce one work of
original thought; five hundred years
after the light of Athenian genius had
been extinguished, the schools of
Greece were still pursuing the beaten
paths, and teaching the doctrines of
Plato and Aristotle. It is the peculiar
and prodigious advantage of travelling,
that it counteracts this woful
and degrading tendency, and by directing
men’s thoughts, as well as
their steps, into foreign lands, has a
tendency to induce into their ideas a
portion of the variety and freshness
which characterize the works of nature.
Every person knows how great
an advantage this proves in society.
All must have felt what a relief it is
to escape from the eternal round of
local concerns or county politics, of
parish grievances or neighbouring
railroads, with which in every-day
life we are beset, to the conversation
of a person of intelligence who has
visited foreign lands, and can give to
the inquisitive at home a portion of
the new ideas, images, and recollections
with which his mind is stored.
How, then, has it happened, that the[Pg 542]
same acquaintance with foreign and
distant countries, which is universally
felt to be such an advantage in conversation,
is attended with such opposite
effects in literature; and that, while
our travellers are often the most
agreeable men in company, they are
beyond all question the dullest in
composition?
Much of this extraordinary and
woful deficiency, we are persuaded, is
owing to the limited range of objects
to which the education of the young
of the higher classes is so exclusively
directed in Oxford and Cambridge.
Greek and Latin, Aristotle’s logic
and classical versification, quadratic
equations, conic sections, the differential
calculus, are very good things,
and we are well aware that it is by
excellence in them that the highest
honours in these seminaries of learning
can alone be attained. They are
essential to the fame of a Parr or a
Porson, a Herschel or a Whewell.
But a very different species of mental
training is required for advantageous
travelling. Men will soon find that
neither Greek prose nor Latin prose,
Greek verse nor Latin verse, will
avail them when they come to traverse
the present states of the world.
The most thorough master of the higher
mathematics will find his knowledge
of scarce any avail in Italy or Egypt,
the Alps or the Andes. These acquisitions
are doubtless among the greatest
triumphs of the human understanding,
and they are calculated to
raise a few, perhaps one in a hundred,
to distinction in classical or scientific
pursuits; but upon the minds of the
remaining ninety-nine, they produce
no sort of impression. Nature simply
rejects them; they are not the food
which she requires. They do not do
much mischief to such persons in
themselves; but they are of incalculable
detriment by the time and the
industry which they absorb to no
available purpose. Ten years of youth—the
most valuable and important
period of life—are wasted in studies
which, to nineteen-twentieths of the
persons engaged in them, are of no
use whatever in future years. Thus
our young men, of the highest rank
and best connexions, are sent out
into the world without any ideas or
information which can enable them to
visit foreign countries with advantage.
Need we wonder that, when
they come to write and publish their
travels, they produce such a woful
brood of ephemeral bantlings?[2]
The reaction against this enormous
evil in a different class of society, has
produced another set of errors in
education—of an opposite description,
but perhaps still more fatal to the
formation of the mental character,
which is essential to the useful or
elevating observation of foreign countries.
The commercial and middle
classes of society, educated at the
London university, or any of the
numerous academies which have
sprung up in all parts of the country,
have gone into the other extreme.
Struck with the uselessness, to the
great bulk of students, of the classical
minutiæ required at one of the universities,
and the mathematical depth
deemed indispensable at the other,
they have turned education into an
entirely different channel. Nothing
was deemed worthy of serious attention,
except what led to some practical
object in life. Education was
considered by their founders as merely
a step to making money. Science
became a trade—a mere handmaid to
art. Mammon was all in all. Their
instruction was entirely utilitarian.
Mechanics and Medicine, Hydraulics
and Chemistry, Pneumatics and Hydrostatics,
Anatomy and Physiology,
constituted the grand staples of their
education. What they taught was
adapted only for professional students.
One would suppose, from examining
their course of study, that all men
were to be either doctors or surgeons,
apothecaries or druggists, mechanics,
shipwrights, or civil-engineers. No
doubt we must have such persons—no
doubt it is indispensable that places
of instruction should exist in which
they can learn their various and highly
important avocations; but is that the[Pg 543]
school in which the enlarged mind is
to be formed, the varied information
acquired, the appreciation of the grand
and the beautiful imbibed, which are
essential to an accomplished and really
useful writer of travels? Sulphuric
acid and Optics, Anatomy and Mechanics,
will do many things; but they
will never make an observer of Nature,
a friend of Man, a fit commentator
on the world of God.
Persons of really cultivated minds
and enlarged views will probably find
it difficult to determine which of these
opposite systems of education is the
best calculated to attain what seems
the grand object of modern instruction,
the cramping and limiting the
human mind. But without entering
upon this much-disputed point—upon
which much is to be said on both
sides, and in which each party will
perhaps be found to be in the right
when they assail their opponents, and
in the wrong when they defend themselves—it
is more material to our present
purpose to observe, that both are
equally fatal to the acquisition of the
varied information, and the imbibing
of the refined and elegant taste, which
are essential to an accomplished writer
of travels. Only think what mental
qualifications are required to form
such a character! An eye for the
Sublime and the Beautiful, the power
of graphically describing natural scenery,
a vivid perception of the peculiarities
of national manners, habits,
and institutions, will at once be acknowledged
to be the first requisites.
But, in addition to this, how much is
necessary to make a work which shall
really stand the test of time, in the
delineation of the present countries of
the world, and the existing state of
their inhabitants? How many branches
of knowledge are called for, how many
sources of information required, how
many enthusiastic pursuits necessary,
to enable the traveller worthily to discharge
his mission? Eyes and no
Eyes are nowhere more conspicuous in
human affairs; and, unhappily, eyes are
never given but to the mind which
has already seen and learned much.
An acquaintance with the history
of the country and the leading characters
in its annals, is indispensable to
enable the traveller to appreciate the
historical associations connected with
the scenes; a certain degree of familiarity
with its principal authors, to render
him alive to that noblest of interests—that
arising from the recollection of
Genius and intellectual Achievement.
Without an acquaintance with political
economy and the science of government,
he will be unable to give
any useful account of the social state
of the country, or furnish the most
valuable of all information—that relating
to the institutions, the welfare,
and the happiness of man. Statistics
form almost an indispensable part of
every book of travels which professes
to communicate information; but mere
statistics are little better than unmeaning
figures, if the generalizing
and philosophical mind is wanting,
which, from previous acquaintance
with the subjects on which they bear,
and the conclusions which it is of importance
to deduce from them, knows
what is to be selected and what laid
aside from the mass. Science, to the
highest class of travellers, is an addition
of the utmost moment; as it alone
can render their observations of use to
that most exalted of all objects, an
extension of the boundaries of knowledge,
and an enlarged acquaintance
with the laws of nature. The soul of a
poet is indispensable to form the most
interesting species of travels—a mind,
and still more a heart, capable of appreciating
the grand and the beautiful
in Art and in Nature. The eye of a
painter and the hand of a draughtsman
are equally important to enable him
to observe with accuracy the really
interesting features of external things,
and convey, by faithful and graphic
description, a correct impression of
what he has seen, to the mind of the
reader. Such are the qualifications
necessary for a really great traveller.
It may be too much to hope to find
these ever united in one individual;
but the combination of the majority
of them is indispensable to distinction
or lasting fame in this branch of
literature.
Compare these necessary and indispensable
qualifications for a great traveller,
with those which really belong
to our young men who are sent forth
from our universities or academies
into the world, and take upon themselves
to communicate what they have
seen to others. Does the youth come[Pg 544]
from Oxford? His head is full of
Homer and Virgil, Horace and Æschylus:
he could tell you all the amours
of Mars and Venus, of Jupiter and
Leda; he could rival, Orpheus or
Pindar in the melody of his Greek
verses, and Cicero or Livy in the correctness
of his Latin prose; but as, unfortunately,
he has to write neither
about gods nor goddesses, but mere
mortals, and neither in Greek verse
nor Latin verse, but good English
prose, he is utterly at a loss alike for
thought and expression. He neither
knows what to communicate, nor is he
master of the language in which it is
to be conveyed. Hence his recorded
travels dwindle away into a mere
scrap-book of classical quotations—a
transcript of immaterial Latin inscriptions,
destitute of either energy, information,
or eloquence. Does he
come from Cambridge? He could
solve cubic equations as well as Cardan,
is a more perfect master of logarithms
than Napier, could explain
the laws of physical astronomy better
than Newton, and rival La Grange in
the management of the differential
calculus. But as, unluckily, the world
which he visits, and in which we live,
is neither a geometric world nor an
algebraic world, a world of conic sections
or fluxions; but a world of
plains and mountains, of lakes and
rivers, of men and women, flesh and
blood—he finds his knowledge of little
or no avail. He takes scarce any interest
in the sublunary or contemptible
objects which engross the herd of ordinary
mortals, associates only with
the learned and the recluse in a few
universities, and of course comes back
without having a word to utter, or a
sentence to write, which can interest
the bulk of readers. Does he come
from the London University, or any of
the provincial academies? He is
thinking only of railroads or mechanics,
of chemistry or canals, of
medicine or surgery. He could descant
without end on sulphuric acid or
decrepitating salts, on capacity for
caloric or galvanic batteries, on steam-engines
and hydraulic machines, on
the discoveries of Davy or the conclusions
of Berzelius, of the systems of
Hutton or Werner, of Liebig or Cuvier.
But although an acquaintance
with these different branches of practical
knowledge is an indispensable
preliminary to a traveller in foreign
countries making himself acquainted
with the improvements they have
respectively made in the useful or
practical arts, they will never qualify
for the composition of a great or lasting
book of travels. They would
make an admirable course of instruction
for the overseer of a manufactory,
of a canal or railway company, of an
hospital or an infirmary, who was to
visit foreign countries in order to pick
up the latest improvements in practical
mechanics, chemistry, or medicine;
but have we really become a race of
shopkeepers or doctors, and is Science
sunk to be the mere handmaid of
Art?
We despair therefore, as long as the
present system of education prevails
in England, (and Scotland of course
follows in the wake of its great
neighbour,) of seeing any traveller
arise of lasting celebrity, or book of
travels written which shall attain to
durable fame. The native vigour
and courage, indeed, of the Anglo-Saxon
race, is perpetually impelling
numbers of energetic young men into
the most distant parts of the earth,
and immense is the addition which
they are annually making to the sum-total
of geographical knowledge. We
have only to look at one of our recent
maps, as compared to those which
were published fifty years ago, to see
how much we owe to the courage
and enterprise of Parry and Franklin,
Park and Horneman, of Burckhardt
and Lander. But giving all due
credit—and none give it more sincerely
than we do—to the vigour and courage
of these very eminent men, it is impossible
not to feel that, however
well fitted they were to explore unknown
and desert regions, and carry
the torch of civilization into the wilderness
of nature, they had not the
mental training, or varied information,
or powers of composition, necessary
to form a great writer of travels.
Clarke and Bishop Heber are most
favourable specimens of English travellers,
and do honour to the great
universities of which they were such
distinguished ornaments; but they
did not possess the varied accomplishments
and information of the continental
travellers. Their education,[Pg 545]
and very eminence in their peculiar
and exclusive lines, precluded it.
What is wanting in that character
above every thing, is an acquaintance
with, and interest in, a great many and
different branches of knowledge, joined
to considerable power of composition,
and unconquerable energy of
mind; and that is precisely what our
present system of education in England
renders it almost impossible for
any one to acquire. The system pursued
in the Scottish universities,
undoubtedly, is more likely to form
men capable of rising to eminence in
this department; and the names of
Park and Bruce show what travellers
they are capable of sending forth.
But the attractions of rank, connexion,
and fashion, joined to the advantage
of speaking correct English, are fast
drawing a greater proportion of the
youth of the higher ranks in Scotland
to the English universities; and the
education pursued at home, therefore,
is daily running more and more into
merely utilitarian and professional
channels. That system is by no
means the one calculated to form an
accomplished and interesting writer
of travels.
In this deficiency of materials for
the formation of a great body of male
travellers, the ladies have kindly
stepped in to supply the deficiency; and
numerous works have issued from the
press, from the pens of the most accomplished
and distinguished of our
aristocratic beauties. But alas! there
is no royal road to literature, any
more than geometry. Almack’s and
the exclusives, the opera and ducal
houses, the lordlings and the guards,
form an admirable school for manners,
and are an indispensable preliminary
to success at courts and coronations,
in ball-rooms and palaces. But the
world is not made up of courts or
palaces, of kings or princes, of dukes
or marquesses. Men have something
more to think of than the reception
which the great world of one country
gives to the great world of another—of
the balls to which they are invited,
or the fêtes which they grace
by their charms—or the privations to
which elegant females, nursed in the
lap of luxury, are exposed in roughing
it amidst the snows of the North
or the deserts of the South. We are
grateful to the lady travellers for
the brilliant and interesting pictures
they have given us of capitals and
manners,[3] of costume and dress,
and of many eminent men and women,
whom their rank and sex gave
them peculiar opportunities of portraying.
But we can scarcely congratulate
the country upon having
found in them a substitute for learned
and accomplished travellers of the
other sex; or formed a set-off on the
part of Great Britain, to the Humboldts,
the Chateaubriands, and
Lamartines of continental Europe.
It is impossible to contemplate the
works of these great men without
arriving at the conclusion, that it is
in the varied and discursive education
of the Continent, that a foundation
has been laid for the extraordinary
eminence which its travellers
have attained. It is the vast number
of subjects with which the young
men are in some degree made acquainted
at the German universities,
which has rendered them so capable
in after life of travelling with advantage
in any quarter of the globe, and
writing their travels with effect.
This advantage is in a peculiar manner
conspicuous in Humboldt, whose
mind, naturally ardent and capacious,
had been surprisingly enlarged and
extended by early and various study
in the most celebrated German universities.
He acquired, in consequence,
so extraordinary a command
of almost every department of physical
and political science, that there is
hardly any branch of it in which facts
of importance may not be found in
his travels. He combined, in a degree
perhaps never before equalled in one
individual, the most opposite and
generally deemed irreconcilable mental
qualities. To an ardent poetical
temperament, and an eye alive to the
most vivid impressions of external
things, he united a power of eloquence
rarely given to the most gifted
orators, and the habit of close and[Pg 546]
accurate reasoning which belongs to
the intellectual powers adapted for
the highest branches of the exact
sciences. An able mathematician, a
profound natural philosopher, an
exact observer of nature, he was at
the same time a learned statistician,
an indefatigable social observer, an
unwearied philanthropist, and the most
powerful describer of nature that
perhaps ever undertook to portray
her great and glorious features. It
is this extraordinary combination of
qualities that render his works so
surprising and valuable. The intellectual
and imaginative powers
rarely coexist in remarkable vigour
in the same individual; but when
they do, they produce the utmost
triumphs of the human mind. Leonardo
da Vinci, Johnson, Burke, and
Humboldt, do not resemble single
men, how great soever, but rather
clusters of separate persons, each
supremely eminent in his peculiar
sphere.
Frederick Henry Alexander, Baron
of Humboldt, brother of the celebrated
Prussian statesman of the same name,
was born at Berlin on the 14th September
1769, the same year with Napoleon,
Wellington, Goethe, Marshal
Ney, and many other illustrious men.
He received an excellent and extensive
education at the university of
Gottingeu, and at an academy at
Frankfort on the Oder. His first
step into the business of life was as a
clerk in the mercantile house of Buch,
at Hamburg, where he soon made
himself master of accounts and bookkeeping,
and acquired that perfect
command of arithmetic, and habit of
bringing every thing, where it is possible,
to the test of figures, by which
his political and scientific writings are
so pre-eminently distinguished. But
his disposition was too strongly bent
on scientific and physical pursuits, to
admit of his remaining long in the
comparatively obscure and uninviting
paths of commerce. His thirst for
travelling was from his earliest years
unbounded, and it erelong received
ample gratification. His first considerable
journey was with two naturalists
of distinction, Messrs Fontu
and Genns, with whom he travelled
in Germany, Holland, and England,
in the course of which his attention
was chiefly directed to mineralogical
pursuits. The fruit of his observations
appeared in a work, the first he
ever published, which was printed at
Brunswick in 1790, when he was only
twenty-one years of age, entitled
Observations sur les Basaltes du
Rhin.
To extend his information, already
very considerable, on mineralogical
science, Humboldt in 1791 repaired to
Freyburg, to profit by the instructions
of the celebrated Werner; and, when
there, he devoted himself, with the
characteristic ardour of his disposition,
to make himself master of geology and
botany, and prosecuted in an especial
manner the study of the fossil remains
of plants in the rocks around that
place. In 1792, he published at
Berlin a learned treatise, entitled
Specimen Floræ, Friebergensis Subterraniæ;
which procured for him
such celebrity, that he was soon after
appointed director-general of the
mines in the principalities of Anspach
and Bayreuth, in Franconia. His ardent
and philanthropic disposition
there exerted itself for several years
in promoting, to the utmost of his
power, various establishments of
public utility; among others, the
public school of Streben, from which
has already issued many distinguished
scholars. Charmed by the recent and
brilliant discoveries of M. Galvani in
electricity, he next entered with ardour
into that new branch of science;
and, not content with studying it in
the abstract, he made a great variety
of curious experiments on the effects
of galvanism on his own person, and
published the result in two octavos,
at Berlin, in 1796, enriched by the
notes of the celebrated naturalist
Blümenbach. This work was translated
into French by J. F. Jadelot,
and published at Paris in 1799.
Meanwhile Humboldt, consumed
with an insatiable desire for travelling,
resumed his wanderings, and
roamed over Switzerland and Italy,
after which he returned to Paris in
1797, and formed an intimacy with a
congenial spirit, M. Aimé Bonpland;
who afterwards became the companion
of his South American travels. At
this time he formed the design of
joining the expedition of Captain
Baudin, who was destined to circumnavigate[Pg 547]
the globe; but the continuance
of hostilities prevented him from
carrying that design into effect.
Baffled in that project, upon which
his heart was much set, Humboldt
went to Marseilles with the intention
of embarking on board a Swedish
frigate for Algiers, from whence he
hoped to join Napoleon’s expedition
to Egypt, and cross from the banks of
the Nile to the Persian Gulf and the
vast regions of the East. This was
the turning point of his destiny. The
Swedish frigate never arrived; the
English cruisers rendered it impossible
to cross the Mediterranean,
except in a neutral vessel; and after
waiting with impatience for about
two months, he set out for Madrid, in
the hope of finding means in the Peninsula
of passing into Africa from
the opposite shores of Andalusia.
Upon his arrival in the Spanish
capital, the German philosopher was
received with all the distinction which
his scientific reputation deserved; and
he obtained from the government
the extraordinary and unlooked-for
boon of a formal leave to
travel over the whole South American
colonies of the monarchy. This
immediately determined Humboldt.
He entered with ardour into the new
prospects thus opened to him; wrote to
his friend Aimé Bonpland to propose
that he should join him in the contemplated
expedition—an offer which
was gladly accepted; and soon the
visions of Arabia and the Himalaya
were supplanted by those of the
Pampas of Buenos Ayres and the
Cordilleras of Peru. The two friends
embarked at Corunna on board a
Spanish vessel, and after a prosperous
voyage, reached Cumana, in the New
World, in July 1799. From that
city they made their first expedition
in Spanish America, during which
they travelled over Spanish Guiana,
New Andalusia, and the Missions of
the Caribbees, from whence they returned
to Cumana in 1800. There
they embarked for the Havannah; and
the whole of the summer of that year
was spent in traversing that great and
interesting island, on which he collected
much important and valuable
information. In September 1801, he
set out for Quito, where he arrived in
January of the succeeding year, and
was received with the most flattering
distinction. Having reposed for some
months from their fatigues, Humboldt
and Bonpland proceeded, in the first
instance, to survey the country which
had been devastated in 1797 by the
dreadful earthquake, so frequent in
those regions, and which swallowed
up in a minute forty thousand persons.
Then he set out, in June 1802, to visit
the volcano of Tungaragno and the
summit of Chimborazo. They ascended
to the height of 19,500 feet on
the latter mountain; but were prevented
from reaching the top by impassable
ravines. Perched on one of the
summits, however, of this giant of
mountains, amidst ice and snow, far
above the abode of any living creature
except the condor, they made a
great variety of most interesting observations,
which have proved of essential
service to the cause of science.
They were 3485 feet above the most
elevated point which the learned Condamine,
who had hitherto ascended
highest, reached in 1745, but were still
2140 feet below the loftiest summit
of the mountain. They determined,
by a series of strict trigonometrical
observations, the height of the chief
peaks of that celebrated ridge—
Looks from his throne of clouds o’er half the world.”
Having returned, after this fatiguing
and dangerous mountain expedition,
to Lima, Humboldt remained several
months enjoying the hospitality of
its kind-hearted inhabitants, whose
warm feelings and excellent qualities
excited in him the warmest admiration.
In the neighbouring harbour
of Callao, he was fortunate enough to
see the passage of the planet Mercury
over the disk of the sun, of which
transit he made very important observations;
and from thence passed
into the province of New Spain, where
he remained an entire year, sedulously
engaged in agricultural, political,
and statistical, as well as physical
enquiries, the fruits of which added
much to the value of his published
travels. In April 1803, he proceeded
to Mexico, where he was so fortunate
as to discover the only specimen
known to exist of the tree called[Pg 548]
Cheirostomon Platanoides, of the
highest antiquity and gigantic dimensions.
During the remainder of that
year, he made several excursions over
the mountains and valleys of Mexico,
inferior to none in the world in interest
and beauty; and in autumn 1804,
embarked for the Havannah, from
whence he passed into Philadelphia,
and traversed a considerable part of
the United States. At length, in 1805,
he returned to Europe, and arrived
safe at Paris in November of that
year, bringing with him, in addition
to the observations he had made, and
recollections with which his mind was
fraught, the most extensive and varied
collection of specimens of plants and
minerals that ever was brought from
the New World. His herbarium consisted
of four thousand different plants,
many of them of extreme rarity even
in South America, and great part of
which were previously unknown in
Europe. His mineralogical collection
was of equal extent and value. But
by far the most important additions
he has made to the cause of science,
consist in the vast series of observations
he has made in the New World,
which have set at rest a great many
disputed points in geography, mineralogy,
and zoology, concerning that
interesting and, in a great degree,
unknown part of the world, and extended
in a proportional degree the
boundaries of knowledge regarding it.
Nor have his labours been less important
in collecting the most valuable statistical
information regarding the Spanish
provinces of those vast regions,
especially the condition of the Indian,
negro, and mulatto race which exist
within them, and the amount of the
precious metals annually raised from
their mines; subjects of vast importance
to Great Britain, and especially
its colonial and commercial interests,
but which have hitherto been in an
unaccountable manner neglected, even
by those whose interests and fortunes
were entirely wound up in the changes
connected with these vital subjects.
The remainder of Baron Humboldt’s
life has been chiefly devoted to the
various and important publications, in
which he has embodied the fruit of his
vast and extensive researches in the
New World. In many of these he
has been assisted by M. Aimé Bonpland,
who, his companion in literary
labour as in the danger and fatigues
of travelling, has, with the generosity
of a really great mind, been content
to diminish, perhaps destroy, his
prospect of individual celebrity, by
associating himself with the labours
Of his illustrious friend. Pursued
even in mature years by the desire of
fame, the thirst for still greater
achievements, which belongs to minds
of the heroic cast, whether in war or
science, he conceived, at a subsequent
period, the design of visiting the upper
provinces of India and the Himalaya
range. After having ascended higher
than man had yet done on the elevated
ridges of the New World, he was consumed
with a thirst to surmount the still
more lofty summits of the Old, which
have remained in solitary and unapproachable
grandeur since the waves
of the Deluge first receded from their
sides. But the East India Company,
within whose dominions, or at least
beneath whose influence, the highest
ridges of the Himalaya are situated,
gave no countenance to the design,
and even, it is said, refused liberty to
the immortal Naturalist to visit their
extensive territories. Whatever opinion
we may form on the liberality or
wisdom of this resolution, considered
with reference to the interests, physical,
moral, and political, of British
India, it is not to be regretted, for the
cause of science and literature over
the world, that the great traveller has
been prevented from setting out late
in life to a fresh region of discovery.
It has left the remainder of his life,
and his yet undiminished powers, to
illustrate and explain what he has
already seen. To do that, was enough
for the ordinary span of human life.
Humboldt’s works relating to the
New World are very numerous. I.
He first published, in 1805, at Paris,
in four volumes quarto, the Personal
Narrative of his travels from 1799
to 1804. Of this splendid and interesting
work, several editions have
since been published in French, in
twelve volumes octavo. It is upon
it that his fame with the generality
of readers mainly rests. II. Vues des
Cordilleras et Monumens des Peuples
Indigènes de l’Amerique—two volumes
folio: Paris, 1811. This magnificent
work, the cost of which is now[Pg 549]
£130, contains by far the finest views
of the Andes in existence. Its great
price renders it very scarce, and not
more than a few copies are to be met
with in Great Britain; but a cheap
edition, without the great plates, was
published at Paris in 1817. III.
Recueil d’Observations Astronomiques,
et de Mésures exécutées dans le Nouveau
Continent: two volumes quarto.
This learned work contains the result
of Humboldt’s astronomical and trigonometrical
observations on the
lunar distances, the eclipses of the
satellites of Jupiter, the transit of
Mercury, and upwards of five hundred
elevated points in the New
World, taken from barometrical observations,
with all the requisite allowances
and calculations carefully
made. IV. Essai sur la Geographie
des Plantes, ou Tableau Physique des
Regions Equinoxiales: in quarto, with
a great map. V. Plantes Equinoxiales
recueillies au Mexique, dans
l’Ile de Cuba, dans les Provinces de
Caraccas, &c.: two volumes folio.
A splendid and very costly work.
VI. Monographie des Mélastomes:
two volumes folio. A most curious
and interesting work on a most interesting
subject. VII. Nova Genera
et Species Plantarum: three volumes
folio. Containing an account of the
botanical treasures collected by him
in the New World, and brought home
in his magnificent herbarium. VIII.
Recueil des Observations de Zoologie et
d’Anatomie comparée faites dans un
Voyage aux Tropiques: two volumes
quarto. IX. Essai Politique sur la
Nouvelle Espagne. 1811: two volumes
quarto. Of this admirable
work a subsequent edition has been
published in 1822, in four volumes
octavo. It contains an astonishing
collection of important statistical facts,
arranged and digested with the utmost
ability, and interspersed with
political and philosophical reflections
on the state of the human race, and the
relation of society in the New World.
X. Ansichten der Natur. Tubingen,
1808: in octavo. It is remarkable
that this is the only one of the
learned author’s works on Spanish
America which originally appeared
in his own language; but it was soon
translated into French under the
title of Tableaux de la Nature. Paris:
1808. It contains a series of descriptions
of the different styles of scenery
and remarkable objects in the vast
regions he had visited, portrayed
with all the vigour and accuracy for
which the author is distinguished.
XI. De Distributione Geographicâ
Plantarum secundum Cœig;li Temperiem
et Altitudinem Montium, Prolegomena.
In octavo. Paris: 1817. The title
of this work explains its object and
its importance, in describing a portion
of the globe consisting of such lofty
and successive ridges and table-lands
as rise from the level of the sea to the
summits of the Cordilleras of Mexico
and Peru. XII. Sur l’Elevation des
Montagnes de l’Inde. Octavo. Paris:
1818. A work prepared when
the author was contemplating a journey
to the Himalaya and mountains
of Thibet. XIII. Carte du Fleuve
Orenoque. Presented to the Academy
of Sciences in 1817. M. Humboldt
has there demonstrated the singular
fact of the junction of the great rivers
Orinoco and of the Amazon by the
intermediate waters of the Rio Negro;
a fact which the sagacity of D’Anville
had long ago led him to suspect, but
which the travels of the indefatigable
German has established beyond a
doubt. XIV. Examen Critique de
l’Histoire de la Geographie du Nouveau
Continent, et du Progrès de l’Astronomie
Nautique aux 15me et 16me
siècles. Paris: 1837. XV. “Cosmos:”
in German—a “Scheme of a Physical
Description of the Universe.” This
last work embraces a much wider
sphere of learning and speculation
than any of the preceding, and is
more characteristic of the vast erudition
and ardent genius of the author.
From the brief account which has
now been given of the published
works of this indefatigable traveller
and author, the reader will be able to
appreciate the extent and variety of
his scientific and political attainments.
We shall now present him under a
different aspect, as an eloquent and
almost unrivalled describer of nature.
It need hardly be said that it is on
these splendid pictures, more even
than the numerous and valuable additions
he has made to the treasures
of science, that his reputation with
the world in general is founded.
The rapids of the Orinoco—one of the[Pg 550]
most striking scenes in America—are
thus described by our author:[4]—
“When we arrived at the top of the
Cliff of Marimi, the first object which
caught our eye was a sheet of foam,
above a mile in length and half a mile
in breadth. Enormous masses of black
rock, of an iron hue, started up here
and there out of its snowy surface.
Some resembled huge basaltic cliffs
resting on each other; many, castles in
ruins, with detached towers and fortalices,
guarding their approach from a
distance. Their sombre colour formed
a contrast with the dazzling whiteness
of the foam. Every rock, every island,
was covered with flourishing trees, the
foliage of which is often united above
the foaming gulf by creepers hanging
in festoons from their opposite branches.
The base of the rocks and islands, as far
as the eye can reach, is lost in the
volumes of white smoke, which boil
above the surface of the river; but
above these snowy clouds, noble palms,
from eighty to an hundred feet high,
rise aloft, stretching their summits of
dazzling green towards the clear azure
of heaven. With the changes of the
day these rocks and palm-trees are
alternately illuminated by the brightest
sunshine, or projected in deep shadow
on the surrounding surge. Never does
a breath of wind agitate the foliage,
never a cloud obscure the vault of
heaven. A dazzling light is ever shed
through the air, over the earth enameled
with the loveliest flowers, over the
foaming stream stretching as far as the
eye can reach; the spray, glittering in
the sunbeams, forms a thousand rainbows,
ever changing, yet ever bright,
beneath whose arches, islands of flowers,
rivalling the very hues of heaven, flourish
in perpetual bloom. There is nothing
austere or sombre, as in northern
climates, even in this scene of elemental
strife; tranquillity and repose seem to
sleep on the very edge of the abyss of
waters. Neither time, nor the sight
of the Cordilleras, nor a long abode
in the charming valleys of Mexico, have
been able to efface from my recollection
the impression made by these cataracts.
When I read the description of
similar scenes in the East, my mind sees
again in clear vision the sea of foam,
the islands of flowers, the palm-trees surmounting
the snowy vapours. Such
recollections, like the memory of the
sublimest works of poetry and the arts,
leave an impression which is never to
be effaced, and which, through the
whole of life, is associated with every
sentiment of the grand and the beautiful.”—(Vol.
vii. 171-172.)
Such is a specimen of the descriptive
powers of the great German
natural philosopher, geographer, botanist,
and traveller. When our
senior wranglers from Cambridge,
our high-honoured men from Oxford,
or lady travellers from London, produce
a parallel to it, we shall hope
that England is about to compete
with the continental nations in the
race of illustrious travellers—but not
till then.
As a contrast to this, we cannot
resist the pleasure of laying before our
readers the following striking description
of night on the Orinoco, in the
placid part of its course, amidst the
vast forests of the tropical regions:—
“The night was calm and serene,
and a beautiful moon shed a radiance
over the scene. The crocodiles lay extended
on the sand; placed in such a
manner that they could watch our fire,
from which they never turned aside
their eyes. Its dazzling evidently attracted
them, as it does fish, crabs, and
the other inhabitants of the waters.
The Indians pointed out to us in the
sand the recent marks of the feet of
three tigers, a mother and two young,
which had crossed the open space between
the forest and the water. Finding
no tree upon the shore, we sank the
end of our oars into the sand, in order
to form poles for our tents. Every
thing remained quiet till eleven at night,
when suddenly there arose, in the neighbouring
forest, a noise so frightful that
it became impossible to shut our eyes.
Amidst the voice of so many savage
animals, which all roared or cried at
once, our Indians could only distinguish
the howling of the jaguar, the yell of
[Pg 551]the tiger, the roar of the cougar, or
American lion, and the screams of some
birds of prey. When the jaguars approached
near to the edge of the forest,
our dogs, which to that moment had
never ceased to bark, suddenly housed;
and, crouching, sought refuge under the
shelter of our hammocks. Sometimes,
after an interval of silence, the growl
of the tiger was heard from the top of
the trees, followed immediately by the
cries of the monkey tenants of their
branches, which fled the danger by
which they were menaced.
“I have painted, feature by feature,
these nocturnal scenes on the Orinoco,
because, having but lately embarked on
it, we were as yet unaccustomed to their
wildness. They were repeated for
months together, every night that the
forest approached the edge of the river.
Despite the evident danger by which one
is surrounded, the security which the
Indian feels comes to communicate itself
to your mind; you become persuaded
with him, that all the tigers fear the
light of fire, and will not attack a man
when lying in his hammock. In truth,
the instances of attacks on persons in
hammocks are extremely rare; and during
a long residence in South America,
I can only call to mind one instance of
a Llanero, who was found torn in pieces
in his hammock opposite the island of
Uhagua.
“When one asks the Indians what is
the cause of this tremendous noise,
which at a certain hour of the night the
animals of the forest make, they answer
gaily, ‘They are saluting the full moon.’
I suspect the cause in general is some
quarrel or combat which has arisen in
the interior of the forest. The jaguars,
for example, pursue the pecaris and
tapirs, which, having no means of defence
but their numbers, fly in dense
bodies, and press, in all the agony of
terror, through the thickets which lie
in their way. Terrified at this strife,
and the crashing of boughs or rustling
of thickets which they hear beneath
them, the monkeys on the highest
branches set up discordant cries of
terror on every side. The din soon
wakens the parrots and other birds
which fill the woods, they instantly
scream in the most violent way, and
erelong the whole forest is in an uproar.
We soon found that it is not so much
during a full moon, as on the approach
of a whirlwind or a storm, that this
frightful concert arises among the wild
beasts. ‘May heaven give us a peaceable
night and rest, like other mortals!’
was the exclamation of the monk who
had accompanied us from the Rio Negro,
as he lay down to repose in our bivouac.
It is a singular circumstance to be reduced
to such a petition in the midst of
the solitude of the woods. In the hotels
of Spain, the traveller fears the sound
of the guitar from the neighbouring
apartment: in the bivouacs of the Orinoco,
which are spread on the open
sand, or under the shade of a single
tree, what you have to dread is, the infernal
cries which issue from the adjoining
forest.”—(Vol. vi., 222-3.)
One of the most remarkable of the
many remarkable features of Nature
in South America, is the prodigious
plains which, under the name of
Llanos and Pampas, stretch from the
shores of the Atlantic to the foot of
the Andes, over a space from fifteen
hundred to two thousand miles in
breadth. Humboldt traversed them
more than once in their full extent,
and has given the following striking
description of their remarkable peculiarities.
“In many geographical works, the
savannahs of South America are termed
prairies. That word, however, seems
not properly applicable to plains of
pasturage, often exclusively dry, though
covered with grass four or five feet
high. The Llanos and Pampas of South
America are true steppes: they present
a rich covering of verdure during
the rainy season; but in the months of
drought, the earth assumes the appearance
of a desert. The turf is then reduced
to powder, the earth gapes in
huge cracks; the crocodiles and great
serpents lie in a dormant state in the
dried mud, till the return of rains, and
the rise of the waters in the great rivers,
which flood the vast expanse of level
surface, awaken them from their long
slumber. These appearances are often
exhibited over an arid surface of fifty or
sixty leagues square—every where, in
short, where the savannah is not traversed
by any of the great rivers. On
the borders, on the other hand, of the
streams, and around the lakes, which in
the dry season retain a little brackish
water, the traveller meets from time to
time, even in the most extreme drought,
groves of Mauritia, a species of palm,
the leaves of which, spreading out like
[Pg 552]a fan, preserve amidst the surrounding
sterility a brilliant verdure.
“The steppes of Asia are all out of
the region of the tropics, and form in
general the summit of very elevated
plateaux. America also presents, on the
reverse of the mountains of Mexico, of
Peru, and of Quito, steppes of considerable
extent. But the greatest steppes,
the Llanos of Cumana, of Caraccas, and
of Meta, all belong to the equinoctial
zone, and are very little elevated above
the level of the ocean. It is this
which gives them their peculiar characters.
They do not contain, like the
steppes of Southern Asia, and the deserts
of Persia, those lakes without
issue, or rivers which lose themselves in
the sand or in subterraneous filtrations.
The Llanos of South America incline
towards the east and the south; their
waters are tributary to the Orinoco,
the Amazon, or the Rio de la Plata.
“What most strongly characterizes
the savannahs or steppes of South
America, is the entire absence of hills,
or inequalities of any kind. The soil,
for hundreds of miles together, is perfectly
flat, without even a hillock. For
this reason, the Castilian conquerors,
who penetrated first from Coro to the
banks of the Apuré, named the regions
to which they came, neither deserts, nor
savannahs, nor meadows, but plains—los
Llanos. Over an extent of thirty leagues
square, you will often not meet with an
eminence a foot high. The resemblance
to the sea which these immense plains
bear, strikes the imagination the more
forcibly in those places, often as extensive
as half of France, where the surface
is absolutely destitute of palms, or
any species of trees, and where the distance
is so great from the mountains,
or the forests on the shores of the
Orinoco, as to render neither visible.
The uniform appearance which the
Llanos exhibit, the extreme rarity of
any habitations, the fatigues of a journey
under a burning sun, and in an atmosphere
perpetually clouded with dust,
the prospect of a round girdle of an
horizon, which appears constantly to
recede before the traveller, the isolated
stems of the palm-tree, all precisely of the
same form, and which he despairs to
reach, because he confounds them with
other seemingly identical trunks which
appear in the distant parts of the horizon:
all these causes combine to make
these steppes appear even more vast
than they really are.
“Yet are their actual dimensions so
prodigious, that it is hard to outstrip
them, even by the wildest flights of the
imagination. The colonists, who inhabit
the slopes of the mountains which
form their extreme boundary on the
west and north, see the steppes stretch
away to the south and east, as far as
the eye can reach, an interminable
ocean of verdure. Well may they deem
it boundless! They know that from the
Delta of the Orinoco, crossing the province
of Vannos, and from thence by
the shores of the Meta, the Guaviare,
and the Caguan, you may advance in
the plains, at first from east to west,
then from north-east, to south-east,
three hundred and eighty leagues—a
distance as great as from Tombuctoo
to the northern coast of Africa. They
know, by the report of travellers, that the
Pampas of Buenos Ayres—which are
also Llanos, destitute of trees, covered
with rich grass, filled with cattle and
wild horses—are equally extensive.
They imagine, according to the greater
part of maps, that this huge continent
has but one chain of mountains, the
Andes, which forms its western boundary;
and they form a vague idea of
the boundless sea of verdure, stretching
the whole way from the foot of this gigantic
wall of rock, from the Orinoco
and the Apuré, to the Rio de la Plata
and the Straits of Magellan. Imagination
itself can hardly form an idea of
the extent of these plains. The Llanos,
from the Caqueta to the Apuré, and
from thence to the Delta of the Orinoco,
contain 17,000 square marine leagues—a
space nearly equal to the area of
France; that which stretches to the
north and south is of nearly double the
extent, or considerably larger than the
surface of Germany; and the Pampas
of Buenos Ayres, which extend from
thence towards Cape Horn, are of such
extent, that while one end is shaded by
the palm-trees of the tropics, the other,
equally flat, is charged with the snows of
the antarctic circle.”—(Vol. vi. 52, 67.)
These prodigious plains have been
overspread with the horses and cattle
of the Old World, which, originally introduced
by the Spanish settlers, have
strayed from the enclosures of their
masters, and multiplied without end in
the vast savannahs which nature had
spread out for their reception.
“It is impossible,” says Humboldt,
“to form an exact enumeration of the
cattle in the Pampas, or even to give an
approximation to it, so immensely have
[Pg 553]they augmented during the three centuries
which have elapsed since they
were first introduced; but some idea of
their number may be formed from the
following facts in regard to such portions
of these vast herds as are capable
of being counted. It is calculated that
in the plains from the mouths of the
Orinoco to the lake Maracaybo, there are
1,200,000 head of cattle, 180,000 horses,
and 90,000 mules, which belong to individual
proprietors. In the Pampas of
Buenos Ayres there are 12,000,000 cows
and 3,000,000 horses belonging to private
persons, besides the far greater
multitude which are wild, and wander
altogether beyond the reach of man.
Considerable revenues are realized from
the sale of the skins of these animals,
for they are so common that the carcasses
are of scarcely any value. They
are at the pains only to look after the
young of their herds, which are marked
once a-year with the initial letter of the
owner. Fourteen or fifteen thousand
are marked by the greater proprietors
every year, of which five or six thousand
are annually sold.”—(Vol. vi. 97.)
The enormous number of beasts of
prey which multiply with this vast accumulation
of animals to be devoured,
as well those introduced by man as
those furnished by the hand of nature,
renders the life of many of the inhabitants
of these regions little else than a
constant struggle with wild animals.
Many hairbreadth escapes and heroic
adventures are recounted by the natives,
which would pass for fabulous if
not stated on such unquestionable
authority as that of M. Humboldt,
and supported by the concurring testimony
of other travellers. The number
of alligators, in particular, on the
Orinoco, the Rio Apuré, and their
tributary streams, is prodigious; and
contests with them constitute a large
portion of the legendary tales of the
Indian and European settlers in the
forest.
“The numerous wild animals,” says
Humboldt, “which inhabit the forests on
the shores of the Orinoco, have made
apertures for themselves in the wall of
vegetation and foliage by which the
woods are bounded, out of which they
come forth to drink in the river. Tigers,
tapirs, jaguars, boars, besides numberless
lesser quadrupeds, issue out of these
dark arches in the green wilderness, and
cross the strip of sand which generally
lies between it and the edge of the water,
formed by the large space which
is annually devastated and covered with
shingle or mud, during the rise of the
water in the rainy season. These singular
scenes have always possessed a
great attraction for me. The pleasure
experienced was not merely that of a
naturalist in the objects of his study; it
belongs to all men who have been educated
in the habits of civilization. You
find yourself in contact with a new
world, with savage and unconquered
Nature. Sometimes it is the jaguar,
the beautiful panther of America, which
issues from its dark retreat; at others
the hosco, with its dark plumes and
curved head, which traverses the sauso,
as the band of yellow sand is called.
Animals of the most various kinds and
opposite descriptions succeed each other
without intermission. ‘Es como en el
Paraiso,’ (It is as in Paradise,) said our
pilot, an old Indian of the Missions. In
truth, every thing here recalls that primitive
world of which the traditions of
all nations have preserved the recollection,
the innocence, and happiness; but
on observing the habits of the animals
towards each other, it is evident that the
age of gold has ceased to them as well
as to the human race; they mutually fear
and avoid each other, and in the lonely
American forests, as elsewhere, long experience
has taught all living beings that
gentleness is rarely united to force.”
“When the sands on the river side
are of considerable breadth, the sauso
often stretches to a considerable distance
from the water’s edge. It is on
this intermediate space that you see the
crocodiles, often to the number of eight
or ten, stretched on the sand. Motionless,
their huge jaws opened at right
angles, they lie without giving any of
those marks of affection which are observable
in other animals which live in
society. The troop separate when they
leave the coast; they are probably composed
of several females and one male.
The former are much more numerous
than the latter, from the number of
males which are killed in fighting during
the time of their amours. These
monstrous reptiles have multiplied to
such a degree, that there was hardly
an instant during our voyage along the
whole course of the river that we had
not five or six in view. We measured
one dead which was lying on the sand;
it was sixteen feet nine inches long.
Soon after, Mr Bonpland found a dead
[Pg 554]male on the shore, measuring twenty-two
feet three inches. Under every
zone—in America as in Egypt—this
animal attains the same dimensions.
The Indians told us, that at San Fernando
scarce a year passes without
two or three grown up persons, usually
women, who are drawing from the
river, being devoured by these carnivorous
lizards.
“They related to us an interesting
story of a young daughter of Urituen,
who, by extraordinary intrepidity and
presence of mind, succeeded in extricating
herself from the very jaws of a
crocodile. When she felt herself seized
by the voracious animal in the water,
she felt for its eyes, and thrust her
fingers into them with such violence
that she forced the animal to let go, but
not before he had torn off the lower
part of her left arm. The Indian girl,
notwithstanding the enormous quantity
of blood which she lost, succeeded in
swimming to shore with the hand which
was left, and escaped without further
injury. In those desert regions, where
man is constantly in strife with animated
or inanimated nature, they daily speak
of similar or corresponding means by
which it is possible to escape from a
tiger, a great boa, or a crocodile.
Every one prepares himself against a
danger which may any day befall him,
‘I knew,’ said the young girl calmly,
when praised for her presence of mind,
‘that the crocodile lets go his hold when
you plunge your fingers in his eyes.’
Long after my return to Europe, I
learned that the negroes in the interior
of Africa make use of the same method
to escape from the alligators in the
Niger. Who does not recollect with
warm interest, that Isaaco the guide, in
his last journey of the unfortunate Mungo
Park, was seized twice near Boulinkombro,
and that he escaped from the
throat of the monster solely by thrusting
his fingers into his two eyes?[5] The
African Isaaco and the young American
girl owed their safety to the same
presence of mind, and the same combination
of ideas.”—(Vol. vi. 203, 205.)
If there is any one fact more than
another demonstrated by the concurring
testimony of travellers, historians,
and statistical observers, in all
ages and quarters of the world, it is,
that the possession of property in land
is the first step in social improvement,
and the only effectual humanizer of
Savage Man. Rousseau’s famous
paradox, “The first Man who enclosed
a field, and called it mine, is the
author of all the social ills which followed,”
is not only false but decidedly
the reverse of the truth. He was the
first and greatest benefactor of his
species. Subsequent ills have arisen,
not from following but forgetting his
example; and preferring to the simplicity
of country life the seductions
and vices of urban society. Humboldt
adds his important testimony to
the noble army of witnesses in all
ages, and from all parts of the world,
on this all important subject.
“The Guamos are a race of Indians
whom it is extremely difficult to fix
down to the soil. Like other wandering
savages, they are distinguished by
their dirt, revengeful spirit, and fondness
for wandering. The greater part
of them live by fishing and the chase,
in the plains often flooded by the Apuré,
the Meta, and the Guaviare. The nature
of those regions, their vast extent,
and entire want of any limit or distinguishing
mark, seems to invite their
inhabitants to a wandering life. On
entering, again, the mountains which adjoin
the cataracts of the Orinoco, you
find among the Piroas, the Macos, and
the Macquiritares, milder manners, a
love of agriculture, and remarkable cleanliness
in the interior of their cabins.
On the ridges of mountains, amidst impenetrable
forests, man is forced to fix
himself, to clear and cultivate a corner
of the earth. That culture demands
little care, and is richly rewarded:
while the life of a hunter is painful and
difficult. The Guamos of the Mission
of Santa Barbara are kind and hospitable;
whenever we entered their cottages,
they offered us dried fish and
water.”—(Vol. vi. 219.)
No spectacle in nature can exceed,
few equal, the sublimity and magnificence
of the scenery presented by
the vast chain of mountains which,
under the name of Cordilleras, Andes,
and Rocky Mountains, traverses the
whole continent of America, both north
and south, in the neighbourhood of the[Pg 555]
Pacific Ocean. Of this prodigious
pile of rocks and precipices, Humboldt,
in another of his works, has given the
following admirable account:—
“The immense chain of the Andes,
traversing its whole extent near the
Pacific Ocean, has stamped a character
upon South American nature which
belongs to no other country. The peculiarity
which distinguishes the regions
which belong to this immense
chain, are the successive plateaux, like
so many huge natural terraces, which
rise one above another, before arriving
at the great central chain, where the
highest summits are to be found. Such
is the elevation of some of these plains
that they often exceed eight and nine,
and sometimes reach that of twelve thousand
feet above the level of the sea.
The lowest of these plateaux is higher
than the summit of the Pass of the
Great St Bernard, the highest inhabited
ground in Europe, which is 7545 feet
above the level of the sea. But such is
the benignity of the climate, that at
these prodigious elevations, which even
in the south of Europe are above the
line of perpetual snow, are to be found
cities and towns, corn-fields and orchards,
and all the symptoms of rural
felicity. The town of Quito itself, the
capital of a province of the same name,
is situated on a plateau, or elevated
valley, in the centre of the Andes,
nearly 9000 feet above the level of the
sea. Yet there are found concentrated
a numerous population, and it contains
cities with thirty, forty, and even fifty
thousand inhabitants. After living
some months on this elevated ground,
you experience an extraordinary illusion.
Finding yourself surrounded with
pasture and corn-fields, flocks and herds,
smiling orchards and golden harvests,
the sheep and the lama, the fruits of
Europe and those of America, you forget
that you are as it were suspended
between heaven and earth, and elevated
to a height exceeding that by which
the European traveller makes his way
from France into Italy, and double that
of Ben Nevis, the highest mountain in
Great Britain.
“The different gradations of vegetation,
as might be expected in a country
where the earth rises from the torrid
zone by a few steep ascents to the regions
of eternal congelation, exhibit
one of the most remarkable features in
this land of wonders. From the borders
of the sea to the height of two
thousand feet, are to be seen the magnificent
palm-tree, the musa, the heleconia,
the balms of Tolu, the large
flowering jasmin, the date-tree, and all
the productions of tropical climates.
On the arid and burning shores of the
ocean, flourish, in addition to these, the
cotton-tree, the magnolias, the cactus,
the sugar-cane, and all the luscious
fruits which ripen under the genial sun,
and amidst the balmy breezes of the
West India Islands. One only of these
tropical children of nature, the Carosylou
Andicola, is met with far in advance
of the rest of its tribe, tossed by the
winds at the height of seven and eight
thousand feet above the sea, on the
middle ridges of the Cordillera range.
In this lower region, as nature exhibits
the riches, so she has spread the pestilence,
of tropical climates. The humidity
of the atmosphere, and the damp
heats which are nourished amidst its
intricate thickets, produce violent fevers,
which often prove extremely destructive,
especially to European constitutions.
But if the patient survives
the first attack, the remedy is at hand;
a journey to the temperate climate of
the elevated plateau soon restores
health; and the sufferer is as much revived
by the gales of the Andes, as the
Indian valetudinarian is by a return to
Europe.
“Above the region of the palms
commences the temperate zone. It is
there that vegetation appears in its
most delightful form, luxuriant without
being rank, majestic yet not impervious;
it combines all that nature has given of
the grand, with all that the poets have
figured of the beautiful. The bark-tree,
which she has provided as the only
effectual febrifuge in the deadly heats
of the inferior region; the cyprus and
melastoma, with their superb violet
blossoms; gigantic fuchsias of every
possible variety, and evergreen trees of
lofty stature, covered with flowers,
adorn that delightful zone. The turf
is enamelled by never-fading flowers;
mosses of dazzling beauty, fed by the
frequent rains attracted by the mountains,
cover the rocks; and the trembling
branches of the mimosa, and others
of the sensitive tribe, hang in graceful
pendants over every declivity. Almost
all the flowering shrubs which adorn
our conservatories, are to be found
there in primeval beauty, and what to
Europeans appears a gigantic scale;
magnificent arums of many different
kinds spread their ample snowy petals
[Pg 556]above the surrounding thickets; and innumerable
creepers, adorned by splendid
blossoms, mount even to the summit
of the highest trees, and diffuse a perennial
fragrance around.
“The oaks and trees of Europe are
not found in those parts of the Andes
which lie in the torrid zone, till you arrive
at the height of five thousand feet
above the sea. It is there you first
begin to see the leaves fall in winter,
and bud in spring, as in European climates:
below that level the foliage is
perpetual. Nowhere are the trees so
large as in this region: not unfrequently
they are found of the height of a
hundred and eighty or two hundred
feet; their stems are from eight to
fifteen feet across at their base, and
sometimes rise a hundred feet without
a single cross branch. When so great
an elevation as the plains of Quito,
however, which is 9515 above the sea,
is reached, they become less considerable,
and not larger than those usually
found in the forests of Europe. If the
traveller ascends two thousand feet
higher, to an elevation of eleven or
twelve thousand feet, trees almost entirely
disappear; but the frequent humidity
nourishes a thick covering of
arbutus and other evergreens, shrubs
three or four feet high, covered with
flowers generally of a bright yellow,
which form a striking contrast to the
dark evergreen foliage with which they
are surrounded. Still higher, at the
height of thirteen thousand feet, near
the summit of the lower ranges of the
Cordilleras, almost constant rains overspread
the earth with a verdant and
slippery coating of moss; amidst which
a few stunted specimens of the melastoma
still exhibit their purple blossoms.
A broad zone succeeds, covered entirely
with Alpine plants, which, as in the
mountains of Switzerland, nestle in the
crevices of rocks, or push their flowers,
generally of yellow or dark blue,
through the now frequent snow. Higher
still, grass alone is to be met with,
mixed with the grey moss which conducts
the wearied traveller to the region
of perpetual snow, which in those warm
latitudes is general only at an elevation
of fifteen thousand feet. Above that
level no animated being is found, except
the huge condor, the largest bird
that exists, which there, amidst ice and
clouds, has fixed its gloomy abode.”—(Tableau
de la Nature dans les Regions
Equatoriales, 59, 140-144.)
In the rhythm of prose these are
the colours of poetry; but it is of
poetry chastened and directed by the
observation of reality, and possessing
the inimitable charm of being drawn
from real life, and sharing the freshness
and variety which characterize
the works of nature, and distinguish
them from the brightest conceptions
of human fancy. As we have set out in
this article with placing Humboldt at
the head of modern travellers, and much
above any that Great Britain has produced,
and assigned as the main reason
of this superiority the exclusive and
limited range of objects on which the
attention of our youth is fixed at our
great universities, we shall, in justice
to Oxford and Cambridge, present the
reader with a specimen of the finest
passages from Clarke and Bishop
Heber, that he may judge for himself
on their merit, great as it often is,
when compared with that of the ardent
and yet learned German.
Clarke, on leaving Greece, gives the
following brilliant summary of the
leading features of that classic land:—
“The last moments of this day were
employed in taking once more a view
of the superb scenery exhibited by the
mountains Olympus and Ossa. They
appeared upon this occasion in more
than usual splendour; like one of those
imaginary Alpine regions suggested by
viewing a boundary of clouds when they
terminate the horizon in a still evening,
and are gathered into heaps, with many
a towering top shining in fleecy whiteness.
The great Olympian chain forms
a line which is exactly opposite to
Salonica; and even the chasm between
Olympus and Ossa, constituting the defile
of Tempe, is here visible. Directing
the eye towards that chain, there is
comprehended in one view the whole of
Pieria and Bottiæa; and with the vivid
impressions which remain after leaving
the country, memory easily recalled into
one mental picture the whole of Greece.
Every reader may not duly comprehend
what is meant by this: but every traveller
who has beheld the scenes to
which allusion is made, will readily admit
its truth; he will be aware that,
whenever his thoughts were directed to
that country, the whole of it recurred
to his imagination, as if he were actually
indulged with a view of it.
“In such an imaginary flight he enters,
for example, the defile of Tempe; and as
the gorge opens to the south, he beholds
[Pg 557]all the Larissian plain. This conducts him
to the fields of Pharsalia, whence he ascends
the mountains south of Pharsalus;
then, crossing the bleak and still more elevated
region extending from these mountains
towards Lamia, he views Mount
Pindus far before him, and descending
into the plain of the Sperchius, passes
the straits of Thermopylæ. Afterwards,
ascending, Mount Œta, he beholds opposite
to him the snowy point of Lycorea,
with the rest of Parnassus, and the
villages and towns lying at its base: the
whole plain of Elataia lying at his feet,
with the course of the Cephissus to the
sea. Passing to the summit of Parnassus,
he looks down upon all the other
mountains, plains, islands, and gulfs of
Greece; but especially surveys the
broad bosom of Cithæron, Helicon,
and Hymettus. Thence, roaming into the
depths and over all the heights of Eubœig;a
and Peloponnesus, he has their inmost
recesses again submitted to his contemplation.
Next, resting upon Hymettus,
he examines, even in the minutest detail,
the whole of Attica, to the Sunian promontory;
for he sees it all—and all the
shores of Argos, Sicyon, Corinth, Megara,
Eleusis, and Athens. Thus, although
not in all the freshness of its
living colours, yet in all its grandeur,
doth Greece actually present itself to
the mind’s eye—and may the impression
never be obliterated! In the eve of
bidding it farewell for ever, as the hope
of visiting this delightful country constituted
the earliest and warmest wish
of his youth, the author found it to be
some alleviation of his regret excited
by a consciousness of never returning,
that he could thus summon to his recollection
the scenes over which he had
passed.”—(Clarke’s Travels, Vol. vii.
pp. 476-478.)
So far Clarke—the accomplished
and famed traveller of Cambridge.
We now give a favourable specimen
of Bishop Heber—his companion in
traversing Russia—the celebrated author,
in early life at Oxford, of Palestine,
the amiable and upright Bishop of
Calcutta, whose life, if ever that could
be said of mortal, was literally spent
in doing good. This accomplished and
excellent prelate thus describes the
first view of the Himalaya range and
the summits of Nundidevi, the highest
mountain in the world, neatly 5000 feet
above the loftiest peak of Chimborazo.
“After coasting the lake for a mile,
we ascended for thirteen more by a most
steep and rugged road over the neck of
Mount Gaughur, through a succession
of glens, forests, and views of the most
sublime and beautiful description. I
never saw such prospects before, and
had formed no adequate idea of such.
My attention was completely strained,
and my eyes filled with tears; every
thing around was so wild and magnificent
that man appeared as nothing, and
I felt myself as if climbing the steps of
the altar of the great temple of God.
The trees, as we advanced, were in a
large proportion fir and cedar; but many
were ilex, and to my surprise I still saw,
even in these wild Alpine tracts, many
venerable Peepul trees, on which the
white monkeys were playing their gambols.
Tigers used to be very common
and mischievous; but since the English
have begun to frequent the country,
they have become very scarce. There
are many wolves and bears, and some
chamois, two of which passed near us.
After wending up
Down the steep hill athwart a cedar cover—
A savage place, as holy and enchanted
As e’er beneath the waning moon was haunted
By woman’s wailing for her demon lover,’
we arrived at the gorge of the Pass,
in an indent between the two principal
summits of Mount Gaughur, near 8600
feet above the sea. And now the snowy
mountains, which had been so long
eclipsed, opened upon us in full magnificence.
To describe a view of this kind
is only lost labour: and I found it nearly
as impossible to make a sketch of it.
Nundidevi was immediately opposite,
Kedar Nath was not visible, but Marvo
was visible as a distant peak. The eastern
mountains, for whom I could procure
no name, rose into great consequence,
and were very glorious objects
as we wound down the hill on the other
side. The guides could only tell us they
were a great way off, and on the borders
of the Chinese empire. Nundidevi, the
highest peak in the world, is 25,689 feet
above the sea, 4000 higher than Chimborazo.
Bhadinath and Kedernath,
which are merely summits of it, are
22,300 feet high. They are all in the
British dominions.”—(Heber’s India,
Vol. ii. pp. 193-194, 209.)
On comparing the descriptions of[Pg 558]
the most interesting objects in Europe
and Asia—Greece and the Himalaya
range—by these two distinguished
British travellers, with the pictures
given by Humboldt of the Andes, the
falls of the Orinoco, the forests of the
same river, and the expanse of the
Pampas in South America, every one
must admit the great superiority of
the German’s powers of painting
Nature. Neither Clarke nor Heber
appear to attempt it. They tell you,
indeed, that certain scenes were grand
and beautiful, certain rocks wild,
certain glens steep; but they make
no attempt to portray their features,
or convey to the reader’s mind the
pictures which they tell you are for
ever engraven on their own. This is
a very great defect, so great indeed
that it will probably prevent their
works, how valuable soever as books
of authority or reference, from ever
acquiring lasting fame. It is a total
mistake to say that it is in vain to
attempt describing such scenes; that
is the same mistake as was formerly
committed by pacific academical historians,
who said it was useless to
attempt painting a battle, for they
were all like each other. How like
they really are to each other, has been
shown by Colonel Napier and many
other modern historians. We question
if even the sight of the rapids of the
Orinoco would make so vivid an impression
on the imagination, as Humboldt’s
inimitable description; or a
journey over the Pampas or the Andes,
convey a clearer or more distinct idea
of their opposite features than what has
been derived from his brilliant pencil.
It is the same with all the other scenes
in nature. Description, if done by a
masterly hand, can, to an intelligent
mind, convey as vivid an idea as
reality. What is wanting is the enthusiasm
which warms at the perception
of the sublime and the beautiful,
the poetic mind which seizes as by
inspiration its characteristic features,
and the pictorial eye which discerns
the appearances they exhibit, and by
referring to images known to all,
succeeds in causing them to be generally
felt by the readers.
With all Humboldt’s great and transcendent
merits, he is a child of Adam,
and therefore not without his faults.
The principal of these is the want of
arrangement. His travels are put
together without any proper method;
there is a great want of indexes and
tables of contents; it is scarcely possible,
except by looking over the whole,
to find any passage you want. This
is a fault which, in a person of his
accurate and scientific mind, is very
surprising, and the more inexcusable
that it could so easily be remedied by
mechanical industry, or the aid of
compilers and index-makers. But
akin to this, is another fault of a more
irremediable kind, as it originates in
the varied excellences of the author,
and the vast store of information on
many different subjects which he
brings to bear on the subject of his
travels. He has so many topics of
which he is master himself, that he
forgets with how few, comparatively,
his readers are familiar; he sees so
many objects of enquiry—physical,
moral, and political—in the countries
which he visits, that he becomes insensible
to the fact, that though each
probably possesses a certain degree of
interest to each reader, yet it is scarcely
possible to find one to whom, as to
himself, they are all alike the object
of eager solicitude and anxious investigation.
Hence, notwithstanding his
attempt to detail his personal narrative
from the learned works which
contain the result of his scientific researches,
he has by no means succeeded
in effecting their separation.
The ordinary reader, who has been
fascinated by his glowing description
of tropical scenery, or his graphic picture
of savage manners, is, a few pages
on, chilled by disquisitions on the
height of the barometer, the disk of
the sun, or the electricity of the atmosphere;
while the scientific student,
who turns to his works for information
on his favourite objects of study,
deems them strangely interspersed
with rhapsodies on glowing sunsets,
silent forests, and sounding cataracts.
It is scarcely possible to find a reader
to whom all these objects are
equally interesting; and therefore it
is scarcely to be expected that his
travels, unrivalled as their genius and
learning are, will ever be the object
of general popularity.
In truth, here, as in all the other
branches of human thought, it will be
found that the rules of composition
[Pg 559]are the same, and that a certain unity
of design is essential to general success
or durable fame. If an author
has many different and opposite subjects
of interest in his head, which is
not unfrequently the case with persons
of the higher order of intellect, and
he can discant on all with equal facility,
or investigate all with equal eagerness,
he will do well to recollect that
the minds of his readers are not
likely to be equally discursive, and that
he is apt to destroy the influence,
or mar the effect of each, if he blends
them together; separation of works is
the one thing needful there. A mathematical
proposition, a passage of
poetry, a page of history, are all admirable
things in their way, and each
may be part of a work destined to
durable celebrity; but what should
we say to a composition which should
present us, page about, with a theorem
of Euclid, a scene from Shakspeare,
and a section from Gibbon? Unity
of effect, identity of train of thought,
similarity of ideas, are as necessary in
a book of travels as in an epic poem, a
tragedy, or a painting. There is no
such thing as one set of rules for the
fine arts, and another for works of
thought or reflection. The Iliad is
constructed on the same principles as
the Principia of Newton, or the history
of Thucydides.
What makes ordinary books of
travels so uninteresting, and, in general,
so shortlived, is the want of any
idea of composition, or unity of effect,
in the minds of their authors. Men
and women seem to think that there
is nothing more to do to make a book
of travels, than to give a transcript of
their journals, in which every thing is
put down of whatever importance,
provided only it really occurred.
Scenes and adventures, broken wheels
and rugged rocks, cataracts and omelets,
lakes and damp beds, thunderstorms
and waiters, are huddled together,
without any other thread of
connexion than the accidental and
fortuitous one of their having successively
come under the notice of the
traveller. What should we say to
any other work composed on the
same principle? What if Milton,
after the speech of Satan in Paradise
Lost, were to treat us to an account
of his last dinner; or Shakspeare,
after the scene of the bones in Juliet,
were to tell us of the damp sheets in
which he slept last night; or Gibbon,
after working up the enthusiasm of
his readers by the account of the
storming of Constantinople by the
Crusaders, was to favour us with a
digression on the insolence of the
postilions in Roumelia? All the
world would see the folly of this: and
yet this is precisely what is constantly
done by travellers, and tolerated
by the public, because it is founded on
nature. Founded on nature! Is
every thing that is actually true, or
real, fit to be recorded, or worthy of
being recounted? Sketches from nature
are admirable things, and are the only
foundation for correct and lasting
pictures; but no man would think of
interposing a gallery of paintings with
chalk drawings or studies of trees.
Correctness, fidelity, truth, are the
only secure bases of eminence in all
the arts of imitation; but the light of
genius, the skilful arrangement, the
principles of composition, the selection
of topics, are as necessary in the writer
of travels, as in the landscape painter,
the historian, or the epic poet.
FOOTNOTES:
[2] We lately heard of a young man, who had gone through the examination at
Cambridge with distinction, enquiring, “whether the Greek church were Christians?”
What sort of a traveller would he make in the East or Russia?[Pg 560]
[3] Lady Londonderry’s description of Moscow is the best in the English language.
[4] We have translated all the passages ourselves. A very good translation
of Humboldt’s Personal Narrative was published many years ago, by Miss H.
Williams; but we could not resist the pleasure of trying to transfer to English
such noble specimens of descriptive eloquence.
[5] Park’s Last Mission to Africa, 1815, p. 89.
A Tale extracted from the History of Poland.
Chapter I.
Albert Glinksi, the powerful, ostentatious,
and intriguing Duke of
Lithuania, was passing, distinguished
by his glancing plume and gorgeous
mantle, through one of the more retired
streets of the city of Cracow, at
this time (a.d. 1530) the capital of
Poland, when a domestic wearing the
livery of the palace deferentially accosted
him.
“Her Majesty,” he said, “commands
me to deliver these tablets into
your hands; you dropped them in
the palace.”
“I dropped no tablets,” replied the
duke; but instantly added, “Yes,
they are mine—Give them me.”
He took from the hands of the domestic
certain tablets of ivory, which
folded into a case of gold exquisitely
wrought by one of the most skilful artists
of Italy, and dismissed the bearer
with a liberal gratuity for his services.
“Ha! my excellent Bona! youthful
bride of our too aged monarch
Sigismund!” said the duke to himself
when he was left alone. “Each day
some new device. What have we in
these tablets? Here, in the corner
of each leaf, I see a solitary figure
finely pencilled in, which to any other
eye than mine would mean nothing,
but which tells me that at eight
o’clock this evening you will receive
your favoured duke. So, so! But,
charming Bona! it is not love—loveable
as you are—it is not love—it is
ambition gives its zest, and must
bring the recompense to this perilous
intrigue. The Duke of Lithuania is
no hot-brained youth to be entangled
and destroyed by a woman’s smiles.
To have a month’s happiness, as men
phrase it, and then the midnight dagger
of a jealous monarch—I seek no
such adventures. It is the crown of
Poland—yes, the crown—that you
must help me to, fair lady.”
As he stood reflecting on his ambitious
schemes, his rival in the state,
Count Laski, minister and chancellor
of the king, passed by him on his way
to the palace. The duke, assuming a
frank and cordial manner, called to
him. Laski paused. “What would
the Duke of Lithuania?” he asked in
his usual calm and reserved manner.
“Peace!” replied the duke—”amicable
terms. Political opponents it
seems we are destined to be. The
world gives us out as the selected
champions of two hostile factions. You
affect the commons, I side with the
nobility. Be it so. But there exists
between us, I hope, a mutual respect;
and it would be my greatest boast if,
in spite of this political antagonism, I
might reckon Count Laski amongst
my personal friends.”
A derisive smile played upon the
countenance of the chancellor as he
replied—”Such friendship, my lord,
as is consistent with perpetual strife—open
and concealed—shall, if it
please you, subsist between us. Pardon
me, but we prate a silly jargon
when we talk of private friendship and
public hostility.”
“At all events,” rejoined the duke,
“political rivalry does not exclude the
practice of the courtesies of life. It
has been reported to me that you admire
the marble statue of a nymph
which an Italian sculptor has lately
wrought for me. I, on my part, have
envied you the possession of a certain
Arab slave, a living statue, a moving
bronze, that you have amongst your
retainers. Let us, like Homeric heroes,
make an exchange. Give me
your statue-man, your swart Apollo,
and accept from me what many have
been pleased to call the living statue.”
Glinski had a secret motive for the
acquisition of this slave: his known
fidelity, his surprising address and
power, had protected the life of the
minister against more than one scheme
of assassination.
“The exchange,” replied Laski,
“is too much in my favour. Your
Italian marble would purchase a hundred
slaves. It would be a present
in disguise; and you know my rule—even[Pg 561]
from his Majesty himself I never
receive.”
“Yes, we know your tyrannous
munificence; but this,” said the duke
with a smile, “shall be pure barter.”
“What say you, then,” said the
count, “to those golden tablets which
you hold in your hand? Give me
leave to look at them. They might
suit my pedantic way of life. But,”
added he, as he examined their delicate
workmanship, “came you honestly
by this toy, my lord? What fair
frailty have you cheated of this knack,
that never, I will be sworn, was a
man’s marketing?”
“I am glad to hear so grave a gentleman
indulge so pleasant a view,”
said the duke.
As Count Laski was handling the
tablets, he touched, whether by accident
or design, a spring that had not
been observed by him to whom the
present had been sent. The outer
case flew back, and disclosed a miniature
of the queen!
“I have been indiscreet,” said the
count, and immediately folded up and
returned the tablets. “This is perilous
ware to deal in, Duke of Lithuania.
Have you aught else in the
way of honest barter to propose?”
“What you may infer,” said the
duke, reddening with anger, and grievously
embarrassed at his discovery—”What
you may infer from this silly
bauble I shall not be at the pains to
enquire. I addressed you, my lord,
in courteous and amicable terms; you
have ill responded to them; our conversation
had better close here.”
“As you will,” said the chancellor,
bowing; and he continued his way towards
the palace, with the same deliberate
step with which he was proceeding
when accosted by the duke.
“He is master of our secret,” muttered
the duke. “He or I”——
Chapter II.
In an apartment of the palace fitted
up with every luxury her native Italy
could supply, sat Bona, the young and
beautiful queen of Poland. She is
known to have transplanted into that
northern clime, not only the arts and
civilization of her own genial soil, but
also the intrigue and voluptuousness,
and the still darker crimes for which
it was celebrated. Daughter of the
crafty Sforza, Duke of Milan, educated
in a city and at a court where pleasure
reigned predominant, married
out of policy to a monarch many years
older than her own father, it was almost
to be expected that she should
seek, in the society of some gay cavalier,
a compensation for this banishment
to a northern country, and a
sexagenarian spouse. Nor had she
hesitated long in her choice. Albert
Glinski, Duke of Lithuania, who,
though he was the father of a son ripening
into manhood, was still in the vigour
of life, and surpassed all his younger
rivals in grace of manner and charm
of conversation, had soon fixed her
regard, and won whatever of affection
or love the luxurious princess had to
bestow.
She now sat waiting his arrival.
Punctually at the hour of eight he
entered. If any observer could have
watched the duke as he traversed the
corridor which led to the queen’s
apartment, he would have had great
difficulty in believing that it was a
favoured lover that was passing before
him; so serious a brow did he wear,
and so deep an air of abstraction was
there on his countenance. No sooner,
however, did he enter that apartment,
than, by a sudden effort, his countenance
lit up; his manner grew free
and unrestrained, and he assumed that
mingled tone of gaiety and pathos so
effective with the fair sex. Never had
the queen felt more entirely convinced
of the merits of her cavalier;
never had she more thoroughly approved
of the choice she had made.
When this favourable disposition
was at its height, the duke, adopting
gradually a more serious tone of conversation,
said—
“Has it never occurred to you,
charming Bona, that the most exalted
of your sex share with the humblest
this one privilege—love alone must
be the motive which brings a suitor
to their feet. That passion must be
genuine, must be fever-high, which
makes a subject quite forget his Queen
in the lovely woman before him, and[Pg 562]
tempts him to dare the vengeance of
a Monarch, as well as of a husband.”
“True, there is danger—perhaps to
both of us,” she replied, “but it daunts
us not.”
“No;—but it is at hand.”
“What mean you, Glinski?”
“We are betrayed.”
“How?—by whom?”
“How, or by whom, it matters little;
but that subtle demon, Count
Laski, knows that which in his hands
is a warrant for our destruction.”
“What is to be done? We will
bribe him. All my jewels, all my
hoards shall go to purchase his silence.”
“Bribe Laski! bribe the north
wind! bribe destiny itself, whose nature
it is to distribute good and ill,
but to feel neither. No, but I would
have a dagger in his throat before the
night were passed, but that his short
light slumbers are guarded by a slave
of singular power, whom the villains
fear to attack. I had meant to beg or
buy of him this same fierce automaton,
but something broke off the treaty.”
“We will poison the mind of the
king against him: he shall be dismissed
from all his offices.”
“That poison is too slow. Besides,
if he once communicate his suspicions
to the king—which at this very moment
he may be doing—see you not,
that it is no longer the minister, but
the jealous monarch that we have to
guard against. Hear me, Bona, one
of two fates must now be mine. Death—or
thy hand, and with it the crown
of Poland. Do not start. There is for
me no middle station. You may be
safe. A few tears, a few smiles, and the
old king will lapse into his dotage.”
“You speak in riddles, Glinski; I
comprehend nothing of all this.”
“Yet it is clear enough. Thus it
stands: the Duke of Lithuania loved
the wife of Sigismund, king of Poland.
Love!—I call to witness all the saints
in heaven!—love alone prompted his
daring suit. But now that fortune
has first favoured and then betrayed
him, where think you does his safety
lie? Where, but in the bold enterprises
of ambition? His only place of
refuge is a throne. He who has won
a queen must protect her with a
sceptre. You must be mine—my
very queen—you must extend your
hand and raise me to the royalty of
Poland, or see my blood flow ignominiously
upon the scaffold.”
“I extend my hand!” exclaimed
the agitated queen, “how can a feeble
woman give or take away the crown
of Poland?”
“Him who wears the crown—she
can take away.”
“Murder the king!” shrieked Bona.
“Or sentence me,” replied the duke.
It was no affected horror that the
queen here displayed. Though at a
subsequent period of her life, if history
speaks true, her imagination had
grown familiar with deeds of this very
nature, and she had become skilful in
the art of poisoning, she was at this
time young, and unpractised in crime,
and received its first suggestions with
the horror which it naturally inspires.
She had sought for pleasure only in
the society of Glinski; it was a cruel
disappointment, it was a frightful surprise,
to find herself thrust suddenly,
with unsandaled feet, on the thorny
path of ambition. She sank back on
the couch where they had both been
sitting, and, hiding her face in both
her hands, remained in that position
while the duke continued to unfold his
schemes at greater length.
He represented to her that the possession
of the duchy of Lithuania,
the inhabitants of which were distinguished
by their bravery and their
turbulence, would enable him—should
the king opportunely die—to seize
upon the vacant throne of Poland;—that
he had numerous and powerful
friends among the nobility;—that he
had already drawn together his Lithuanians,
under pretence of protecting
the frontier from the incursion of predatory
bands;—that he intended immediately
to place himself at their
head, and march towards Cracow.
Now, if at this moment the throne
should suddenly become vacant, what
power on earth could prevent him
from ascending it, and claiming the
hand of his then veritable queen?
And then he expatiated on the happiness
they should enjoy, when they
should live in fearless union,
“What is this,” exclaimed Bona,
suddenly starting up—”what is this
you would tempt me to? You dare[Pg 563]
not even name the horrid deed you
would have me commit. Avaunt!
you are a devil, Albert Glinski!—you
would drag me to perdition.”
Then, falling in tears upon his neck,
she implored him not to tempt her
further. “Oh, Albert! Albert!” she
cried, “I beseech you, plunge me not
into this pit of guilt. You can! I
feel you can. Have mercy! I implore
you, I charge you on your soul,
convert me not into this demon.
Spare me this crime!”
“Is it I alone,” said the duke, who
strove the while by his caresses to
soothe and pacify her—”Is it I alone
who have brought down upon us this
distressful alternative? Neither of us,
while love decoyed us on step by step,
dreamed of the terrible necessity towards
which it was hourly conducting
us. But here we are—half-way up,
and the precipice below. We must
rush still upwards. There is safety
only on the summit. Pause, and we
fall. Oh, did you think that you, a
queen, could play as securely as some
burgher’s wife the pleasant comedy of
an amorous intrigue? No, no; you
must queen it even in crime. High
station and bold deed become each
other. We are committed, Bona. It
is choice of life or death. His death
or ours. For—scarcely dare I breathe
the thought—the sudden revenge of
your monarch husband, whose jealousy
at least, age has not tamed, may
execute its purpose before his dotage
has had time to return.”
“Where do you lead me? What
shall I become?” cried the bewildered
queen. “I have loved thee, Albert,
but I hate not him.”
“I ask thee not to hate“——
“They married me to Sigismund
out of state policy. You I have
chosen for the partner of my heart,
and I will protect you to the uttermost.
Let things rest there—’tis well
enough.”
“We will consult further of our
plans, sweet Bona,” said the duke, and,
circling her with his arm, he led the
weeping queen into an adjoining room.
The victory, he felt, was his.
Chapter III.
The scene changes to an apartment
of a very different style. We enter
the house of the chancellor; but it is
not the chancellor himself who is first
presented to our view. In an antique
Gothic chamber, in the decoration and
structure of which the most costly
material had been studiously united
with the severest simplicity of taste,
sat Maria, the only daughter and child
of Count Laski. She sat at her embroidery.
The embroidery, however,
had fallen upon her lap; she leaned
back, resigned to her meditations, in a
massive arm-chair covered with purple
velvet, which it is impossible not to
think must have felt something like
pride and pleasure as her slight and
lovely form sank into it. It was a
long reverie.
In an angle of this lofty room, at some
distance, but not out of the range of
clear vision, stood, motionless as a statue,
the slave Hakem. His arms were
folded on his breast, his eye rested, without,
as it seemed, a power to withdraw
it, on the beautiful figure of the young
girl before him. It was one of those
long intense looks which show that the
person on whom it is fixed is still more
the object of meditation than of vision—where
it is the soul that looks.
Hakem gazed like a devotee upon the
sacred image of his saint.
Maria, quite unconscious of this gaze,
pursued her meditations. Her eye
caught the hour-glass that stood on a
small table beside her. “Sand after
sand,” said she, musing to herself—”Sand
after sand, thought after
thought. The same sand ever trickling
there; the same thought ever coursing
through my mind. Oh, love! love!
They say it enlarges the heart; I think
it contracts it to a single point.”
“Hakem,” she said, after a pause,
and turning towards the slave, “you
are true to my father, will you be true
also to me?”
“To her father!” he murmured to
himself, “as if”——And then, checking
himself and speaking aloud, he
answered—”The Christians are not
so true to your sweet namesake, the
Holy Virgin, whom they adore, as I
will be to you.”[Pg 564]
“A simple promise will suffice,”
said Maria. “You have, Hakem—let
me say it without offence—a style
of language—Eastern, I suppose—hyperbolical—which
either I must
learn to pardon, or you must labour
to reform. It does not suit our northern
clime.”
“I am mute. Yet, lady, you have
sometimes chid me for my long silence.”
“And is it for your much speaking
that I chide you now?” said the
maiden, with a smile. “You will
stand half the day like a statue there;
and, when spoken to, answer with a
gesture only—so that many have
thought you really dumb. Much
speaking is certainly not thy fault.”
“I understand. The slave speaks
as one who felt the indescribable
charm of thy presence. It is a presumption
worthy of death. Shall I
inflict the punishment?”
“Is this amendment of thy fault,
good Hakem, or repetition of it?”
“I await your commands. What
service can Hakem render?”
But Maria relapsed again into silence.
She seemed to hesitate in
making the communication she had
designed. Meantime, the arrival of
her father was announced, and the
slave left the apartment.
Never man felt more tender love
for his daughter than did the proud,
high-minded minister for this his
beautiful Maria. His demeanour towards
her, from childhood upwards,
had been one of unalterable, uninterrupted
fondness. He knew no other
mood, no other tone, in which he
could have addressed her. Did the
grave chancellor, then—some one,
who in his way, also, is very grave,
may ask—did he, by constant fondness,
spoil his child? No. It is the
fondness which is not constant that
spoils. It is the half-love of weak
and irritable natures, who are themselves
children amongst their children,
who can themselves be petulant, selfish,
and capricious—it is this that
mars a temper. But calm and unalterable
love—oh, believe it not that
such ever spoilt a child! Maria grew
up under the eye of affection, and the
ever-open hand of paternal love; and
she herself seemed to have learned no
other impulses but those of affection
and generosity.
Alas for fathers! when the child
grows into the budding woman, and
by her soft, intelligent companionship
fills the house with gladness, and the
heart with inappreciable content, then
comes the gay, permitted spoiler—comes
the lover with his suit—his
honourable suit—and robs them of
their treasure. The world feels only
with the lover—with the youth, and
the fair maiden that he wins. For
the bereaved parent, not a thought!
No one heeds the sigh that breaks
from him, as, amidst festivities and
mirth, and congratulatory acclamations,
he sees his daughter, with all
her prized affections, borne off from
him, in triumph, for ever.
There was, on this occasion, in the
manner of Laski towards his child, an
evident sadness. It was not that the
political horizon was darkening; he
had never permitted that to throw its
gloom over his companionship with
his daughter. It was because he had
grounds to believe that the events
which threatened the tranquillity of
Poland threatened also the peace of
his daughter, whose affections he had
divined were no longer exclusively his
own.
She, observing his emotion, and
attributing it to some untoward event
in the political world, could not refrain
from expressing the wish that he
would quit the harassing affairs of
state, and live wholly in his home.
“I would long since have done so,”
he replied, “if personal happiness had
been the sole aim of my existence.
But I have a taskwork to accomplish—one,
I think, which God, by fitting
me thereto, has pointed out as mine.
Else it is indeed here, with thee beside
me, that I find all that can bear the
name of happiness. The rest of life
is but sternest duty—strife, hostility,
contempt. But away with this gloomy
talk—what gossip is there stirring in
your idle world, Maria?”
“Pray, is there war forward?”
“I hope not. Why do you ask?”
“A maid of mine, who in the city
gathers news as busily as bees, in the
open fields, their honey”——
“Your simile, I fear, would scarce
hold good as to the honey.”
“No, in faith; and there is no
honey in the news she brings. She
tells me that a camp is forming in the[Pg 565]
frontiers between Poland and Lithuania,
and that Augustus Glinski is
sent there to command the troops.
Is this true?”
“It is; and she might have added
that the duke himself secretly left the
city last night, to place himself at
their head.”
“Is it a dangerous service?”
“The service on which the duke
has entered, and into which he misleads
his son, is dangerous. You
tremble, Maria. It was no maiden,
nor the tattle of the town, that brought
you this. When did you last see
or hear from him—from Augustus
Glinski?”
“Believe me,” said Maria, while a
crimson blush suddenly spread over
her countenance, “if I have concealed
any thing from you, it was not from
craft, nor subtlety, nor fear, but
from”——
“From a mere delicacy, a simple
bashfulness,” said the father, coming
to her assistance. “I know it well.
Had you a mother living, I would bid
you confide these sentiments of your
heart to her, and to her only; but,
having no other parent, make me your
confidant. Trust me, you shall not
find a woman’s heart more open to
your griefs, your fears, your joys, than
mine shall be. Make me your sole
confidant—you love this young Augustus?”
“When I was at my aunt’s we met
each other often—but to you, my father,
I have ever referred him as our
final arbiter. I need not say that the
known political rivalry between his
father and yourself has made him
backward in addressing you.”
“All men speak well of Augustus
Glinski. I blame you not, my child;
I only tremble for you. The duke,
his father, is a restless, bold ambitious
man, who will lead him—honourable
as he is, but too young to judge,
or to resist his parent—into treasonable
enterprises. Both father and son—if
they will play the rebel, and bring
down war on Poland—I stand prepared
to meet. The sword of justice
shall sweep them from the earth. But
if thy heart, my child, is doomed to
bleed in this encounter, the wound
will not be more yours than mine.
There shall be no secrets between us.
I will protect thee all I can; and if I
cannot prevent thy sorrows, I will at
least share them.”
A low tap was here heard at the door,
and a page made his appearance. On
seeing the minister, the stripling was
about to retire. Maria, however,
called him in, and bade him deliver his
message. “You come,” she said to the
youth, who still hesitated to speak—”you
come from the younger Glinski:
speak openly—what is it he has commissioned
you to say?”
“This, my lady,” answered the
page, “that he has ridden in all haste
from the camp—that he must quit the
city again before nightfall, and craves
an audience if only for one minute.”
Maria looked towards her father,
and thus referred the answer to him.
Count Laski was silent.
“Will you not,” said his daughter,
“tell this messenger, whether his master
may come here or not?”
“My child, he cannot! he is at this
moment under my arrest. Return, sir
page,” and he motioned him from the
room—”but return to the fortress of
—-; you will find your master there
a prisoner, under charge of high treason.”
“Oh, spare him! spare him!” cried
Maria, as she sank back almost senseless
with terror and alarm.
“My child! my child!” exclaimed
the minister in heart-breaking anguish,
as he bent over his weeping daughter.
Chapter IV.
After having in some measure
soothed the terrors of his daughter,
the chancellor called to him his trusty
Hakem. He briefly explained to him
that the Duke of Lithuania was at
that moment in open rebellion against
his Majesty, and placed in his hands
a warrant for his execution. “The
law cannot reach him through its usual
servants,” he said; “it is a bold enterprise
I propose to you—to decapitate
a general at the head of his troops.”
If this was a measure which hardly
another minister than Laski would
have contemplated, it was one also
which he would have hardly found[Pg 566]
another than Hakem to undertake and
accomplish. The bravery of this man
was all but miraculous, and was only
rescued from madness by the extreme
skill and address by which it was supported.
In battle, he rushed on danger
as a bold and delighted swimmer
plunges in the waves, which to him
are as innocuous as the breeze that is
freshening them. Yet, when the excitement
was passed, he relapsed into
a state of apparent apathy. He had
been taken captive in one of those engagements,
at this time not unfrequent,
between the Poles and the Turks,
with the latter of whom he had served
as a soldier of fortune. To say that
he was taken prisoner, is hardly correct;
for he was found lying half dead
on the field of battle, and was brought
home by the Poles, by some caprice
of compassion, with their own sick
and dying. Neither was it constraint
that held him beneath the roof of
Laski, or in the nominal condition of
a slave, for at all times escape would
have been easy to him. It was either
attachment to those who lived beneath
that roof, or an equal indifference to
every thing without or beyond it, that
retained him there.
To propose to Hakem some bold
and perilous enterprise, was to offer
him one of the few pleasures to which
he was open. He accepted, therefore,
of the strange commission now
entrusted to him without hesitation;
stipulating, only, that he might take
from the stables of the king a horse
which was much celebrated for its
amazing power and fleetness.
Mounted upon this incomparable
steed, he pursued his way to the camp
of the Duke of Lithuania. On his
journey he had made trial of its speed,
and yet had husbanded its strength.
Arrived at the plain where the insurgent
army was encamped, he there
lay in ambush for some time, till he
saw where the duke, passing his
troops in review, rode somewhat in
advance of what in the language of
modern warfare we should call his
staff. Hakem set spurs to his horse,
and rushed upon him with the velocity
of lightning, his drawn cimeter
flashing in the sun, and his loud cry
of defiance calling the duke to his defence.
Thus challenged, he put his
lance in rest to meet his furious assailant.
But the thrust of the lance
was avoided, and the next moment
the head of the duke was seen to roll
upon the field. The Arab wheeled
round, and, without quitting his steed,
picked up the severed head, placed it
on his saddle-bows, and darted off
fleeter than the wind. A cry of horror
and a shout of pursuit arose from the
whole army, who were spectators of
this scene. Every horse was in motion.
But where the contest is one
of speed, of what avail are numbers?
In the whole camp there was not a
steed which could compete with that
on which the solitary fugitive was
mounted, and was already seen scouring
the plain at a distance. As he
fled, a paper was observed to fall
from his hands, which the wind bore
amongst his innumerable pursuers; it
was the judicial warrant that had
been thus strangely executed.
Meanwhile, at the palace, the royal
mind of Sigismund was not a little
disquieted and alarmed by this sudden
rebellion of the powerful Duke of
Lithuania. That alarm would not
have been diminished had he been
aware that this open rebellion was
to be aided by a secret domestic treason,
which, in his own palace, was
lying in ambush for his life. The
queen, whilst watching her opportunity
to perform her part in this
criminal enterprise, affected to throw
all the blame of this formidable rebellion
on the unpopularity of the
minister Laski, whose measures, indeed,
the duke proclaimed as the main
motive of his conduct.
Matters were in this condition when
Count Laski, attended by his slave,
entered the royal apartment. There
were present, beside the queen, several
of the nobility—all prepared, by
the insinuations and address of the
queen, to give but a cold greeting to
the minister.
“In good time,” said the queen,
“Count Laski makes his appearance.
We wish to know how you will extricate
his Majesty from the peril in which
your unpopular counsels have thrust
him. With what forces will you meet
the Duke of Lithuania? Now, when
there is need of the brave chivalry of
Poland to defend the king from rebellion,
we find the nobility alienated
from the crown by your unwise, and[Pg 567]
arrogant, and plebeian policy. But let
us hear what is the excellent advice,
what is the good intelligence, that you
now bring us?”
“The Duke of Lithuania, madam,”
said the chancellor, slightly raising his
voice, but preserving the same calm
dignity as if he had been presiding in
a high court of justice—”the Duke
of Lithuania is in open, manifest rebellion;
and rebellion is, in the laws
of all nations, punished by death.”
“Punished!” said the queen scoffingly:
“are you speaking of some
trembling caitiff who holds up his
naked hand at your bar of justice?
Punished! you must conquer him.”
“Your Majesty will be pleased to
hear,” continued the chancellor with
a look full of significance, “that
Albert Glinski, Duke of Lithuania,
whose treason was open and proclaimed,
has been by the royal warrant sentenced”——
Count Laski paused.
“Sentenced!” exclaimed Bona, and
repeated her scornful laugh, which this
time but ill concealed a certain vague
terror that was rising in her mind. “Is
our chancellor mad, or does he sport
with us? This rebel, whom you talk of
sentencing—of condemning, we presume,
to the block—stands at the head
of a greater army than his Majesty
can at this moment assemble.”
“And the sentence,” pursued the
minister, “has been executed!”
As he pronounced these words, the
slave Hakem advanced, and drawing
aside his robe, which had hitherto concealed
it, he held up by the hair the
severed head of the Duke of Lithuania.
There ran a thrill of horror through
the assembly. But, the next moment,
a loud hysterical shriek drew the attention
of all parties to the queen: she
had fallen insensible at the feet of the
king. The council was abruptly dismissed.
Chapter V.
Thus far the cause of the chancellor
had prospered. Poland had been
preserved from the horrors of a civil
war. The king’s life had also been
saved, and a great crime prevented;
the career of assassination and of
poisoning, into which the queen afterwards
entered, was at all events postponed.
As a public man, the minister
was fully triumphant. But the minister
was a father; at this side he was
vulnerable; and fortune dealt her blow
with cruel and unexpected severity.
We have seen with what stern fidelity
to his ministerial duty, and at how
great a peril to his daughter’s happiness,
the chancellor had arrested Augustus
Glinski. The rebellion quelled,
the author of it punished and decapitated,
there seemed no just motive
for holding longer in imprisonment a
youth who could not be accused of
having any guilty participation in the
crime of his father. He accordingly
proposed his release. But the anger
of the king against the late duke, who
to his political offence had added that
of personal ingratitude, (for it was
Sigismund himself who had bestowed
on him the powerful duchy of Lithuania,)
was still unappeased, and he
insisted upon including the son in the
guilt and punishment of his parent.
The representations of the minister
were here unavailing; he would listen
to nothing but the dictates of his own
vindictive feelings.
Count Laski detailed the manner of
his arrest, and explained the singular
interest he felt in the pardon and
liberation of this youth; adding, that
if Angustus Glinski died upon the
scaffold, he feared the life of his
daughter. But even this was unavailing.
The old monarch thought he
was displaying a great acuteness when
he detected, as he imagined, in this plea
of a daughter’s happiness, a scheme
of selfish aggrandizement. “Ha!
ha!” said he, “so the wind sits in
that quarter. A good match—duchess
of Lithuania! I would rather you
asked for the dukedom yourself, and
married your daughter to another.”
It was in vain that the minister
again repeated his simple and true
statement; it was in vain that he
limited his request to the life of the
younger Glinski, consenting to the
forfeiture of his title and estates;
Sigismund was resolved this time not
to be overreached by his subtle minister.[Pg 568]
The language of entreaty was
new to Laski; he had tried it, and
had failed. It was new to Laski to
endure tamely the misconstruction of
his motives, or the least impeachment
of his veracity. He had no other
resource, no other response, left than
the resignation of his ministerial
office. But the obstinacy and anger
of the king were proof against this
also. The danger which threatened
his reign had been dispelled. He
could afford to be self-willed. He
would not be controlled. In short,
Count Laski left the royal presence—a
discarded minister.
In a monarchy uncontrolled and
unaided by representative assemblies,
the power which is secured perhaps
to one of the weakest of men or
women, perhaps to a child, has often
struck the observer of human affairs
as a strange anomaly. But the insecure
and precarious foundation of
the power of the great minister in
such a monarchy, is scarcely less
curious to contemplate. The sagacious
counsellor, the long-experienced
governor, who has for years wielded
the powers of the state, may be reduced
to obscurity and impotence
by a word—a word of puerile passion,
kindled perhaps by a silly intrigue.
A great ruler is displaced at the
caprice of a dotard. When Count
Laski entered the presence of the
king, he was in reality the governor
of Poland; Europe acknowledged
him amongst the controllers and directors
of human affairs; his country
expected many signal improvements
at his hands; the individual happiness
of thousands depended upon him;
but this power, which had devised
great schemes, and which was the
rock of support to so many, could
itself be shaken and overthrown in a
moment, by the splenetic humour of
an angry old man.
Who shall describe the grief and
despair of Maria when she heard of
the cruel resolution which the king
had taken, of the dreadful fate which
threatened Augustus Glinski? As
she sat this time in her Gothic chamber,
and in her accustomed chair,
what a mortal paleness had settled
upon her countenance! Her eye
glared out, and was fixed on the
vacant wall, as if a spirit had arisen
before her, and arrested her regard.
There was a spirit there. It was the
form of the young Augustus, whom
she saw withering and wasting in his
dungeon; a dungeon which would
deliver him up only to the scaffold.
After the events which had occurred
all idea of a union with Augustus,
presuming that his life should be
spared, had been resigned. How
could he, on whom the maxims of
that age especially imposed the duty
of revenging his parent, ally himself
to her? How could he choose for
his second father the very man who
had deprived him of his first and
natural parent? If she could but
hear that he had broken loose from
imprisonment, that he was but safe—this
was all that she felt entitled to
wish or to pray for. It need hardly
be added that it was additional bitterness
to reflect, that but for his unhappy
attachment to herself, his
arrest and captivity would never have
taken place.
Again, in the same angle of the
apartment, the Arab slave might
have been seen standing, silent and
motionless as before, regarding with
deep interest and commiseration the
beautiful daughter of Laski. The
secret which she was about, on one
occasion, to betray to Hakem, had
now betrayed itself to his own observation.
She loved—she loved the
son of him whom he had assassinated,
or executed. There was a profound
sadness on the features of the slave.
The silence of the room was suddenly
broken by Maria, who, turning
to the slave, exclaimed in a tone of
anguish—”Hakem, you must save
him! you must save him!” This
was said in mere desperation, certainly
not with any distinct hope
that it was in the power of Hakem to
obey. When, therefore, she heard his
voice reply, in a calm but saddened
tone, “I will!” she was almost as
much surprised as if she had not addressed
herself to him. She rose to
be assured that it was he who spoke;
to bid him repeat his consolatory
promise; to question him on his
means of fulfilling it: but Hakem was
no longer there; he had suddenly
quitted the apartment. It seemed as
if some voice in the air had sported
with her grief.[Pg 569]
Chapter VI.
But it was no voice that mocked
at her grief. Hakem proceeded that
very day to the palace, and sought
an interview with the queen. The
guard or sentinel to whom he addressed
himself, laughed at his request.
“Give her majesty this
paper,” said the slave, “and refuse
to deliver it at your peril.”
The paper was forwarded to the
queen—Hakem was immediately
ushered into her presence.
“You promise here,” she said,
pointing to the missive she had received,
“to revenge the death of the
Duke of Lithuania. I presume some
private motive of revenge against the
minister and your master, prompts
your conduct, and you seek from me
in additional recompense for an act
which you have already resolved on,
but which you think will be grateful
to me. Is it not so?
“Your Majesty is penetrating.”
“And this recompense, what
is it?”
“That which will cost you nothing,
though you alone can accomplish
it—the release and pardon of
Augustus Glinski. Obtain this from
the king—which to you will be easy—and
with my own hand I will assassinate
the assassin (for such you will
doubtless deem him) of the Duke of
Lithuania.”
“I will not ask what are your
motives in all this, nor how you have
divined my wishes, but revenge the
death of the Duke of Lithuania, and
far more than the liberation of the
young Augustus shall be your reward.”
“I ask, and will accept no other.
But his rescue must first be obtained.”
The queen had no objection to
urge against this condition; although
she had hitherto, for reasons which
may be easily surmised, avoided any
appearance of interest in the fate of
Augustus. She acquiesced, therefore,
in Hakem’s demand; surprised indeed
that she should have obtained the
gratification of her revenge at so slight
a cost.
What the influence and the reasonings
of the minister could not effect,
was very speedily brought about by
the blandishments of the queen. Augustus
Glinski was pardoned, and restored
to a portion of his father’s
wealth and dignities.
The warrant for the release of the
prisoner was conveyed to the hand
of Hakem, together with a message
that he was now expected to perform
his part of the engagement.
Hakem, bearing this warrant, and
accompanied by one of the officers of
justice, proceeded to the prison of
Augustus, and having liberated him,
carried him forthwith to the house of
the chancellor; the young man, who
as yet hardly apprehended that he
was master of his own movements,
permitting himself without remonstrance
to be led by his new conductor.
The chancellor and his daughter
sat together in the same apartment
to which we have already twice introduced
the reader. Had his daughter
been happy, what a release for
Laski had been his enfranchisement
from public office! “Banishment from
court!” he exclaimed to one who would
have condoled with him—”make
way there for a liberated prisoner!”
But the grief of his daughter, who
strove in vain to check her flowing
tears, entirely pre-occupied his mind.
These tears he never chid; her sadness
he never rebuked; he shared it,
and by renewed kindness strove to
alleviate it. They sat in silence together,
when Hakem, entering, made
his obeisance, and presented Augustus
to the astonished Maria.
“I have saved him!” was all he
said.
The joy of Maria was extreme.
It was soon, however, followed by a
painful embarrassment. Amongst all
parties there was a sad conflict of
feeling. Augustus would have given
worlds to have thrown himself at the
feet of Maria; but if the memory of
what had occurred had not been sufficient,
there stood her father in person
before him—the author of his own
father’s death.
Hakem broke the silence. “Beautiful
being!” he said, kneeling on one
knee before Maria, “whom I have in[Pg 570]
secret worshipped, whom alone to
worship I have lingered here in the
guise and office of a slave—you bade
me save him—and I have! Is there
any thing further for thy happiness
which the Arab can accomplish?”
“No, Hakem, and I feel already
overburdened with gratitude for this
service you have rendered me—how
rendered I cannot as yet divine. There
is no other service now I think that
any one can render me.” As she
spoke, her eye had already turned to
the spot where Augustus, hesitating
to approach or to retreat, was still
standing.
“No other service! But, by the
living God, there is!” cried Hakem,
starting to his feet. His countenance
flushed with sudden excitement; his
eye kindled with some generous sentiment.
“Hear me, gentle sir,” he
said, addressing himself to Augustus.
“Nature calls for vengeance—is it not
so? Christian and Mahometan, we all
resemble in this. Blood cries for
blood. But the hand that slew your
father—it was mine. I am the first
and direct object of your resentment.
Let now one victim suffice. Is the
Arab too ignoble a victim? That
Arab is the preserver of your life, at
what cost you may one day learn.
Let this enhance the value of the sacrifice.
Over my blood let peace be
made between you.” Turning once
more, and bowing with deep emotion
before Maria, he then, with a movement
quick as thought, plunged a
poniard in his bosom, and fell to the
ground. “Go, tell the queen,” he
said to the officer of justice, who had
stood a mute spectator of this scene—”tell
her what you have witnessed;
and add, that my promise has been
fulfilled. And you, Augustus Glinski—will
not this suffice? The assassin of
the duke lies here before you. Oh,
take her by the hand!” Then, looking
his last towards Maria, he murmured—”And
I, too—loved!” and
closed his eyes in death.
The prayer of Hakem was granted.
It was impossible to demand another
sacrifice—impossible not to accept
this as full atonement to the spirit of
revenge. Over the body of Hakem,
whom all lamented and admired,
peace was made.
The generous object of the slave
was fully accomplished. His death
procured the long happiness of Maria.
THE LAY OF STARKÀTHER.
[The following lines are founded on the account given by Saxo-Grammaticus
(Lib. VIII.) of the guilt, penitence, and death of Starkàther, a fabulous Scandinavian
hero, famous throughout the North for his bodily strength and warlike
achievements, as well as for his poetical genius, of which traces are still
to be found in the metrical traditions and phraseology of his country. According
to the old legend, the existence of Starkàther was prolonged for three lifetimes,
in each of which he was doomed to commit some act of infamy; but
this fiction has not here been followed out. Oehlenschläger’s drama, bearing
the name of this hero, has many beauties; but deviates widely from Saxo’s
story of his death.]
The frosts of many a Northland Yule lay thick upon his head;
A staff was in his outstretched hand, to lead him on his way,
And vainly rolled his faded eyes to find the light of day.
In ruined majesty and night the Hero there appears.
The awful brow, the ample breast, a shelter from the foe,
And there the massive weight of arm that dealt the deadly blow.
“See here the twin swords by my side, and see this purse of gold;
[Pg 571]
And by an easy slaughter earn the guerdon I would give.
And still I seek, but seek in vain, an honourable tomb;
With friendly enmity consent to quench this lingering breath,
And give, to crown a warrior’s life, one boon—a warrior’s death.
I spread afar my name and fame in every Gothic clime;
Those godlike gifts were treasured long from blot and blemish clear,
But one dark act of fraudful guilt bedimmed my bright career.
And trampled liegemen and the laws beneath his tyrant feet,
His nobles placed this glittering hoard within my yielding hand,
And bade me rid them of a rule that wide enslaved the land.
And found him with a faithless guard within the secret bath;
Yet rather had I faced an host fast rushing to the fight,
Than the eye of that unarmèd man, there gleaming bold and bright.
But thoughts of glory or of gain dispelled the better charm;
The water reddened with his blood, I left the lifeless corse,
To meet myself a living death,—a lifetime of remorse.
I since have fondly sought release from such a loathèd life;
The foremost, who suborned my crime, have perished at my feet,
But none had heart or hand to strike the blow I longed to meet.
The untasted bait that bribed my soul, nor thou the boon despise;
Else, like some worn-out beast of prey, Starkàther soon must lie,
Nor gain the bliss that Odin gives to men who nobly die.”
I take thy gold, I take thy life, a forfeit to my claim;
My father fell beneath thy hand, his image haunts me still—
But the hour of his revenge is come, and he shall drink his fill.”
But not before his sinking arm was felt upon his foe:
“Thanks, youthful friend!” the Hero said; “now Odin’s hall is won,
Its rays already greet my soul, its raptures are begun.”
[Pg 572]
MOZART.[6]
The true position of the creative
musical power in the scale of human
genius is difficult to determine; and
will be differently estimated by different
minds. That it is a heavenly
gift of a high order, admits of no
doubt; that it exercises over men’s
minds a mighty, and, under due safeguards,
a beneficent influence, is equally
indisputable; and that its existence
implies, and is closely connected with,
the possession of other superior faculties,
moral and intellectual, must also,
we think, be clear upon reflection,
though this last proposition is not so
likely to be readily conceded. Yet
the place which the great composer is
generally allowed to occupy, in relation
to the painter or the poet, does
not correspond either to the qualities
or to the effects displayed in his art.
Many would think it a disparagement
to connect the names of Milton or
Virgil, Raphael or Michael Angelo,
with those of the greatest musical
masters; and it may seem not easy to
say whether this feeling is the result
of injustice or accident, on the one
hand; or, on the other, is founded on
some deep and solid truth in the laws
and elements of our nature.
The mighty magic that lies in the
highest manifestations of musical composition,
must command the wonder
and reverence of all who understand,
or even observe, its operation. The
power of giving birth to innumerable
forms of exquisite melody, delighting
the ear and stirring every emotion of
the soul, agitating us with fear or
horror, animating us with ardour and
enthusiasm, filling us with joy, melting
us with grief, now lulling us to
repose amidst the luxurious calm of
earthly contentment, now borrowing
wings more ethereal than the lark’s,
and wafting us to the gate of heaven,
where its notes seem to blend undistinguishably
with the songs of superior
beings—this is a faculty that
bears no unequivocal mark of a divine
descent, and that nothing but prejudice
or pride can deem of trivial or
inferior rank. But when to this is
added a mastery over the mysterious
combinations of harmony, a spirit
that can make subservient to its one
object immense masses of dissimilar
and sometimes discordant, sounds;
and, like the leader of a battle, can
ride on the whirlwind and direct the
storm, till it subdue the whole soul,
taking captive all our feelings, corporeal
and mental, and moulding them to
its will—a power of this nature seems
to equal in dignity the highest faculties
of genius in any of its forms, as
it undoubtedly surpasses all the others
in the overwhelming and instantaneous
efficacy of its agency while thus
working its wonders. Tame is the
triumph of the artist in the exhibition-room,
dim and distant the echo
which the poet receives of the public
praise, compared with the unequivocal
and irrepressible bursts of admiration which
entrance the great composer in
the crowded theatre, or even with
that silent incense which is breathed
in the stifled emotions of his audience
in some more sacred place. The nearest
approach to any such enthusiastic
tribute, is that which sometimes
awaits the successful tragic poet at
the representation of his dramas; but,
besides the lion’s share of applause
which the actor is apt to appropriate,
what dramatic writer, in our own experience
or history, has been greeted
with such homage as that paid to
Handel, when the king and people of
England stood up in trembling awe
to hear his Hallelujah chorus?—that
which hailed Mozart from the enraptured
theatres of Prague when listening
to his greatest operas?—that which
fanned into new fire the dying embers
of Haydn’s spirit, when the Creation
was performed at Vienna, to delight
his declining days, before an audience
of 1500 of the Austrian nobility and
gentry?
The ancient poets felt the force of
those emotions which musical sound
produces, and shadowed out under its
name the great principles of human
harmony and social order. Societies
were founded, cities built, and countries
cultivated by Orpheus and Amphion,
and men of analogous fame,[Pg 573]
who wielded at will this mythic power,
and made all the susceptibilities of nature
“sequacious of the lyre.”
In one respect the fame of the composer
is less diffusible than that of the
poet. He requires various mechanical
means and appliances for his full success.
His works must be performed
in order to be felt. He cannot be read,
like the poet, in the closet, or in the
cottage, or on the street-stall, where the
threadbare student steals from day
to day, as he lingers at the spot, new
draughts of delicious refreshment. Few
can sit down and peruse a musical
composition even for its melody; and
very few, indeed, can gather from the
silent notes the full effect of its splendid
combinations. Yet even here the
great master has analogous compensations.
The idle amateur, the boarding-school
girl, the street minstrel,
and the barrel-organ, reflect his more
palpable beauties; and, subjecting
them to the severe test of incessant
reiteration, make us wonder that
“custom cannot stale” the infinite
variety that is shut up even in his
simplest creations.
But the creative musician has an
immeasurable advantage over both the
painter and the poet in the absence of
all local limitation to his popularity.
Here, indeed, the painter is the least
favoured by the nature of his art. The
immediate presence of the prophet
could only be felt at Mecca; the perfection
of painting can only be seen
at Rome. The poet has a wider range,
and can be prized and appreciated
wherever the language is known in
which he writes. But the musician
is still more highly privileged. He
speaks with a tongue intelligible alike
to every nation and class; he expresses
himself in a universal character,
which Bishop Wilkins would
have died to possess; he needs no
translation; he can suffer nothing by
change of place; his works are equally
and at once capable of being enjoyed
at London and Naples, Paris and
Prague, Vienna and St Petersburg.
If the enjoyment received from his
powers is not every where equally
great, it is not from the want of a medium
to make them understood, but
from a difference in the minds to which
they are presented.
The creative art of the musician is
not one of mere talent, or of a certain
sensual refinement and dexterity. It
involves deep systematic study, closely
akin to that of the severer sciences.
It has a sequence and logic of its own,
and excellence in it is unattainable
without good sense and strong intellect.
It involves great moral and pathetic
sensibility, and a ready sympathy
with all the joys and sorrows of mankind.
And finally, the lightest branch
of it is beyond the reach of any but
those who are lifted up by strong feelings
of reverence and devotion. Handel
was a man of sincere piety, who
avowed it to be the object of his compositions
not merely to please men,
but “to make them better.”
“The character of Handel,” says Mr
Hogarth, in his excellent Musical History,
“in all its great features, was exalted
and amiable. Throughout his life
he had a deep sense of religion. He
used to express the great delight he felt
in setting to music the most sublime
passages of Holy Writ; and the habitual
study of the Scriptures had constant
influence on his sentiments and
conduct. For the last two or three
years of his life, he regularly attended
divine service in his parish church of St
George’s, Hanover Square, where his
looks and gestures indicated the fervour
of his devotion. In his life he was pure
and blameless.”—(Vol. i. 209.)
“Haydn,” in like manner, (we quote
from the same biographer,) “was a
stranger to every evil and malignant
passion; and, indeed, was not much under
the influence of passion of any sort.
But his disposition was cheerful and
gentle, and his heart was brimful of
kindly affections. He was friendly and
benevolent, open and candid in the expression
of his sentiments, always ready
to acknowledge and aid the claims of
talent in his own art, and, in all his
actions, distinguished by the most spotless
integrity. Such is the account of
him given by all those who knew him
best; and they add, as the most remarkable
feature of his character, that
strong and deeply-rooted sense of religion,
which is the only solid foundation
of moral excellence. Haydn’s piety
was not a mere feeling, capable, as is
often the case with worldly men, of
being excited for the moment by circumstances,
and dying away when the
external influence is removed; it was
[Pg 574]an active principle, which guided the
whole tenor of his life and conduct. His
sacred music was exalted by the existence,
in his mind, of those devout sentiments
which it is the object of sacred
music to express. ‘When I was engaged
in composing The Creation,’ he
used to say, ‘I felt myself so penetrated
with religious feeling, that before I sat
down to write, I earnestly prayed to
God that he would enable me to praise
him worthily.'”—(Vol. i. 304.)
Similar feelings of strong piety, as
well as of generous benevolence, animated
and inspired the great and
amiable man whose character is more
immediately the subject of this article.
It would be difficult, indeed, to think
of an oratorio or requiem written by
a scoffer or a sceptic.
With such exalted requisites, so intense
a power, and so extensive a
range of influence, it is strange that
the composer should not have taken
the rank and relative dignity to which
he seems entitled in the province of
the arts. But honour and fame are
chiefly dispensed by poets and literary
men; and it is impossible not to feel
that, generally speaking, the musician
is treated by men of letters as an alien
from their own lineage. Music may
be praised in vague and evasive terms;
but the individual composer is not
deemed deserving of mention. All
the great masters of the pencil have
been cordially commended in immortal
verse; but of the great composers’
names scarce a notice is to be found.
It is not wonderful that the poet
should prize above all others his own
form of art. Poetry, as the mouthpiece
of practical wisdom, as the
clearest interpreter of all instruction,
must ever hold an undisputed pre-eminence.
Painting, too, as nearest
akin to poetry in the objects it presents
and the effects it produces, may
be allowed at least to contest the
palm for the second rank. But that
music in the person of her most inspired
sons, should have been sternly excluded
from a participation in the honours
awarded to her sister arts, seems
an injustice which can be defended on
no pleadable grounds. The explanation
of it seems to be, that most of
our great poets—and this has certainly
been the case in England—have
had no love or knowledge, and no
true appreciation, of high musical composition.
Milton alone seems to have
been an exception; and, we cannot
doubt, that if he had lived in the same
age with Handel, he would have given
utterance to his admiration in strains
worthy of them both. The rest of
our vates sacri, on whom immortality
is proverbially said to depend, seem,
generally speaking, to have been ignorance
itself in this department.
Several of them, indeed, have written
odes for St Cecilia’s day, but this does
not prove that they had a taste for
more than rhythm. Pope had the
tact to call Handel a giant, and speaks
cleverly of his “hundred hands” as
sure to be fatal to the reign of Dulness.
Like bold Briareus, with his hundred hands,
To stir, to rouse, to shake the soul he comes,
And Jove’s own thunders follow Mars’s drums.
Arrest him, goddess! or you sleep no more.”
But no reference is made to the exquisite
beauty of his compositions.
The loudness is all that seems to be
praised, and we suspect, that in private
Pope was inclined to laugh with
Swift in his disparaging comparison
between Tweedledum and Tweedledee.
Wordsworth has written on the
“Power of Sound;” but the small
part of it that touches on the musical
art, does not impress us with the idea
of his knowing or caring much about
it, though in this, as in other things,
he has the sense and philosophy to
sacrifice a cock to Esculapius, and to
bow down to what others worship,
even where he does not himself feel
the influence of a warm devotion.
Collins and Moore, and perhaps a few
others whom we have overlooked,
ought to be excluded from this condemnation;
but they have not been
led to speak of individual musicians,
or have not had courage to leave the
beaten track.
Thus neglected by those who would
have been its most faithful depositaries
and most effective champions, the fame
of the musical composer has been left
to the guardianship of the few sound[Pg 575]
and enlightened judges who thoroughly
comprehend him, to the humble but
honest admiration of professional performers,
to the practice and imitation
of effeminate amateurs, to the cant
of criticism of the worthies on the free
list, and to the instinctive applause of
the popular voice. Even with these
humbler hands to build up his monument,
the great master of music has a
perpetual possession within the hearts
of men, that the poet and the painter
may well envy. Every chord in the human
frame that answers to his strains,
every tear that rises at the bidding of
his cadences, every sob that struggles
for an outlet at his touches of despairing
tenderness, or at the thunders of
his massive harmony, is a tribute to
his power and his memory, enough to
console his spirit if it can still be conscious
of them, or to have rewarded
his living labours in their progress by
a bright anticipation of their effects.
If nobles, and even nations, do not
contend for the possession of his works,
or offer a ransom for their purchase,
such as is daily given for the masterpieces
of the painter’s power; it is
the pride of his genius that his compositions
cannot be appropriated or
possessed. An oratorio of Handel, or
an opera of Mozart, cannot become
property like a picture of Raphael or
Guido. They belong to mankind at
large, open to all, and enjoyable by
all who have the faculty to perceive,
and delight in, their beauties; and in
every theatre and public place, in
every church and in every chamber
throughout Christendom, a portion of
their divine and various influence,
suited to the scene and occasion, is
always within reach, to make men
gentler and better, happier and holier,
than they would otherwise be without
such manifestations of their Maker’s
wondrous gifts.
Nowhere can the views we have
above suggested be better illustrated,
than in the fate and character of the
singular man who, if not the first, was
yet only second to one other, among
those on whom music has shed her
fullest inspiration.
It is not our intention to follow
minutely the events of Mozart’s life.
They are generally well known; and
to those who wish to have a clear,
complete, and judicious view of them,
we can safely recommend the book
noticed at the outset of this article.
Mozart was born at Salzburg in
1756, and died at Vienna in 1791, in
his thirty-sixth year. But into that
short space were compressed as many
proofs and compositions of genius, as
much joy and sorrow, as much triumph
and humiliation, as would have
crowded a much longer lifetime. His
early indications of genius are well
known, and were indeed wonderful,
even as compared with those of other
great composers—for Handel, Haydn,
and Beethoven, all gave proofs of their
musical powers in boyhood—though
none of them as children showed that
full maturity of mind which distinguished
Mozart, and which only a few
of those who witnessed it could fully
appreciate. Mozart’s organization
was obviously of the finest and tenderest
texture; but he had also many
advantages in his nurture, and, among
others, the inestimable blessing of a
happy home, where harmony reigned
in the hearts, as well as upon the lips
and fingers of the inmates. His father
was a man of sense and education, as
well as of musical talent, and in all
respects did his duty to his son
throughout life, amidst many difficulties
and disappointments, resulting
partly from his own dependent situation
at Salzburg, and partly from an
over-estimate of the worldly prosperity
which his son’s genius should
have commanded. His mother seems
also to have been an excellent person;
and from the remarkable letters which
Mozart wrote from Paris to prepare
his father for her death, after the
event had happened, she appears to
have been the object of the tenderest
affection to her family. Mozart
uniformly discharged towards his parents
all the offices of pious devotion;
and he was always affectionately attached
to his sister, who was a few
years older than himself, and whose
early and distinguished skill as a performer
must have been useful in
assisting her brother’s tastes. In 1829
the Novello family saw this lady at
Salzburg, a widow and in narrow circumstances.
“We found Madame Sonnenberg,
lodged in a small but clean room, bed-ridden
and quite blind. Hers is a complete
decay of nature; suffering no pain,
[Pg 576]she lies like one awaiting the stroke of
death, and will probably expire in her
sleep…. Her voice was scarcely
above a whisper, so that I was forced
to lean my face close to hers to catch
the sound. In the sitting-room still remained
the old clavichord, on which the
brother and sister had frequently played
duets together; and on its desk were
some pieces of his composition, which
were the last things his sister had played
over previous to her illness.”
With becoming delicacy, the fruits
of an English subscription were presented
to her on her name-day, as a remembrance
from some friends of her
brother.
The bane of Mozart’s fortunes was
the patronage on which he was dependent.
His father had got into the
trammels of the Archbishop of Salzburg—a
sordid, arrogant, and ignorant
man, who saw Mozart’s value in
the eyes of others, though he could
not himself estimate it, and would
neither pay him nor part with him.
When in his twentieth year, and already
a great composer and an efficient
performer, Mozart was in the
receipt, from this princely prelate, for
the liberal use of his musical talents,
of a salary equal in amount to about
£1, 1s. English, per annum.
“Among a multitude of compositions
that he wrote for the archbishop’s concerts,
in 1775, are five concertos for the
violin, which he probably performed
himself. His gentle disposition made him
easily comply with any proposal to augment
pleasure, however out of his usual
course. During the following year,
1776, he seems to have made his last
great effort to awaken the archbishop
to some sense of his desert, and a due
generosity of acknowledgment, by producing
masses, litanies, serenades, divertimentos
for instruments, clavier concertos,
&c., too numerous for detail.
But in vain; and what aggravated the
injury of this monstrous appropriation
of labour was, that the father, whose
household economy was now somewhat
pinched, on applying for permission to
remedy these circumstances by a tour,
was refused. From that hour Wolfgang
threw by his pen in disgust—at
least as far as it concerned voluntary
labour.”
It was now resolved that Mozart
should leave Salzburg with his mother,
and try his fortune in the world. He
was every where admired; but the
wonder of his childhood had passed
away, and empty praise was all that
he could, for the most part, earn.
After lingering, in the sickness of hope
deferred, at several of the German
courts, his destination was at last fixed
for Paris. His chance of success as a
courtier was probably diminished by the
blunt though kindly frankness of his
opinions, and by his inability to stoop to
unworthy means of rising. He had also
many rivals to encounter, particularly
those of the more slender school of
Italian melody; and few of the public
had knowledge or independence
enough to forsake the inferior favourites
that were in vogue.
In approaching Paris, Mozart became
alarmed at the prospect of his
being there compelled to resort to the
drudgery of tuition for his support.
“I am a composer,” he said, “and
the son of a kapell-meister, and I
cannot consent to bury in teaching
the talent for composition which God
has so richly bestowed upon me.”
His father, more experienced in the
world, and more prudential in his
ideas, endeavoured to modify his
alarm, and urge him to perseverance
in any honourable course of employment.
The father’s letter at this time
to his son, to apprize him of the true
position of the family, and preserve
him against the dangers in his path,
is honourable to both, and worthy
of perusal.
“This being in all probability the
last letter that you will receive from
me at Mannheim, I address it to you
alone. How deeply the wider separation
which is about to take place between
us affects me, you may partly
conceive, though not feel it in the same
degree with which it oppresses my
heart. If you reflect seriously on what
I have undergone with you two children
in your tender years, you will not
accuse me of timidity, but, on the contrary,
do me the justice to own that I
am, and ever have been, a man with the
heart to venture every thing, though
indeed I always employed the greatest
circumspection and precaution. Against
accidents it is impossible to provide, for
God only sees into futurity. Up to this
time we cannot be said to have been
either successful or unsuccessful; but,
[Pg 577]God be thanked, we have steered between
the two. Every thing has been
attempted for your success, and through
you for our own. We have at least
endeavoured to settle you in some appointment
on a secure footing; though
fate has hitherto decreed that we should
fail in our object. This last step of
ours, however, makes my spirit sink
within me. You may see as clearly as
the sun at noonday, that, through it, the
future condition of your aged parents,
and of your affectionately attached sister,
entirely depends upon you. From the
time of your birth, and indeed earlier,
ever since my marriage, I have found
it a hard task to support a wife, and,
by degrees, a family of seven children,
two relatives by marriage, and the mother,
on a certain income of twenty-five
florins a month, out of this to pay for
maintenance and the expenses of child-bed,
deaths, and sicknesses; which expenses,
when you reflect upon them, will
convince you that I not only never devoted
a kreutzer to my own private
pleasure, but that I could never, in spite
of all my contrivances and care, have
managed to live free from debt without
the especial favour of God; and yet I
never was in debt till now. I devoted
all my time to you two, in the hope and
indeed reliance upon your care in return;
that you would procure for me
a peaceful old age, in which I might
render account to God for the education
of my children, and, without any
other concern than the salvation of my
soul, quietly await death. But Providence
has so ordered, that I must now
afresh commence the ungrateful task of
lesson-giving, and in a place, too, where
this dreary labour is so ill paid, that it
will not support one from one end of
the year to the other; and yet it is to
be thought a matter of rejoicing if,
after talking oneself into a consumption,
something or other is got by it.
“I am far, my dear Wolfgang, from
having the least mistrust in you—on the
contrary, on your filial love I place all
confidence and every hope. Every
thing now depends upon fortunate circumstances,
and the exercise of that
sound understanding which you certainly
possess, if you will listen to it;
the former are uncontrollable—but that
you will always take counsel of your
understanding I hope and pray….
“You are now a young man of
twenty-two years of age; here is none
of that seriousness of years which may
dissuade a youth, let his condition be
what it may—an adventurer, a libertine,
a deceiver—be he old or young,
from courting your acquaintance, and
drawing you into his society and his
plans. One may fall into this danger
unawares, and then not know how to
recede. Of the other sex I can hardly
speak to you, for there the greatest reserve
and prudence are necessary, Nature
herself being our enemy; but whoever
does not employ all his prudence
and reserve in his intercourse, will with
difficulty extricate himself from the
labyrinth—a misfortune that usually
ends in death. How blindly, through
inconsiderate jests, flattery, and play,
one may fall into errors at which the
returning reason is ashamed, you may
perhaps have already a little experienced,
and it is not my intention to reproach
you. I am persuaded that you
do not only consider me as your father,
but as your truest and most faithful
friend, and that you know and see that
our happiness or unhappiness—nay,
more, my long life or speedy death is,
under God, so to speak, in your hands.
If I know you aright, I have nothing but
pleasure to expect in you, which
thought must console me in your absence
for the paternal pleasure of seeing,
hearing, and embracing you. Lead
the life of a good Catholic Christian;
love and fear God; pray to him with
devotion and sincerity, and let your
conduct be such, that should I never
see you more, the hour of my death
may be free from apprehension. From
my heart I bless you.”
His reception at Paris was comparatively
cold. The Parisians were
scarcely done with the “faction fight”
in which the rivalry of Gluck and
Piccini had involved them; but none
of the partisans were inclined to be
enthusiastic about the new-comer.
His only great admirer, and his best
friend, seems to have been his acute
and accomplished countryman Grimm,
who prophesied that monarchs would
dispute for the possession of Mozart.
The prediction was fulfilled, but not
in sufficient time to benefit the unhappy
subject of their competition.
“Baron Grimm and myself often
vent our indignation at the state of
music here, that is to say, between ourselves;
but in public it is always ‘bravo!
bravissimo!‘ and clapping till the fingers
burn. What most displeases me
[Pg 578]is, that the French gentlemen have only
so far improved their taste as to be able
to endure good things; but as for any
perception that their music is bad—Heaven
help them!—and the singing—oimè!“
Again he writes—
“You advise me to visit a great deal,
in order to make new acquaintances, or
to revive the old ones. That is, however,
impossible. The distance is too
great, and the ways too miry to go on
foot; the muddy state of Paris being
indescribable; and to take a coach, one
may soon drive away four or five livres,
and all in vain, for the people merely
pay you compliments, and then it is
over. They ask me to come on this or
that day—I play, and then they say,
‘O c’est un prodige, c’est inconcevable,
c’est étonnant;‘ and then ‘à Dieu.'”
“All this, however,” Mr Holmes
observes, “might have been endured,
so far as mere superciliousness and hauteur
to the professional musician were
involved, if these people had possessed
any real feeling or love for music; but
it was their total want of all taste, their
utter viciousness, that rendered them
hateful to Mozart. He was ready to
make any sacrifice for his family, but
longed to escape from the artificial and
heartless Parisians.
“If I were in a place,” he writes, “where
people had ears to hear, hearts to feel,
and some small degree of perception and
taste, I should laugh heartily over all these
things—but really, as it regards music,
I am living among mere brute beasts.
How can it be otherwise? It is the
same in all their passions, and, indeed,
in every transaction of life; no place in
the world is like Paris. Do not think that
I exaggerate when I speak thus of the
state of music here—ask any one except
a native Frenchman, and if he be fit to
answer the question, he will tell you the
same. I must endure out of love to you—but
I shall thank God Almighty if I
leave this place with my healthful natural
taste. It is my constant prayer
that I may be enabled to establish myself,
that I may do honour to the German
nation, and make fame and money,
and so be the means of helping you out
of your present narrow circumstances,
and of our all living together once more,
cheerfully and happily.”
Take the following vivid sketch of
his task in teaching composition to a
young lady:—
“Among these pupils one is daughter
of the Duc de Guines, with whom I am
in high favour, and I give her two hours’
instruction in composition daily, for
which I am very liberally paid. He
plays the flute incomparably, and she
magnificently on the harp. She possesses
much talent and cleverness, and,
in particular, a very remarkable memory,
which enables her to play all her pieces,
of which there are at least two hundred,
without book. She is doubtful
whether she has genius for composition—particularly
with respect to thoughts
or ideas; her father (who, between ourselves,
is a little too much in love with
her) affirms that she certainly has ideas,
and that nothing but modesty and a
want of confidence in herself prevent
their appearing. We shall now see. If
she really have no ideas, and I must say
I have as yet seen no indication of them,
it will be all in vain, for God knows I
can give her none. It is not her father’s
intention to make any very great composer
of her. ‘I do not wish her,’ he
says, ‘to write any operas, airs, concertos,
or symphonies, but merely grand
sonatas for her instrument, as I do for
mine.’
“I gave her the fourth lesson to-day,
and, as far as the rules of composition
go, am tolerably satisfied with her; she
put the bass to the first minuet which I
placed before her, very correctly. We
now commenced writing in three parts.
She tried it, and fatigued herself in
attempts, but it was impossible to help
her; nor can we move on a step further,
for it is too early, and in science one
must advance by the proper gradations.
If she had genius—but alas! there is
none—she has no thoughts—nothing
comes. I have tried her in every imaginable
way; among others it occurred
to me to place a very simple minuet
before her, to see whether she could
make a variation upon it. That was all
to no purpose. Now, thought I, she
does not know how to begin; so I varied
the first bar for her, and told her to
continue the variation pursuing that
idea; and at length she got through
tolerably well. I next requested her to
begin something herself—the first part
only—a melody; but after a quarter of
an hour’s cogitation nothing came. I
then wrote four bars of a minuet, and
said, ‘What a stupid fellow I am, I
have begun a minuet, and cannot finish
the first part of it. Have the goodness
to do it for me.’ She distrusted her
[Pg 579]ability, but at last, with much labour,
something came to light. I rejoiced
that we got something at last. She had
now to complete the entire minuet, that
is to say, the melody only. On going
away, I recommended her to alter my
four bars for something of her own; to
make another beginning even if she
retained the same harmony, and only
altered the melody. I shall see to-morrow
how she has succeeded.”
In the midst of this irksome labour,
Mozart’s beloved mother expired at
Paris in the summer of 1778, after a
fortnight’s illness. He then wrote to
his father that she was “very ill,” and
to a family friend at Salzburg, desiring
him to prepare his father and sister
for the truth. The whole correspondence
at this time is interesting. The
letter to the Abbé Bullinger is in these
words:—
“Sympathize with me on this the most
wretched and melancholy day of my
life. I write at two o’clock in the morning
to inform you that my mother—my
dearest mother—is no more! God has
called her to himself. I saw clearly
that nothing could save her, and resigned
myself entirely to the will of God;
he gave, and he can take away. Picture
to yourself the state of alarm, care,
and anxiety in which I have been kept
for the last fortnight. She died without
being conscious of any thing—her
life went out like a taper. Three days
ago she confessed, received the sacrament
and extreme unction; but since
that time she has been constantly delirious
and rambling, until this afternoon
at twenty-one minutes after five, when
she was seized with convulsions, and
immediately lost all perception and feeling.
I pressed her hand and spoke to
her; but she neither saw me, heard me,
nor seemed in the least sensible; and in
this state she lay for five hours, namely,
till twenty-one minutes past ten, when
she departed, no one being present but
myself, M. Haine, a good friend of ours
whom my father knows, and the nurse.
“I cannot at present write you the
whole particulars of the illness; but my
belief is, that she was to die—that it
was the will of God. Let me now beg
the friendly service of you, to prepare
my poor father by gentle degrees for
the melancholy tidings. I wrote to him
by the same post, but told him no more
than that she was very ill; and I now
await his answer, by which I shall be
guided. May God support and strengthen
him! Oh, my friend! through
the especial grace of God I have been
enabled to endure the whole with fortitude
and resignation, and have long
since been consoled under this great
loss. In her extremity I prayed for
two things: a blessed dying hour for my
mother, and courage and strength for
myself; and the gracious God heard my
prayer, and richly bestowed those blessings
upon me. Pray, therefore, dear
friend, support my father. Say what
you can to him, in order that when he
knows the worst, he may not feel it too
bitterly. I commend my sister also to
you from the bottom of my heart. Call
on both of them soon, but say no word
of the death—only prepare them. You
can do and say what you will; but let
me be so far at ease as to have no new
misfortune to expect. Comfort my
dear father and my dear sister, and pray
send me a speedy answer.”
The letter to his father is curiously
circumstantial; but if on such occasion
it is allowable to deceive at all,
it is allowable to make the deception
complete.
“The cause of my having left your
letter of the 11th of June so long unanswered
is, that I have very unpleasant
and melancholy intelligence to communicate.
My dear mother is very ill.
At the beginning of her illness she was,
as usual, bled, and this seemed to relieve
and do her good; but in a few
days she began to complain of sudden
chills and heats, which were accompanied
by headach and diarrhœig;a. We
began now to use the remedy that we
employ at home—the antispasmodic
powder. We wished that we had
brought the black, but had it not, and
could not get it here, where even its
name, pulvis epilepticus, is unknown.
But as she got worse continually, spoke
with difficulty, and so far lost her hearing,
that it was necessary to call out in
speaking to her, Baron Grimm sent us
his physician. She is still very weak,
and is also feverish and delirious.
They want to give me hope; but I have
not much. I have been long already—for
days and nights together—between
hope and fear; but I have now entirely
resigned myself to the will of God, and
I hope that you and my dear sister will
do the like. What are the means then
to give us calm and peace, in a degree,
if not absolutely? I am resigned, let
[Pg 580]the end be what it may, because I know
that God, who, however mysteriously
he may proceed to human eyes, ordains
every thing for the best, so wills it; and
I am not easily persuaded out of the
belief, that neither physician nor any
other man, neither misfortune nor accident,
can either take or give life, but
God alone, though these are the means
which he mostly employs; but even
these not always. We see people constantly
sinking and dying around us;
but I do not say, on that account, that
my mother must and will die, or that we
have lost all hope. She may recover, if
it be the will of God. I, however, find
consolation in these reflections, after
praying to God as earnestly as I am
able for my dear mother’s health and
life; they strengthen, encourage, and
console me, and you must needs think I
require them. Let us now change the
subject, and quit these melancholy
thoughts. Let us hope, if not much, and
put our trust in God, consoling ourselves
with the reflection, that every thing is
well ordered which the Almighty orders,
and that he best knows what is essential
to our temporal happiness and our
eternal salvation.”
The elder Mozart had, in the mean
time, without knowing of her illness,
begun a letter to his wife, designed to
reach her on her name-day; but,
before its conclusion, he had received
his son’s letter, and seen the Abbé,
and had thus learned not only her
danger but its result.
“M. Bullinger found us, as every one
else did, in deep affliction; I handed
him your letter without saying a word;
he dissembled very well; and having
read it, enquired what I thought about
it. I said, that I firmly believed my
dear wife was no more. He almost
feared the same thing, he told me—and
then, like a true friend, entered upon
consolatory topics, and said to me every
thing that I had before said to myself.
We finished our conversation, and our
friends gradually left us with much concern.
M. Bullinger, however, remained
behind, and when we were alone, asked
me whether I believed that there was
any ground for hope after such a description
of the illness as had been
given. I replied, that I not merely
believed her dead by this time—but
that she was already so on the very day
that the letter was written; that I had
resigned myself to the will of God, and
must remember that I have two children,
who I hoped would love me, as I
lived solely and entirely for them; indeed,
that I felt so certain, as to have
taken some pains to write to, and remind
you of the consequences, &c.
Upon this he said, ‘Yes, she is dead,’
and in that instant the scales fell from
my eyes; for the suddenness of the
accident had prevented my perceiving,
what I else should have suspected, as
soon as I had read your letter—namely,
how probable it was that you had privately
communicated the real truth to
M. Bullinger. In fact, your letter stupified
me—it at first was such a blow as
to render me incapable of reflection. I
have now no more to say. Do not be
anxious on my account, I shall bear my
sorrow like a man. Remember what a
tenderly loving mother you have had—now
you will be able to appreciate all
her care—as in your mature years,
after my death, you will mine, with a
constantly increasing affection. If you
love me, as I doubt not but you do,
take care of your health—on your life
hangs mine, and the future support of
your affectionate sister. How incomprehensibly
bitter a thing it is, when
death rends asunder a happy marriage—can
only be known by experience.”
In a few days, Mozart wrote to his
father again:—
“I hope that you are now prepared
to receive with firmness some intelligence
of a very melancholy and distressing
character; indeed, my last letter,
of the 3d, will not have encouraged
you to expect any thing very favourable.
On the evening of the same day
(the 3d,) at twenty-one minutes after
ten at night, my mother fell happily
asleep in God, and was already experiencing
the joys of heaven at the very
moment that I wrote to you. All was
over—I wrote to you in the night, and
I trust that you and my sister will pardon
this slight but very necessary artifice;—for
when, after all the distress
that I had suffered, I turned my thoughts
towards you, I could not possibly persuade
myself to surprise you all at once
with the dreadful and fatal news. Now,
however, I hope that you have both
prepared yourselves to hear the worst;
and after giving way to the reasonable
and natural impulses of your grief, to
submit yourselves at last to the will of
[Pg 581]God, and to adore his inscrutable, unfathomable,
and all-wise providence.
“I write this in the house of Madame
d’Epinay and M. Baron de Grimm, with
whom I am now staying, and where I
have a pretty little room with a pleasant
prospect, and am, as far as circumstances
will permit, happy. It would be a great
additional comfort were I to hear that
my dear father and sister had resigned
themselves with fortitude and submission
to the will of God; trusting him
entirely, in the full conviction that every
thing is ordered for our good. Dear
father—be comforted! Dearest sister—be
comforted!—you know not the kind
intentions of your brother towards you;
because hitherto they have not been in
his power to fulfil.
“I hope that you will both be careful
of your health. Remember that you
have still a son—a brother—who will
exert himself to the utmost for your
happiness, well knowing what sacrifices
you are both ready to make for him,
and that when the time shall come, neither
of you will oppose the fulfilment of
his honourable wishes. Oh! then we
will lead a life as peaceful and happy as
is attainable in this world; and at length,
in God’s time, meet all together again
in the enjoyment of that object for
which we were created.”
We have given these letters at some
length, as we think they show the
worth, affection, and right feeling of
the whole family.
The disconsolate state in which his
father was thus left, decided Mozart,
however reluctant, to return to the
hated service of the Archbishop at
Salzburg. The terms on which he
was received back were somewhat
improved, for his absence had rendered
his value more perceptible; and a
greater latitude was allowed him in
visiting, and composing for other
courts. In the winter of 1780-1, he
made use of his leave of absence by
writing and bringing out at Munich,
with triumphant success, the splendid
serious opera of Idomeneo, always so
great a favourite with himself, and
which is still regarded as a masterpiece.
“With this work, the most important
in its influence on music, Mozart crowned
his twenty-fifth year. The score is still
a picture to the musician. It exhibits
consummate knowledge of the theatre,
displayed in an opera of the first magnitude
and complexity; which unites to
a great orchestra the effects of a double
chorus on the stage and behind the
scenes; and introduces marches, processions,
and dances, to various accompaniments
in the orchestra, behind the
scenes, or under the stage. This model
opera, in which Mozart rises on the
wing from one beauty to another
through long acts, was completed, as
we have seen, within a few weeks, and
ever since has defied the scrutiny of
musicians to detect in it the slightest
negligence of style.”
In March 1781, Mozart followed the
Salzburg court to Vienna, where he was
subjected to such indignity by his
patron, as finally to terminate their
connexion. The author of Idomeneo
was required to take his meals at the
same table with his grace’s valets,
confectioner, and cooks. This was
too much, even for Mozart’s good-nature;
and, aggravated by the Archbishop’s
refusal to allow the display
of his talents to the public, gave him
courage to insist for his dismissal.
“The step, however, of resigning a
pension, and of throwing himself entirely
upon the public for fame and support,
was a more important one than his
sanguine imagination and excitement of
feeling permitted him at the time to
contemplate. How far his being an
unappointed composer may have hastened
the production of his immortal
works, is open to question; but that his
life was sacrificed in struggling against
the difficulties in which he was thereby
involved, is beyond a doubt.
“In the absence of any immediate
design of a new dramatic composition,
and delighted at the effect which his
public performance on the pianoforte
had created at Vienna, Mozart forgot
all the fears he had expressed previously
to his journey to Paris; thought no
more that teaching would interfere with
the higher vocation of his muse; and
was content to become the fashionable
performer, teacher, and pianoforte composer
of the day. This mode of life for
a time had its temptations and its success;
and he hoped that he might still
better assist his father at Vienna than
at Salzburg, as he was at intervals able
to remit to him sums of from ten to
thirty ducats. But here commenced the
precarious existence which the composer
[Pg 582]was for the future destined to lead.
For, not only was the taste of Vienna
then, as now, proverbially variable and
flippant—not only was concert-giving
an uncertain speculation, and teaching
an inconstant source of income—but in
a man, who, like Mozart, had, from time
to time, strong impulses to write for the
theatre, it frequently happened that the
order and regularity of his engagements
were made to yield to the object which
engrossed him; and that the profits of
his time were sacrificed on the one hand,
without any proportionate advantage on
the other.”
Let it be observed that Mozart’s
payment for teaching among the
Austrian nobility, was, at the rate of
five shillings a lesson!
Mozart was distinguished for virtues
which belong only to great or
good men when labouring in the field
of emulation—an absence of all envy
and jealousy, of which he was himself
too much the object, and a just and
generous estimate of excellence in
others. As observed by Mr Holmes,
good music, not his own, was his best
relaxation from his toils; and his predecessors
and contemporaries were
alike sure of that sincere admiration
which sprang from an unselfish love
of the art. His regard and respect for
Haydn, who was greatly his inferior
in genius and power, is a pleasing
illustration of what we have said.
“At this time, Joseph Haydn was
established as kapell-meister in the service
of Prince Nicholas Esterhazy, and
enjoyed a very extensive reputation,
which, indeed, the native energy of his
genius, and the fortunate circumstances
of his mature life, enabled him to earn
with ease in a variety of compositions.
He was frequently at Vienna, in the
suite of his prince; and it was natural
that Mozart, who had long lived on
terms of mutual esteem with Michael
Haydn, at Salzburg, should be predisposed
to a regard for his brother;—but
the simplicity, benevolence, and sincerity
of Joseph Haydn’s character, when
united with the charming qualities of
his genius, offered more than the materials
for an ordinary friendship. The
attachment of these two men remains
accordingly one of the most honourable
monuments of the virtuous love of art
that musical history can produce. Haydn
was at this period about fifty years of
age. His constant habit of writing five
hours a-day, had accumulated in a series
of years a large collection of quartets,
pianoforte music, church music, and
symphonies, most of which were greatly
admired for the spirit and elegance of
their style, and the clearness and originality
of their design. Mozart at once
saw and acknowledged the excellence of
Haydn; and in his future intercourse
with that master, took the part which
the difference of their age, if not of
their genius, rendered graceful—by deferring
to his judgment with all the
meekness of a learner. To Haydn he
submitted many of his compositions
before publication; delighting often to
call him his master and model in quartet
writing, which he now began to cultivate
in earnest; and omitting no circumstance
which could gratify the veteran
musician in possessing such an
admirer. Haydn on his part repaid all
this devotion with becoming generosity.
However conscious that, in the universality
of musical power, his own genius
must be placed at a disadvantage in
comparison with that of his friend, he
harboured no envious or unworthy sentiment;
and death alone interrupted the
kind relation in which each stood to the
other.
“At the musical parties which Mozart
gave from time to time, when he had new
compositions to try, and leisure to indulge
his disposition for sociality, Haydn
was a frequent guest, and no one more
profoundly enjoyed the extraordinary
beauty and perfection of Mozart’s pianoforte
playing. Years after, when those
fingers, and the soul which animated
them, were sought for in vain, a few
touching words from Haydn spoke
more feelingly to the imagination, in the
description of that beauty, than the
most laboured and minute criticism
could have done. ‘Mozart’s playing,’
said he, ‘I can never forget.'”
Haydn’s high estimate of his friend’s
superiority to himself, was always expressed
with equal generosity. In a
company of critics, who discovered
that there were faults in Mozart’s
operas, Haydn, when appealed to,
replied—”All I know is, that Mozart
is the greatest composer now existing.”
When applied to in 1787, to
write a comic opera, Haydn thought
a new subject, or libretto, would be
necessary, and adds—
“Even then it would be a bold attempt,
as scarcely any one can stand by
[Pg 583]the side of the great Mozart. For were
it possible that I could impress every
friend of music, particularly among the
great, with that deep musical intelligence
of the inimitable works of Mozart—that
emotion of the soul with which
they affect me, and in which I both
comprehend and feel them, the nations
would contend together for the possession
of such a gem. Prague ought to
retain him, and reward him well too;
else the history of great genius is melancholy,
and offers posterity but slight
encouragement to exertion, which is the
reason, alas! that many hopeful and
aspiring spirits are repressed. I feel
indignant that this unique Mozart is not
yet engaged at some royal or imperial
court. Forgive me if I stray from the
subject—but I love the man too much.”
Again, when engaged, along with
Mozart, for Salomon’s concerts in
England—a plan which, so far as
Mozart was concerned, was unhappily
not carried out—Haydn’s only stipulation
was, that his compositions
should precede those of his friend;
and avowed, with unparalleled frankness,
his feeling that he would otherwise
have less chance of being heard
with success.
The celebrity of Mozart, and the
applause which attended some of his
new compositions, procured him the
notice, and ultimately the patronage,
of the Emperor Joseph—though somewhat
unsteadily conferred, and divided
with unworthy Italian rivals. The
change, however, was tardy, and, when
it came, did not much improve his external
circumstances. The appointments
he held made but a miserable
sinecure, with a still more miserable
salary; but the deficiency was supplied
by soft words and familiar looks,
which, with Mozart’s kindly disposition,
served to attach him to his imperial
master, better than would have
been done by a larger allowance ungraciously
given.
In the mean time, relying upon his
position as a composer, and hoping
for the best, Mozart had formed the
connexion, as to which Mr Hogarth
justly says, “that his fixing his affections
on the admirable woman whom
he married, was the wisest act, as it
was the happiest event, of his life.
Constance Weber was his guide—his
monitress—his guardian angel. She
regulated his domestic establishment—managed
his affairs—was the cheerful
companion of his happier hours—and
his never-failing consolation in
sickness and despondency. He passionately
loved her, and evinced his
feelings by the most tender and delicate
attentions.”
It is remarkable that Mozart’s attachment
had at first been directed to
his wife’s elder sister, and seemed to
be returned on her part. But after
his absence in Paris, he was coldly received
when they again met, and, fortunately
for himself, he transferred
his affections to Constance, who became
his wife.
Rich as this union was in affection,
and in all the happiness that affection
can bestow, it was soon checkered by
distress and difficulty. The health of
the wife became precarious; and Mozart’s
ignorance of the world, as well
as his generous and joyous disposition,
joined to the precarious and
varying amount of his earnings, and
the disappointment in his prospects
of imperial favour, involved him in
debt, which, by overtaxing his mind
and body, led to the errors and excesses,
such as they were, of his latter
life, and ultimately undermined his
constitution, and brought him to an
untimely tomb.
The “res angusta domi” stimulated
the composer’s pen, and the
rapidity of his productions at this
time is marvellous. The taste of
Vienna, however, was capricious;
and cabals among singers and critics
succeeded in deadening the effect of
his Figaro, when first brought out,
and in thoroughly disgusting Mozart
with the Viennese opera. How different
the reception which it met from
the true hearts and well-attuned ears
of the Bohemian audiences! It was in
February 1787, after parting with the
Storaces, on their leaving for England,
with a hope that the mighty
master would soon be allured to follow
them, that his Bohemian visit
was paid.
“In the very same week that he parted
from his English friends, Mozart himself
set out upon a journey to Prague, whither
he had been very cordially invited
by a distinguished nobleman and connoisseur,
Count John Joseph Thun, who
maintained in his service an excellent
private band. This was the first professional
expedition of any consequence
[Pg 584]in which he had engaged since his settlement
in Vienna; it was prosecuted
under the most favourable auspices, and
with glowing anticipations of that pleasure
for which he so ardently longed,
but so imperfectly realized at home—the
entire sympathy of the public. Nor
was he disappointed. On the same
evening that he alighted at the castle
of his noble entertainer, his opera of
‘Figaro’ was given at the theatre, and
Mozart found himself for the first time
in the midst of that Bohemian audience
of whose enthusiasm and taste he had
heard so much. The news of his presence
in the theatre quickly ran through
the parterre, and the overture was no
sooner ended than the whole audience
rose and gave him a general acclamation
of welcome, amidst deafening salvos
of applause.
“The success of ‘Le Nozze di Figaro,’
so unsatisfactory at Vienna, was unexampled
at Prague, where it amounted
to absolute intoxication and frenzy.
Having run through the whole previous
winter without interruption, and rescued
the treasury of the theatre from ruinous
embarrassments, the opera was arranged
in every possible form; for the pianoforte,
for wind-instruments (garden
music,) as violin quintets for the chamber,
and German dances; in short, the
melodies of ‘Figaro’ re-echoed in
every street and every garden; nay,
even the blind harper himself, at the
door of the beer-house, was obliged to
strike up Non più andrai if he wished
to gain an audience, or earn a kreutzer.
Such was the effect of the popular parts
of the opera on the public at large; its
more refined beauties exercised an equal
influence on musicians. The director of
the orchestra, Strobach, under whose
superintendence ‘Figaro’ was executed
at Prague, often declared the excitement
and emotion of the band in accompanying
this work to have been
such, that there was not a man among
them, himself included, who, when the
performance was finished, would not
have cheerfully recommenced and played
the whole through again.
“Finding himself, at length, in a region
of sympathy so genial and delightful, a
new era in the existence of the composer
seemed to open, and he abandoned
himself without reserve to its pleasures.
In retracing a life so ill rewarded by
contemporaries, and so checkered by
calamity, it is pleasant to dally awhile
in the primrose path, and enjoy the
opening prospects of good fortune.
“In a few days he was called upon to
give a grand concert at the opera-house.
This was in reality his first public appearance,
and many circumstances conspire
to render it memorable; but
chiefly that every piece throughout the
performance was of his own composition.
The concert ended by an improvisation
on the pianoforte. Having preluded
and played a fantasia, which lasted
a good half-hour, Mozart rose; but the
stormy and outrageous applause of his
Bohemian audience was not to be appeased,
and he again sat down. His
second fantasia, which was of an entirely
different character, met with the same
success; the applause was without end,
and long after he had retired to the
withdrawing-room, he heard the people
in the theatre thundering for his re-appearance.
Inwardly delighted, he presented
himself for the third time. Just
as he was about to begin, when every
noise was hushed, and the stillness of
death reigned throughout the theatre, a
voice in the pit cried ‘from Figaro.’
He took the hint, and ended this triumphant
display of skill by extemporising
a dozen of the most interesting and scientific
variations upon the air Non più
andrai. It is needless to mention the
uproar that followed. The concert was
altogether found so delightful, that a second,
upon the same plan, soon followed.
A sonnet was written in his honour, and
his performances brought him one thousand
florins. Wherever he appeared
in public, it was to meet testimonies of
esteem and affection. His emotion at
the reception of ‘Figaro’ in Prague
was so great, that he could not help saying
to the manager, Bondini, ‘As the
Bohemians understand me so well, I
must write an opera on purpose for
them.’ Bondini took him at his word,
and entered with him, on the spot, into
a contract to furnish his theatre with an
opera for the ensuing winter. Thus
was laid the foundation of ‘Il Don Giovanni.'”
The greatest of Mozart’s operas was
composed at Prague, on a second
visit thither in 1787, when he lived
with a musical friend in the suburbs
of the city. “Here, on an elevated
site which commanded a view of the
antique magnificence of Prague, its
faded castles, ruined cloisters, and
other majestic remains of feudal times,
under the mild rays of an autumnal
sun, and in the open air, Don Giovanni
was written.” It was immediately[Pg 585]
brought out at Prague with
the success it deserves, and was afterwards
performed at Vienna, but was
badly got up, and but indifferently
received. “Don Giovanni,” said its
author, “was rather written for
Prague than Vienna, but chiefly for
myself and my friends.” It is a disgraceful
fact, that it was eclipsed in
popularity among the Viennese by
the “Tarrare” of Salieri, of which no
one now knows any thing.
In 1787 Mozart’s father died at
Salzburg, less happy, it is to be feared,
than his own worth and his son’s
genius should have made him. But
he was ignorant of the great truth,
that fame, and often merely posthumous
fame, is the chief external blessing
that awaits men of extraordinary
mental powers in the arts, and that
the appropriate reward of genius, any
more than of virtue, is not always—”bread.”
On hearing of his father’s
illness, Mozart had written him in affectionate
terms—
“I have just received some news
which has given me a sad blow; the
more so, as your last letter left me
reason to suppose that you were in perfect
health. I now, however, learn that
you are really very ill. How anxiously
I await and hope for some comforting
intelligence from you I need hardly say,
although I have long since accustomed
myself in all things to expect the worst.
As death, rightly considered, fulfils the
real design of our life, I have for the
last two years made myself so well acquainted
with this true friend of mankind,
that his image has no longer any
terrors for me, but much that is peaceful
and consoling; and I thank God
that he has given me the opportunity
to know him as the key to our true
felicity. I never lie down in bed without
reflecting that, perhaps (young as I
am), I may never see another day; yet
no one who knows me will say that I
am gloomy or morose in society. For
this blessing I daily thank my Creator,
and from my heart wish it participated
by my fellow-men.”
In the autumn of the same year, he
lost a valued and valuable friend in
Dr Barisani of Vienna, whose medical
attentions had already been eminently
useful to him, and might, if they had
been continued, have saved him from
those irregularities of alternate labour
and indulgence which so soon afterwards
began to affect his health.
Mozart made, on this occasion, an
affecting entry in his memorandum-book,
under some lines which his
friend had written for him.
“To-day, the 2d of September, I
have had the misfortune to lose, through
an unexpected death, this honourable
man, by best and dearest friend, and the
preserver of my life. He is happy!—but
I—we, and all who thoroughly
knew him, cannot again be so—till we
have the felicity to meet him in a better
world, never again to separate.”
In 1789, Mozart visited Prussia,
where he was well received by every
one, and seems to have been happy.
We may here insert part of a well-known
letter, written about this time,
to an amateur baron, which gives a
curious picture of Mozart’s character
and habits, as well as of the mixed
tone of good humour and good sense
with which he seems to have both
written and conversed. The baron
had sent him some tolerable music,
and some better wine.
“To the Baron V——.
“Herewith I return you, my good
baron, your scores; and if you perceive
that in my hand there are more nota
benes than notes, you will find from the
sequel of this letter how that has happened.
Your symphony has pleased
me, on account of its ideas, more than
the other pieces, and yet I think that
it will produce the least effect. It is
too much crowded, and to hear it partially
or piecemeal (stückweise) would
be, by your permission, like beholding
an ant-hill (Ameisen haufen). I mean
to say, that it is as if Eppes, the devil,
were in it.
“You must not snap your fingers at
me, my dearest friend, for I would not
for all the world have spoken out so
candidly if I could have supposed that
it would give you offence. Nor need
you wonder at this; for it is so with all
composers who, without having from
their infancy, as it were, been trained
by the whip and the curses (Donnerwetter)
of the maestro, pretend to do every
thing with natural talent alone. Some
compose fairly enough, but with other
people’s ideas, not possessing any themselves;
others, who have ideas of their
own, do not understand how to treat
and master them. This last is your case.
[Pg 586]Only do not be angry, pray! for St
Cecilia’s sake, not angry that I break out
so abruptly. But your song has a beautiful
cantabile, and your dear Fraenzl
ought to sing it very often to you, which
I should like as much to see as to hear.
The minuet in the quartet is also pleasing
enough, particularly from the place I
have marked. The coda, however, may
well clatter or tinkle, but it will never
produce music; sapienti sat, and also to
the nihil sapienti, by whom I mean myself.
I am not very expert in writing
on such subjects; I rather show at
once how it ought to be done.
“You cannot imagine with what joy
I read your letter; only you ought not
to have praised me so much. We may
get accustomed to the hearing of such
things, but to read them is not quite so
well. You good people make too much
of me; I do not deserve it, nor my compositions
either. And what shall I say
to your present, my dearest baron, that
came like a star in a dark night, or like
a flower in winter, or like a cordial in
sickness? God knows how I am obliged,
at times, to toil and labour to gain a
wretched livelihood, and Stänerl, (Constance,)
too, must get something.
“To him who has told you that I am
growing idle, I request you sincerely
(and a baron may well do such a thing)
to give him a good box on the ear.
How gladly would I work and work, if
it were only left me to write always
such music as I please, and as I can
write; such, I mean to say, as I myself
set some value upon. Thus I composed
three weeks ago an orchestral symphony,
and by to-morrow’s post I write again
to Hoffmeister (the music-seller) to
offer him three pianoforte quatuors,
supposing that he is able to pay. Oh
heavens! were I a wealthy man, I would
say, ‘Mozart, compose what you please,
and as well as you can; but till you
offer me something finished, you shall
not get a single kreutzer. I’ll buy of
you every MS., and you shall not be
obliged to go about and offer it for sale
like a hawker.’ Good God! how sad all
this makes me, and then again how angry
and savage, and it is in such a state of
mind that I do things which ought not
to be done. You see, my dear good
friend, so it is, and not as stupid or vile
wretches (lumpen) may have told you.
Let this, however, go a cassa del
diavolo.
“I now come to the most difficult
part of your letter, which I would willingly
pass over in silence, for here my
pen denies me its service. Still I will
try, even at the risk of being well
laughed at. You say, you should like
to know my way of composing, and
what method I follow in writing works
of some extent. I can really say no
more on this subject than the following;
for I myself know no more about
it, and cannot account for it. When I
am, as it were, completely myself, entirely
alone, and of good cheer—say,
travelling in a carriage, or walking
after a good meal, or during the night
when I cannot sleep; it is on such occasions
that my ideas flow best and most
abundantly. Whence and how they
come, I know not; nor can I force
them. Those ideas that please me I
retain in memory, and am accustomed,
as I have been told, to hum them to
myself. If I continue in this way, it
soon occurs to me how I may turn this
or that morsel to account, so as to make
a good dish of it; that is to say, agreeably
to the rules of counterpoint, to the
peculiarities of the various instruments,
&c.
“All this fires my soul, and, provided
I am not disturbed, my subject
enlarges itself, becomes methodized
and defined, and the whole, though it
be long, stands almost complete and
finished in my mind, so that I can survey
it, like a fine picture or a beautiful
statue, at a glance. Nor do I hear in
my imagination the parts successively,
but I hear them, as it were, all at once
(gleich alles zusammen.) What a delight
this is I cannot tell! All this inventing,
this producing, takes place in a pleasing
lively dream. Still the actual hearing
of the tout ensemble is after all the best.
What has been thus produced I do not
easily forget, and this is perhaps the
best gift I have my Divine Maker to
thank for.
“When I proceed to write down my
ideas, I take out of the bag of my memory,
if I may use that phrase, what
has previously been collected into it in
the way I have mentioned. For this
reason the committing to paper is done
quickly enough, for every thing is, as I
said before, already finished; and it
rarely differs on paper from what it was
in my imagination. At this occupation,
I can therefore suffer myself to be disturbed;
for whatever may be going on
around me, I write, and even talk, but
only of fowls and geese, or of Gretel or
Bärbel, or some such matters. But
[Pg 587]why my productions take from my hand
that particular form and style that makes
them Mozartish, and different from the
works of other composers, is probably
owing to the same cause which renders
my nose so or so large, so aquiline, or,
in short, makes it Mozart’s, and different
from those of other people. For I
really do not study or aim at any originality;
I should, in fact, not be able to
describe in what mine consists, though
I think it quite natural that persons who
have really an individual appearance of
their own, are also differently organized
from others, both externally and internally.
At least I know that I have constituted
myself neither one way nor the
other.
“Here, my best friend and well-wisher,
the pages are full, and the bottle
of your wine, which has done the duty
of this day, is nearly empty. But since
the letter which I wrote to my father-in-law,
to request the hand of my wife,
I hardly ever have written such an
enormously long one. Pray take nothing
ill. In speaking, as in writing, I
must show myself as I am, or I must
hold my tongue, and throw my pen
aside. My last word shall be—my dearest
friend, keep me in kind remembrance.
Would to God I could one day be the
cause of so much joy to you as you have
been to me. Well! I drink to you in
this glass: long live my good and faithful ——.”
“W. A. Mozart”.
Before he left Prussia, the King
offered him an appointment and a
liberal pension. “Can I leave my
good Emperor?” said Mozart with
emotion. The proposal, however,
made its impression, and shortly
afterwards probably encouraged him, at
Vienna, on occasion of fresh intrigues
against him, to tender his resignation
of his paltry situation there. But a
kind-like appeal from his imperial
patron drove him at once from his
intention, and fixed him where he
was. It was afterwards hinted to
him that he might, at least, have
taken this opportunity to stipulate for
a better provision for himself. “Satan
himself,” he replied, “would
hardly have thought of bargaining at
such a moment.”
The year 1789-90 seems to have
been about the most disastrous in the
situation of his affairs, and led to the
most unhappy results.
“The music-shops, as a source of income,
were almost closed to him, as he
could not submit his genius to the dictates
of fashion. Hoffmeister, the publisher,
having once advised him to write
in a more popular style, or he could not
continue to purchase his compositions,
he answered with unusual bitterness,
‘Then I can make no more by my pen,
and I had better starve, and go to destruction
at once.’ The fits of dejection
which he experienced were partly the
effect of bodily ailments, but more of a
weariness with the perplexity of affairs,
and of a prospect which afforded him
but one object on which he could gaze
with certainty of relief, and that was—death.
Constant disappointment introduced
him to indulgences which he
had not before permitted himself.
“He became wild in the pursuit of
pleasure; whatever changed the scene
was delightful to him, and the more extravagant
the better. His associates,
and the frequent guests at his table,
were recommended by their animal
spirits and capacity as boon companions.
They were stage-players and orchestral
musicians, low and unprincipled persons,
whose acquaintance injured him still
more in reputation than in purse.
Two of these men, Schickaneder,
the director of a theatre (for whom
Mozart wrote the ‘Zauberflöte,’) and
Stadler, a clarionet-player, are known
to have behaved with gross dishonesty
towards the composer; and yet he forgave
them, and continued their benefactor.
The society of Schickaneder, a
man of grotesque humour, often in difficulties,
but of inexhaustible cheerfulness
and good-fellowship, had attractions for
Mozart, and led him into some excesses
that contributed to the disorder of his
health, as he was obliged to retrieve at
night the hours lost in the day. A long-continued
irregularity of income, also,
disposed him to make the most of any
favourable moment; and when a few
rouleaus of gold brought the means of
enjoyment, the Champagne and Tokay
began to flow. This course is unhappily
no novelty in the shifting life of genius,
overworked and ill-rewarded, and seeking
to throw off its cares in the pursuits
and excitements of vulgar existence. It
is necessary to know the composer as a
man of pleasure, in order to understand
certain allusions in the correspondence
of his last years, when his affairs were
in the most embarrassed condition, and
his absence from Vienna frequently
[Pg 588]caused by the pressure of creditors.
He appears at this time to have experienced
moments of poignant self-reproach.
His love of dancing, masquerades,
masked balls, &c., was so great,
that he did not willingly forego an opportunity
of joining any one of those
assemblies, whether public or private.
He dressed handsomely, and wished to
make a favourable impression in society
independently of his music. He was sensitive
with regard to his figure, and was
annoyed when he heard that the Prussian
ambassador had said to some one, ‘You
must not estimate the genius of Mozart
by the insignificance of his exterior.’
The extremity of his animal spirits may
occasion surprise. He composed pantomimes
and ballets, and danced in them
himself, and at the carnival balls sometimes
assumed a character. He was
actually incomparable in Arlequin and
Pierrot. The public masquerades at
Vienna, during the carnival, were supported
with all the vivacity of Italy;
the emperor occasionally mingled in
them, and his example was generally
followed. We are not, therefore, to
measure these enjoyments by our colder
northern notions.”
It should be added, what Mr
Holmes tells us on good authority,
that the vice of ebriety was not
among Mozart’s failings. “He drank
to the point of exhilaration, but not
beyond.” His fondness for ballet-dancing
may seem strange to us, who
have almost a Roman repugnance to
such exhibitions in men of good station.
But it is possible that in some
minds the love of graceful motion may
be a refined passion and an exalted
art; and it is singular that Mozart’s
wife told of him, that, in his own estimation,
his taste lay in dancing
rather than in music.
“That these scenes of extravagant
delight seduced him into occasional indulgences,
which cannot be reconciled
with the purity of his earlier life, it
would be the worst affectation in his
biographer to deny. Nor is it necessary
to the vindication of Mozart that such
temporary errors should be suppressed
by a feeling of mistaken delicacy. Living
such a round of excitements, and
tortured by perpetual misfortunes,
there is nothing very surprising in the
fact, that he should sometimes have been
drawn into the dangerous vortex; but
he redeemed the true nobility of his
nature by preserving, in the midst of
his hasty inconstancies, the most earnest
and unfailing attachment to his
home. It is a curious illustration of his
real character, that he always confessed
his transgressions to his wife, who had
the wise generosity to pardon them,
from that confidence in his truth which
survived alike the troubles and temptations
of their checkered lives.”
Let none lightly dare either to condemn
or to imitate the irregularities
of life of such wondrous men as Mozart
and our own Burns. Those who
may be gifted with equally strong and
exquisite sensibilities as they, as fine
and flexible affections, as bright an
imagination, beautifying every object
on which its rainbow colours rest, and
who have been equally tried by affliction
and misconstruction, and equally
tempted by brilliant opportunities of
pleasure in the intervals of penury
and pain—these, if they stand fast,
may be allowed to speak, and they
will seldom speak uncharitably, of
their brethren who have fallen; or, if
they fall, they may be heard to plead
a somewhat similar excuse. But let
ordinary men, and men less extraordinary
than those we speak of, beware
how they either refer to them as
a reproach, or follow them as an
example.
The excesses of men of genius are
always exaggerated by their enemies,
and often overrated even by their
friends and companions. With characteristic
fervour they enter enthusiastically
into every thing in which
they engage; and, when they indulge
in dissipation, delight to sport on the
brink of all its terrors, and to outvie
in levity and extravagance the most
practised professors of their new art.
Few that see or hear them think, that
even in the midst of their revels their
hearts are often far away, or are extracting
good from the evil spread
before them; and that all the waste
of time and talent, so openly and
ostentatiously exhibited, is compensated
in secret by longer and intenser
application to the true object of their
pursuit, and by acts of atonement
and self-denial, of which the conscious
stars of heaven are the only created
witnesses. The worst operation of
dissolute indulgences on genius is not,
perhaps, in producing depravity of[Pg 589]
heart or habits, for its pure plumes
have a virtue about them that is a
preservative against pollution; but in
wearing out the frame, ruffling the
temper, and depressing the spirits,
and thus embittering as well as shortening
a career that, even when most
peaceful and placid, is often destined
to be short and sad enough.
The good-natured sympathy which
Mozart always felt in the welfare of
the very humblest of his brethren of
the lyre, is highly creditable to him.
But the extent to which he sacrificed
his own interests to serve them, was
often any thing but prudent. He was
devoid of every sordid and avaricious
feeling, and indeed carried his generosity
to an excess.
“The extreme kindness of his nature
was grossly abused by artful performers,
music-sellers, and managers of theatres.
Whenever any poor artists,
strangers in Vienna, applied to him for
assistance, he offered them the use of
his house and table, introduced them to
the persons whom he thought could be
of use to them, and frequently composed
for their use concertos, of which
he did not even keep a copy, in order
that they might have the exclusive advantage
of playing them. But, not
content with this, they sold these pieces
to music-publishers; and thus repaid
his kindness by robbing him. He seldom
received any recompense for his
pianoforte compositions, but generally
wrote them for his friends, who were,
of course, anxious to possess some work
of his for their own use, and suited to
their powers of playing. Artaria, a
music-seller of Vienna, and other members
of the trade, contrived to get possession
of many of these pieces, and published
them without obtaining the author’s
consent, or making him any remuneration
for them. A Polish count, who
was invited to a concert at Mozart’s
house, heard a quintet performed for the
first time, with which he was so greatly
delighted that he asked Mozart to compose
for him a trio for the flute. Mozart
agreed, on condition that he should do
it at his own time. The count next day
sent a polite note, expressive of his
thanks for the pleasure he had enjoyed,
and, along with it, one hundred gold
demi-sovereigns (about £100 sterling.)
Mozart immediately sent him the original
score of the quintet that had
pleased him so much. The count returned
to Vienna a year afterwards, and,
calling upon Mozart, enquired for the
trio. Mozart said that he had never
found himself in a disposition to write
any thing worthy of his acceptance.
“Perhaps, then,” said the count, “you
may find yourself in a disposition to return
me the hundred demi-sovereigns
I paid you beforehand.” Mozart instantly
handed him the money, but the
count said not a word about the quintet;
and the composer soon afterwards had
the satisfaction of seeing it published by
Artaria, arranged as a quartet, for the
pianoforte, violin, tenor, and violoncello.
Mozart’s quintets for wind instruments,
published also as pianoforte quartets,
are among the most charming and popular
of his instrumental compositions for
the chamber; and this anecdote is a
specimen of the manner in which he lost
the benefit he ought to have derived,
even from his finest works. The opera
of the ‘Zauberflöte’ was composed for
the purpose of relieving the distresses of
a manager, who had been ruined by unsuccessful
speculations, and came to implore
his assistance. Mozart gave him
the score without price, with full permission
to perform it in his own theatre,
and for his own benefit; only stipulating
that he was not to give a copy to any
one, in order that the author might
afterwards be enabled to dispose of the
copyright. The manager promised
strict compliance with the condition.
The opera was brought out, filled his
theatre and his pockets, and, some short
time afterwards, appeared at five or six
different theatres, by means of copies
received from the grateful manager.”
Mozart’s career, when hastening to
its close, was illumined by gleams of
prosperity that came but too late.
On returning from Prague, in Nov.
1791, from bringing out the Clemenza
di Tito, at the coronation of Leopold,
the new Emperor—
“He found awaiting him the appointment
of kapell-meister to the cathedral
church of St Stephen, with all its emoluments,
besides extensive commissions
from Holland and Hungary for works
to be periodically delivered. This,
with his engagements for the theatres
of Prague and Vienna, assured him of
a competent income for the future,
exempt from all necessity for degrading
employment. But prospects of
worldly happiness were now phantoms
that only came to mock his helplessness,
and embitter his parting hour.”
[Pg 590]“Now must I go,” he would exclaim,
“just as I should be able to live in
peace; now leave my art when, no
longer the slave of fashion, nor the
tool of speculators, I could follow the
dictates of my own feeling, and write
whatever my heart prompts. I must
leave my family—my poor children, at
the very instant in which I should have
been able to provide for their welfare.”
The story of his composing the
requiem for a mysterious stranger, and
his melancholy forebodings during its
composition, are too well known to
require repetition here. The incident,
to all appearance, was not extraordinary
in itself, and owed its imposing
character chiefly to the morbid state
of Mozart’s mind at the time.
On the 5th of December 1791, the
ill-defined disease under which he had
for some time laboured, ended in his
dissolution; and subsequent examination
showed that inflammation of the
brain had taken place. He felt that
he was dying—”The taste of death,”
he said to his sister-in-law, “is already
on my tongue—I taste death;
and who will be near to support my
Constance if you go away?”
“Süssmayer (an assistant) was standing
by the bedside, and on the counterpane
lay the ‘Requiem,’ concerning
which Mozart was still speaking and
giving directions. As he looked over
its pages for the last time, he said,
with tears in his eyes, ‘Did I not tell
you that I was writing this for myself?'”
It should be added that this “Süssmayer,
who had obtained possession of
one transcript of the ‘Requiem,’ the
other having been delivered to the
stranger immediately after Mozart’s decease,
published the score some years
afterwards, claiming to have composed
from the Sanctus to the end. As there was
no one to contradict this extraordinary
story, it found partial credit until 1839,
when a full score of the ‘Requiem’ in
Mozart’s handwriting was discovered.”
We have now done. The life and
character that we have been considering,
speak for themselves. Mozart
is not perhaps the greatest
composer that ever lived, but Handel
only is greater than he; and to be
second to Handel, seems now to
us the highest conceivable praise.
Yet, in some departments, Mozart
was even greater than his predecessor.
It is not our intention to
characterise his excellences as a composer.
The millions of mankind that
he has delighted in one form or other,
according to their opportunities and
capacities, have spoken his best panegyric
in the involuntary accents of
open and enthusiastic admiration;
and his name will for ever be sweet
in the ear of every one who has
music in his soul.
Two remarks only we will make upon
Mozart’s taste and system as a master.
The first is, that he invariably considered
and proclaimed, that the great object
of music was, not to astonish by its
difficulty, but to delight by its beauty.
Some of his own compositions are
difficult as well as beautiful, and in
some the beauty may be too transcendental
for senses less exalted than his
own. But the production of pleasure,
in all its varied forms and degrees,
was his uniform aim and effort; and
no master has been more successful.
Our next remark is, that, with all his
genius, he was a laborious and learned
musician; and the monument to his
own fame which he has completed in
his works, was built upon the most anxious,
heartfelt, and humble study of
all the works of excellence that then
existed, and without knowing and
understanding which, he truly felt
that he could never have equalled or
surpassed them.[Pg 591]
FOOTNOTE:
[6] The Life of Mozart, including his Correspondence. By Edward Holmes
Author of “A Ramble among the Musicians of Germany.” London: Chapman and
Hall. 1845
Sir,—The accompanying narrative was originally sent from the Sandwich
Islands in the shape of a letter. Since my return to England, it has been
suggested to me that it would suit your pages. If you think so, I shall be
happy to place it at your disposal. The ground-plan annexed is intended
merely to assist the description: it has no pretensions to strict accuracy, the
distances have been estimated, not measured.—I remain, Sir, your obedient
servant,
An Officer of the Royal Navy.
ACCOUNT OF A VISIT TO THE VOLCANO OF KIRAUEA, IN OWHYHEE,
SANDWICH ISLANDS, IN SEPTEMBER 1844.
The ship being about to proceed to
Byron’s Bay, (the Hilo of the natives,)
on the N.E. side of Owhyhee, to
water, the captain arranged, that to
give all opportunity to all those who
wished to visit the volcano, distant
from the anchorage forty miles, the excursion
should be made in two parties.
Having anchored on Wednesday the
11th of September, he and several of
the officers left Hilo early on the 12th;
they travelled on horseback, and returned
on the ensuing Monday, highly
delighted with their trip, but giving a
melancholy description of the road,
which they pronounced to be in some
places impassable to people on foot.
This latter intelligence was disheartening
to the second division, some of
whom, and myself of the number, had
intended to walk. These, notwithstanding,
adhered to their resolution;
and the second party, consisting of
eight, left the ship at 6 a.m. on Tuesday.
Some on horseback, and some
on foot, we got away from the village
about eight o’clock, attended by thirteen
natives, to whose calabashes our
prog and clothing had been transferred;
these calabashes answer this purpose
admirably; they are gourds of
enormous size, cut through rather
above their largest diameter, which is
from eighteen inches to two feet; the
half of another gourd forms the lid,
and keeps all clean and dry within;
when filled, they are hung by net-work
to each end of a pole thrown
across the shoulders of a native, who
will thus travel with a load of fifty or
sixty pounds about three miles an
hour. The day was fine and bright,
and we started in high spirits, the
horsemen hardly able to conceal their
exultation in their superiority over
the walkers, whilst they cantered over
the plain from which our ascent commenced;
this, 4000 feet almost gradual
in forty miles, is not fatiguing;
and thus, although we found the path
through a wood about three miles
long, very deep, and the air oppressive,
we all arrived together without
distress at the “half-way house,” by
1 p.m. Suppose a haystack hollowed
out, and some holes cut for doors
and windows, and you have a picture
of the “half-way house,” and the ordinary
dwellings of the natives of these
islands; it is kept by a respectable
person, chiefly for the accommodation
of travellers, and in it we found
the comfort of a table, a piece of furniture
by these people usually considered
superfluous. Here we soon
made ourselves snug, commencing by
throwing ourselves on the mats, and
allowing a dozen vigorous urchins to
“rumi rumi” us. In this process of
shampooing, every muscle is kneaded
or beaten; the refreshing luxury it
affords can only be perfectly appreciated
by those who have, like us,
walked twenty miles on a bad road, in
a tropical climate. Here we were to
stay the night, and our first object
was to prepare dinner and then to eat
it; all seemed disposed to assist in
the last part of this operation, and
where every one was anxious to
please, and determined to be pleased,
sociability could not be absent. After
this we whiled away our time with
books and conversation, till one by
one dropping asleep, all became quiet,
except a wretched child belonging to
our hostess, who, from one corner of
the hut, every now and then set up its
shrill pipe to disturb our slumbers.[Pg 592]
Map of the Crater.

| A A | The outer rim. |
| B B | The inner rim. |
| C | The active crater. |
| D D D D D | The surface of the larger crater. |
| E E E E | The dike. |
| F | The house. |
| G | The hut. |
| H H | Track to and from crater. |
| I I | Track of party on Wednesday night. |
| o o o o o o | Cones in large crater. |
We were on the march the next morning
at six, the walkers more confident
than the horsemen, some of whose
beasts did not seem at all disposed for
another day’s work. Our road lay for
the most part through immense seas of
lava, in the crevices of which a variety
of ferns had taken root, and, though relieving
the otherwise triste appearance,
in many places shut out our view of
any thing besides. Two of the walkers,
and some of the horsemen, came
in at the journey’s end, shortly after
eleven o’clock; the remainder, some
leaving their horses behind them,
straggled in by two p.m. Here we
were at the crater! Shall I confess
that my first feeling was disappointment?
The plan shows some distance
between the outer and inner rims,
immediately below the place where the
house (F) is situated; this is filled up
by another level, which shuts out a [Pg 593]
great part of the prospect; the remainder
was too distant, and the
sun’s rays too powerful, to allow of our
seeing more than a quantity of smoke,
and an occasional fiery ebullition from
the further extremity. It was not
until we had walked to the hut (G)
that we became sensible of the awful
grandeur of the scene below; from
this point we looked perpendicularly
down on the blackened mass, and felt
our insignificance. The path leads between
many fissures in the ground,
from which sulphurous vapour and
steam issue; the latter, condensing on
the surrounding bushes, and falling
into holes in the compact lava, affords
a supply of most excellent water.
As evening set in, the active volcano
assumed from the house the appearance
of a city in flames; long intersecting
lines of fire looked like streets
in a blaze; and when here and there
a more conspicuous burst took place,
fancy pictured a church or some large
building a prey to the element. Not
contented with this distant view, three
of our party started for the hut, whence
in the afternoon we had so fine a
prospect. When there, although our
curiosity was highly gratified, it
prompted us to see more; so, pressing
a native into our service, we proceeded
along the brink of the N.W. side,
until, being nearly half-way round the
outer circle of the crater, we had
hoped to obtain almost a bird’s-eye
view of the active volcano; we were
therefore extremely chagrined to find,
that as we drew nearer our object, it
was completely shut out by a ridge
below the one on which we stood.
Our walking had thus far been very
difficult, if not dangerous, and this,
with the fatigues of the morning, had
nearly exhausted our perseverance.
We determined, however, to make
another effort before giving it up, and
were repaid by the discovery of a
spur which led us down, and thence
through a short valley to the point
where our track (I) terminates.
We came in sight of the crater
as we crested the hill; the view
from hence was most brilliant. The
crater appeared nearly circular, and
was traversed in all directions by
what seemed canals of fire intensely
bright; several of these radiated from
a centre near the N.E. edge, so as to
form a star, from which a coruscation,
as if of jets of burning gas, was
emitted. In other parts were furnaces
in terrible activity, and undergoing
continual change, sometimes becoming
comparatively dark, and then bursting
forth, throwing up torrents of
flame and molten lava. All around
the edge it seemed exceedingly agitated,
and noise like surf was audible;
otherwise the stillness served to
heighten the effect upon the senses,
which it would be difficult to describe.
The waning moon warned us to return,
and reluctantly we retraced our
steps; it required care to do this, so
that we did not get back to the house
before midnight. Worn out with the
day’s exertions, we threw ourselves
on the ground and fell asleep, but not
before I had revolved the possibility
of standing at the brink of the active
crater after nightfall. In the morning
we matured the plan, which was
to descend by daylight, so as to reconnoitre
our road, to return to dinner,
and then, if we thought it practicable,
to leave the house about 5 P.M.,
and to remain in the large crater till
after night set in. The only objection
to this scheme (and it was a most
serious one) was, that when we mentioned
it to the guides, they appeared
completely horror-struck at the notion
of it. Here, as elsewhere in the
neighbourhood of volcanic activity,
the common people have a superstitious
dread of a presiding deity; in
this place, especially, where they are
scarcely rescued from heathenism,
we were not surprised to find it. This,
and their personal fears, (no human
being ever having, as the natives
assured us, entered the crater in darkness,)
we then found insuperable: all
we could do was to take the best
guides we were able to procure with us
by daylight, so that they should refresh
their memories as to the locale,
and ascertain if any change had taken
place since their last visit, and trust
to being able during our walk to persuade
one to return with us in the
evening. Accordingly we all left the
house after breakfast, following the
track marked (H), which led us precipitously
down, till we landed on the
surface of the large crater, an immense
sheet of scoriaceous lava cooled
suddenly from a state of fusion; the[Pg 594]
upheaved waves and deep hollows
evidencing that congelation has taken
place before the mighty agitation has
subsided. It is dotted with cones
60 or 70 feet high, and extensively
intersected by deep cracks, from both
of which sulphurous smoke ascends.
It is surrounded by a wall about
twelve miles in circumference, in most
parts 1000 feet deep. I despair of
conveying an idea of what our sensations
were, when we first launched
out on this fearful pit to cross to the
active crater at the further end. With
all the feeling of insecurity that attends
treading on unsafe ice, was
combined the utter sense of helplessness
the desolation of the scene encouraged:
it produced a sort of instinctive
dread, such as brutes might
be supposed to feel in such situations.
This, however, soon left us, and attending
our guides, who led us away
to the right for about a mile, we
turned abruptly to the left, and came
upon a deep dike, which, running concentric
with the sides, terminates near
the active crater, with which I conceive
its bottom is on a level. The
lava had slipped into it where we
crossed, and the loose blocks were
difficult to scramble over. In the
lowest part where these had not fallen,
the fire appeared immediately beneath
the surface. The guides here evinced
great caution, trying with their poles
before venturing their weight; the
heat was intense, and made us glad
to find ourselves again on terra firma,
if that expression may be allowed
where the walking was exceedingly
disagreeable, owing to the hollowness
of the lava, formed in great bubbles,
that continually broke and let us in
up to our knees. This dike has probably
been formed by the drainage of
the volcano by a lateral vent, as the
part of the crater which it confines
has sunk lower than that outside it,
and the contraction caused by loss of
heat may well account for its width,
which varies from one to three hundred
yards. In support of this opinion,
I may mention, that in 1840 a
molten river broke out, eight miles to
the eastward, and, in some places six
miles broad, rolled down to the sea,
where it materially altered the line of
coast. From where we crossed, there
is a gradual rise until within 200 yards
of the volcano, when the surface dips
to its margin. Owing to this we
came suddenly in view of it, and, lost
in amazement, walked silently on to
the brink. To the party who had
made the excursion the previous
evening, the surprise was not so great
as to the others; moreover, a bright
noonday sun, and a floating mirage
which made it difficult to discern the
real from the deceptive, robbed the
scene of much of its brilliancy; still
it was truly sublime, as a feeble attempt
at description will show. This
immense caldron, two and three quarter
miles in circumference, is filled to
within twenty feet of its brim with
red molten lava, over which lies a
thin scum resembling the slag on a
smelting furnace. The whole surface
was in fearful agitation. Great rollers
followed each other to the side,
and, breaking, disclosed deep edges of
crimson. These were the canals of
fire we had noticed the night before
diverging from a common centre, and
the furnaces in equal activity; while
what had appeared to us like jets
of gas, proved to be fitful spurts
of lava, thrown up from all parts of
the lake (though principally from the
focus near the N.E. edge) a height of
thirty feet. Most people probably
would have been satisfied with having
witnessed this magnificent spectacle;
but our admiration was so little exhausted,
that the idea continually
suggested itself, “How grand would
this be by night!” The party who
had encountered the difficulties of the
walk the night before, were convinced
that no greater ones existed in that
of to-day; and therefore, if it continued
fine, and we could induce the guide
to accompany us, the project was
feasible. The avarice of one of these
ultimately overcame his fears, and,
under his direction, we again left the
house at 5 p.m., and, returning by our
old track, reached the hill above the
crater about the time the sun set,
though long after it had sunk below
the edge of the pit. Here we halted,
and smoking our cigars lit from the
cracks (now red-hot) which we had
passed unnoticed in the glare of the
sunlight, waited until it became quite
dark, when we moved on; and, great as
had been our expectations, we found
them faint compared with the awful[Pg 595]
sublimity of the scene before us. The
slag now appeared semi-transparent,
and so extensively perforated as to
show one sheet of liquid fire, its waves
rising high, and pouring over each
other in magnificent confusion, forming
a succession of cascades of unequalled
grandeur; the canals, now
incandescent, the restless activity of
the numerous vents throwing out
great volumes of molten lava, the
terrible agitation, and the brilliancy
of the jets, which, shooting high in the
air, fell with an echoless, lead-like
sound, breaking the otherwise impressive
stillness; formed a picture
that language (at least any that I
know) is quite inadequate to describe.
We felt this; for no one spoke except
when betrayed into an involuntary
burst of amazement. On our hands
and knees we crawled to the brink,
and lying at full length, and shading
our faces with paper, looked down at
the fiery breakers as they dashed
against the side of the basin beneath.
The excessive heat, and the fact that
the spray was frequently dashed over
the edge, put a stop to this fool-hardiness;
but at a more rational distance
we stood gazing, with our feelings of
wonder and awe so intensely excited,
that we paid no regard to the entreaties
of our guide to quit the spot. He
at last persuaded us of the necessity
of doing so, by pointing to the moon,
and her distance above the dense cloud
which hung, a lurid canopy, above
the crater. Taking a last look, we
“fell in” in Indian file, and got back
to the house, with no further accident
than a few bruises, about ten o’clock.
The walk had required caution, and
it was long after I had closed my eyes
ere the retina yielded the impressions
that had been so nervously drawn on
them. The next morning at nine, we
started on our return to the ship,
sauntering leisurely along, picking
strawberries by the way, and enjoying
all the satisfaction inherent to the
successful accomplishment of an undertaking.
With health and strength
for any attempt we had been peculiarly
favoured by the weather, and
had thus done more than any who
had preceded us. Our party, under
these circumstances, was most joyous;
so that, independent of the object, the
relaxation itself was such as we creatures
of habit and discipline seldom
experience.
To make this narrative more intelligible,
it will be necessary to describe
briefly the position and general
features of this volcano, which
does not, like most others, spring
from a cone, but has excavated for
itself a bed in the side of Mowna
Roa, which rises 14,000 feet above
the level of the sea; it is about sixteen
miles distant from the summit of
the mountain, wherein is an enormous
extinct crater, from which this is probably
the outlet; it is 4000 feet above
the level of the sea, and twenty miles
from the nearest coast line. Several
distinct levels in the present crater
prove that it has eaten its way to its
present depth. On the most elevated
of these large trees now grow, evidences
of many years’ tranquillity;
lower down we come to shrubs, and
lastly to the fern, apparently the most
venturesome of the vegetable kingdom;
it seems to require nothing but
rest and water, for we found it shooting
out of crevices where the lava
appeared to have undergone no decomposition.
Nowhere, I conceive,
(not even in Iceland,) can be seen
such stupendous volcanic efforts as in
Owhyhee. The whole island, eighty-six
miles long by seventy broad, and
rising, as it does at Mowna Keah,
more than 15,000 feet above the sea,
would seem to have been formed by
layers of lava imposed at different
periods. Some of these have followed
quickly on each other; while the
thickness of soil, made up of vegetable
mould and decomposed lava, indicates
a long interval of repose between
others. The present surface is comparatively
recent, though there is no
tradition of any but partial eruptions.
“O Lord! how manifold are Thy
works: in wisdom hast Thou made
them all!”
We reached the village the next
day at 1 p.m., and after a refreshing
bathe, returned on board to find the
ship prepared for sea, to which we
proceeded the following morning at
four o’clock.[Pg 596]
At the beginning of the present
year, and upon the authority of M.
Alexandre Dumas, we laid before the
readers of this Magazine a sketch of
certain incidents in the lives of three
French guardsmen, who, in company
with a young cadet of Gascony, fought,
drank, loved, and plotted under the
reign of Louis the Thirteenth and the
rule of Richelieu. The sketch was incomplete:
contrary to established practice,
M. Dumas neither married nor killed
his heroes; but after exposing them to
innumerable perils, out of all of which
they came triumphant, although from
none did they derive any important
benefit, he left them nearly as he
found them—with their fortunes still
to make, and with little to rely upon
save their good swords and their
dauntless courage. He promised,
however, a continuation of their history,
and that promise he has kept,
but with a difference. Passing over a
score of years, he again introduces us
to the guardsmen, whom he left in the
heyday of youth, and who have now
attained, most of them passed, the
sober age of forty.
Twenty years later, then, we find
D’Artagnan, the young Gascon gentleman
aforesaid, alone upon the scene.
His three friends, influenced by various
motives, have retired from the
corps of mousquetaires: Athos to reside
upon a small estate in Poitou,
Porthos to marry a rich widow,
Aramis to become an abbé. D’Artagnan
alone, having no estate to retire
to larger than a cabbage-garden, no
widow to marry, or inclination for the
church, has stuck to the service with
credit, but with small profit to himself;
and the lieutenancy bestowed
upon him by the Cardinal-Duke in
1628, is still a lieutenancy in 1648,
under Richelieu’s less able, but equally
ambitious successor, Cardinal Mazarine.
Moreover, deprived, during the
greater part of these twenty years, of
the society of his three fiends, who
had in some measure formed his character,
and from the example of two of
whom he had caught much of what
chivalry and elegance he possessed—deprived
also of opportunities of displaying
those peculiar talents for bold
intrigue, which had once enabled him
to thwart the projects of Richelieu
himself, D’Artagnan has degenerated
into a mere trooper. His talents and
shrewdness have not deserted him; on
the contrary, the latter has increased
with his experience of the world; but
instead of being employed in the service
of queens and princes, their exercise
has been for some years confined
to procuring their owner those physical
and positive comforts which
soldiers seek and prize—namely, a good
table, comfortable quarters, and a complaisant
hostess.
Although thus making the best of
his position, and only occasionally
grumbling at the caprice of Dame
Fortune, who seems entirely to have
forgotten him, it is with a lively sensation
of joy that D’Artagnan, one
evening when on guard at the Palais
Royal, hears himself summoned to the
presence of Mazarine. It is at the
commencement of the Fronde; the
exactions of the cardinal have irritated
the people, who show symptoms
of open resistance; his enemies, already
sufficiently numerous, are daily increasing
and becoming more formidable.
Mazarine trembles for his power,
and looks around him for men of head
and action, to aid him in breasting the
storm and carrying out his schemes.
He hears tell of the four guardsmen,
whose fidelity and devotion had once
saved the reputation of Anne of
Austria, and baffled the most powerful
minister France ever saw; these four
men he resolves to make his own, and
D’Artagnan is dispatched to find his
three former companions, and induce
them to espouse the cause of the
cardinal. The mission is but partially
successful. D’Artagnan finds Porthos,
whose real name is Du Vallon, rich,
flourishing, and a widower, but, notwithstanding
all these advantages,
perfectly unhappy because he has no
title. Vanity was always the failing
of Porthos. Aramis, otherwise the
Chevalier—now the Abbé—d’Herblay,
is up to the ears in intrigues of every
description. Athos, Count de la Fère,
has abandoned the wine-flask, formerly[Pg 597]
the deity of his adoration, and
is busied in the education of a natural
son, a youth of sixteen, of whom the
beautiful Duchess of Chevreuse is the
mother. By the promise of a barony,
D’Artagnan easily induces Porthos to
follow him to Paris; but with his
other two friends he is less successful.
Athos and Aramis put him off with
excuses, for both have already pledged
themselves to the cause of the Fronde
and of the Duke of Beaufort.
This prince, the grandson of Henry
the Fourth, and of the celebrated
Gabrielle D’Estrées, is a prisoner in
the fortress of Vincennes, and a constant
subject of uneasiness to Mazarine.
Brave as steel, but of limited
capacity, the idol of the people, who,
by the use of his name, are easily
roused to rebellion, the duke has beguiled
his long captivity by abuse of
the Facchino Mazarini, as he styles
the cardinal, and by keeping up a constant
petty warfare with the governor
of Vincennes, Monsieur de Chavigny.
On his way to prison, he boasted to
his guards that he had at least forty
plans of escape, some one of which
would infallibly succeed. This was
repeated to the cardinal; and so well
is the duke guarded in consequence,
that five years have elapsed and he is
still at Vincennes. At last his friends
find means of communicating with him,
and Grimaud, the servant of the
Count de la Fère, is introduced, in the
capacity of an under jailer, into the
fortress, where, by his taciturnity and
apparent strictness, he gains the entire
confidence of La Ramée, an official
who, under M. de Chavigny, is appointed
to the especial guardianship
of the Duke of Beaufort. An attempt
to escape is fixed for the day of the
Pentecost. Upon the morning of that
day, Monsieur de Chavigny starts
upon a short journey, leaving the
castle in charge of La Ramée, whom
the duke invites to sup with him upon
a famous pasty, that has been ordered
for the occasion from a confectioner
who has recently established himself
at Vincennes. Here is what takes
place at the repast.
La Ramée, who, at the bottom of
his heart, entertained a considerable
degree of regard and affection for M.
de Beaufort, made himself a great
treat of this tête-à-tête supper. His
chief foible was gluttony, and for this
grand occasion the confectioner had
promised to outdo himself. The
pasty was to be of pheasants, the
wine of the best vintage of Chambertin.
By adding to the agreeable images
which this promise called up in his
mind, the society of the duke, who in
the main was such an excellent fellow,
who played Monsieur de Chavigny
such capital tricks, and made such
biting jokes against the cardinal, La
Ramée had composed a picture of a
perfectly delightful evening, which he
looked forward to with proportionate
jubilation, and with an impatience
almost equalling that of the duke.
His first visit that morning had been
to the pastrycook, who had shown
him the crust of a gigantic pasty,
decorated at the top with the arms of
Monsieur de Beaufort. The said crust
was still empty, but beside it were a
pheasant and two partridges, so minutely
and closely larded, that each of
them looked like a cushion stuck full
of pins. La Ramée’s mouth watered
at the sight.
Early in the day, M. de Beaufort
went to play at ball with La Ramée;
a sign from Grimaud warned him to
pay attention to every thing. Grimaud
walked before them, as if to
point out the road that he and the
duke would have to take that evening.
The place where they were in
the habit of playing was the smaller
court of the fortress—a solitary enclosure,
where sentinels were only stationed
when the duke was there; even
that precaution seeming unnecessary,
on account of the great height of the
ramparts. There were three doors to
open before reaching this court, and
each door was opened with a different
key. All three keys were kept by La
Ramée. When they reached the
court, Grimaud seated himself negligently
in one of the embrasures, his
legs dangling outside the wall. The
duke understood that the rope-ladder
was to be fixed at that place. This,
and other manoeuvres, comprehensible
enough to M. de Beaufort, and carefully
noted by him, had, of course, no
intelligible meaning for La Ramée.
The game began. M. de Beaufort
was in play, and sent the balls wherever
he liked; La Ramée could not
win a game. When they had finished[Pg 598]
playing, the duke, whilst rallying La
Ramée on his ill success, pulled out a
couple of louis-d’ors, and offered them
to his guards, who had followed him
to the court to pick up the balls, telling
them to go and drink his health.
The guards asked La Ramée’s permission,
which he gave, but for the
evening only. Up to that time he
had various important matters to arrange,
some of which would require
him to absent himself from his prisoner,
whom he did not wish to be
lost sight of.
Six o’clock came, and although the
dinner-hour was fixed for seven, the
table was already spread, and the
enormous pie placed upon the side-board.
Every body was impatient
for something: the guards to go and
drink, La Ramée to dine, and Monsieur
de Beaufort to escape. Grimaud
was the only one who seemed to be
waiting for nothing, and to remain
perfectly calm; and at times when
the duke looked at his dull, immoveable
countenance, he almost doubted
whether that could be the man who
was to aid his projected flight.
At half-past six La Ramée dismissed
the guards, the duke sat down at
the table, and signed to his jailer to
take a chair opposite to him. Grimaud
served the soup, and stationed himself
behind La Ramée. The most
perfect enjoyment was depicted on the
countenance of the latter, as he commenced
the repast from which he had
been anticipating so much pleasure.
The duke looked at him with a smile.
“Ventre St Gris! La Ramée,”
cried he, “if I were told that at this
moment there is in all France a happier
man than yourself, I would not
believe it.”
“And you would be quite right not
to do so, Monseigneur,” said La
Ramée. “I confess that, when I am
hungry, I know no pleasure equal to
that of sitting down to a good dinner;
and when I remember that my Amphitryon
is the grandson of Henry the
Fourth, the pleasure is at least
doubled by the honour done to me.”
The duke bowed. “My dear La
Ramée,” said he, “you are unequaled
in the art of paying compliments.”
“It is no compliment, Monseigneur,”
said La Ramée; “I say exactly
what I think.”
“You are really attached to me
then?” said the duke.
“Most sincerely,” replied La Ramée;
“and I should be inconsolable
if your highness were to leave Vincennes.”
“A singular proof of affection that!”
returned the duke.
“But, Monseigneur,” continued La
Ramée, sipping at a glass of Madeira,
“what would you do if you were set
at liberty? You would only get into
some new scrape, and be sent to the
Bastile instead of to Vincennes.”
“Indeed!” said the duke, considerably
amused at the turn the conversation
was taking, and glancing at
the clock, of which the hands, as he
thought, advanced more slowly than
usual.
“M. de Chavigny is not very amiable,”
said La Ramée, “but M. de
Tremblay is a great deal worse. You
may depend, Monseigneur, that it
was a real kindness to send you here,
where you breathe a fine air, and
have nothing to do but to eat and
drink, and play at ball.”
“According to your account, La
Ramée, I was very ungrateful ever to
think of escaping.”
“Exceedingly so,” replied La Ramée;
“but your highness never did
think seriously of it.”
“Indeed did I, though!” said the
duke; “and what is more, folly
though it may be, I sometimes think
of it still.”
“Still by one of your forty plans,
Monseigneur?”
The duke nodded affirmatively.
“Monseigneur,” resumed La Ramée,
“since you have so far honoured
me with your confidence, I wish you
would tell me one of the forty methods
of escape which your highness
had invented.”
“With pleasure,” replied the duke.
“Grimaud, give me the pasty.”
“I am all attention,” said La Ramée,
leaning back in his chair, and
raising his glass so as to look at the
setting sun through the liquid amber
which it contained. The duke
glanced at the clock. Ten minutes
more and it would strike seven, the
hour for which his escape was concerted.
Grimaud placed the pie before
M. de Beaufort, who took his
silver-bladed knife—steel ones were[Pg 599]
not allowed him—to cut it; but La
Ramée, unwilling to see so magnificent
a pasty mangled by a dull knife,
passed him his own, which was of
steel.
“Well, Monseigneur,” said he,
“and this famous plan?”
“Do you wish me to tell you,”
said the duke, “the one on the success
of which I most reckoned, and
which I intended to try the first?”
“By all means,” said La Ramée.
“Well,” said M. de Beaufort, who
was busy in the dissection of the pie,
“in the first place I hoped to have for
my guardian some honest fellow like
yourself, Monsieur La Ramée.”
“Your hope was realized, Monseigneur.
And then?”
“I said to myself,” continued the
duke, “if once I have about me a
good fellow like La Ramée, I will get
a friend, whom he does not know to
be my friend, to recommend to him a
man devoted to my interests, and
who will aid my escape.”
“Good!” said La Ramée. “No
bad idea.”
“When I have accomplished this,”
said the duke, “if the man is skilful,
and manages to gain the confidence
of my jailer, I shall have no difficulty
in keeping up a communication with
my friends.”
“Indeed!” said La Ramée; “how
so?”
“Easily enough,” replied M. de
Beaufort; “in playing at ball, for
instance.”
“In playing at ball!” repeated La
Ramée, who was beginning to pay
great attention to the duke’s words.
“Yes. I strike a ball into the
moat; a man who is at hand, working
in his garden, picks it up. The
ball contains a letter. Instead of
throwing back the same ball, he
throws another, which contains a letter
for me. My friends hear from
me and I from them, without any one
being the wiser.”
“The devil!” said La Ramée,
scratching his head, “you do well to
tell me this, Monseigneur. In future
I will keep an eye on pickers up of
balls. But, after all, that is only a
means of correspondence.”
“Wait a little. I write to my
friends—’On such a day and at such
an hour, be in waiting on the other
side of the moat with two led
horses.'”
“Well,” said La Ramée, with
some appearance of uneasiness, “but
what then? Unless, indeed, the
horses have wings, and can fly up the
rampart to fetch you.”
“Or that I have means of flying
down,” said the duke, carelessly.
“A rope-ladder, for instance.”
“Yes,” said La Ramée, with a
forced laugh; “but a rope ladder can
hardly be sent in a tennis-ball, though
a letter may.”
“No; but it may be sent in something
else. Let us only suppose, for
argument’s sake, that my cook, Noirmont,
has purchased the pastrycook’s
shop opposite the castle. La Ramée,
who is a bit of an epicure, tries his
pies, finds them excellent, and asks
me if I would like to taste one. I
accept the offer, on condition that he
shall help me to eat it. To do so
more at his ease, he sends away the
guards, and only keeps Grimaud here
to wait upon us. Grimaud is the
man whom my friend has recommended,
and who is ready to second me in
all things. The moment of my escape
is fixed for seven o’clock. At a few
minutes to seven”——
“At a few minutes to seven!”
repeated La Ramée, perspiring with
alarm.
“At a few minutes to seven,” continued
the duke, suiting the action to
the word, “I take the crust off the
pie. Inside it, I find two poniards, a
rope-ladder, and a gag. I put one of
the poniards to La Ramée’s breast,
and I say to him—’My good friend,
La Ramée, if you make a motion or
utter a cry, you are a dead man!'”
The duke, as we have already said,
whilst uttering these last sentences,
had acted in conformity. He was
now standing close to La Ramée, to
whom his tone of voice, and the sight
of the dagger levelled at his heart,
intimated plainly enough that M. de
Beaufort would keep his word. Meanwhile
Grimaud, silent as the grave,
took out of the pie the second poniard,
the rope-ladder, and the gag. La
Ramée followed each of these objects
with his eyes with a visibly increasing
terror.
“Oh, Monseigneur!” cried he,
looking at the duke with an air of[Pg 600]
stupefaction, which at any other time
would have made M. de Beaufort
laugh heartily, “you would not have
the heart to kill me?”
“No, if you do not oppose my
flight.”
“But, Monseigneur, if I let you
escape, I am a ruined man.”
“I will pay you the value of your
office.”
“And if I defend myself, or call
out?”
“By the honour of a gentleman,
you die upon the spot!”
At this moment the clock struck.
“Seven o’clock,” said Grimaud,
who had not yet uttered a word.
La Ramée made a movement. The
duke frowned, and the unlucky jailer
felt the point of the dagger penetrate
his clothes, and press against his
breast.
“Enough, Monseigneur,” cried he;
“I will not stir. But I entreat you
to tie my hands and feet, or I shall be
taken for your accomplice.”
The duke took off his girdle, and
gave it to Grimaud, who tied La
Ramée’s hands firmly behind his
back. La Ramée then held out his
legs; Grimaud tore a napkin into
strips, and bound his ankles together.
“And now the gag!” cried poor La
Ramée; “the gag! I insist upon it;
or they will hang me for not having
given the alarm.”
In an instant La Ramée was gagged,
and laid upon the ground; two or
three chairs were overturned, to make
it appear that there had been a struggle.
Grimaud took from La Ramée’s
pockets all the keys that they contained,
opened the room-door, shut
and double-locked it when the duke
and himself had passed out, and led
the way to the court. This the fugitives
reached without accident or encounter,
and found it entirely deserted;
no sentinels, nor any body at the
windows that overlooked it. The
duke hurried to the rampart, and saw
upon the further side of the moat
three horsemen and two led horses.
He exchanged a sign with them; they
were waiting for him. Meanwhile
Grimaud was fastening the rope by
which the descent was to be effected.
It was not a ladder, but a silken cord
rolled upon a stick, which was to be
placed between the legs, and become
unrolled by the weight of the person
descending.
“Go,” said the duke.
“First, Monseigneur?” asked
Grimaud.
“Certainly,” was the reply; “if I am
taken, a prison awaits me; if you
are caught, you will be hung.”
“True,” said Grimaud; and putting
himself astride the stick, he commenced
his perilous descent. The duke followed
him anxiously with his eyes.
About three quarters of the distance
were accomplished, when the cord
broke, and Grimaud fell into the moat.
M. de Beaufort uttered a cry; but
Grimaud said nothing, although he
was evidently severely hurt, for he
remained motionless upon the spot on
which he had fallen. One of the three
horsemen slid down into the moat,
fastened the noose of a rope under the
arms of Grimaud, and his two companions,
who held the other end, pulled
him up.
“Come down, Monseigneur,” cried
the cavaliers; “the fall is only about
fifteen feet, and the grass is soft.”
The duke was already descending.
His task was difficult; for the stick
was no longer there to sustain him,
and he was obliged to lower himself
along the slender rope from a height
of fifty feet by sheer force of wrist.
But his activity, strength, and coolness
came to his aid; in less than five
minutes he was at the end of the cord.
He then let go his hold, and fell
upon his feet without injury. Climbing
out of the moat, he found himself
in the company of Count Rochefort,
and of two other gentlemen with
whom he was unacquainted. Grimaud,
whose senses had left him, was
fastened upon a horse.
“Gentlemen,” said the duke, “I
will thank you by and by; just now
we have not an instant to lose. Forward
then, and let who loves me
follow.”
And springing upon his horse, he
set off at full gallop, breathing as if
a load were removed from his breast,
and exclaiming in accents of inexpressible
joy—
“Free! Free! Free!”
The two cavaliers who accompany
the Duke and the Count de Rochefort,
are Athos and Aramis. D’Artagnan[Pg 601]
and Porthos are sent in pursuit of the
cardinal, and in the obscurity by night
the four friends, who have so often
fought side by side, find themselves
at sword’s point with each other.
Fortunately a recognition ensues before
any harm is done. A strong
party of the Duke of Beaufort’s adherents
comes up, and D’Artagan and
Porthos are taken prisoners, but immediately
set at liberty by the duke.
The readers of the Three Mousquetaires
will not have forgotten a
certain Lady de Winter, having a
fleur-de-lis branded on her shoulder,
who plays an important part in that
romance, and who, after committing
innumerable crimes, at last meets her
death at the hands of a public executioner,
but without form of trial.
This latter, indeed, might be considered
almost superfluous, so numerous
and notorious were her offences; but
nevertheless, D’Artagnan and his three
friends, by whose order and in whose
presence the execution took place,
sometimes feel pangs of remorse for
the deed, which none of the many
lives they have taken in fair and open
fight ever occasion them. Athos
especially, the most reflecting and
sensitive of the four, continually reproaches
himself with the share he
took in that act of illegal justice.
This woman has left a son, who inherits
all her vices, and who, having
been proved illegitimate, has been
deprived of Lord De Winter’s estates,
and passes by the name of Mordaunt.
He is now brought upon the scene.
Raoul, Viscount of Braguelonne, the
son of Athos, is proceeding to Flanders,
in company with the young
Count de Guiche, to join the army
under the Prince of Condé, when, on
the last day of his journey, and whilst
passing through a forest, he falls in
with, and disperses a party of Spanish
marauders who are robbing and ill-treating
two travellers. Of these
latter, one is dead, and the other, who
is desperately wounded, implores the
aid of a priest. Raoul and his friend
order their attendants to form a litter
of branches, and to convey the wounded
man to a neighbouring forest inn,
whilst they hasten on to the next village
to procure him the spiritual consolation
he is so urgent to obtain.
The two young men had ridden
more than a league, and were already
in sight of the village of Greney, when
they saw coming towards them,
mounted upon a mule, a poor monk,
whom, from his large hat and grey
woollen gown, they took to be an
Augustine friar. Chance seemed to
have sent them exactly what they
were seeking. Upon approaching the
monk, they found him to be a man
of two or three and twenty years of
age, but who might have been taken
for some years older, owing probably
to long fasts and severe penances.
His complexion was pale, not that
clear white paleness which is agreeable
to behold, but a bilious yellow;
his hair was of a light colour, and his
eyes, of a greenish grey, seemed devoid
of all expression.
“Sir,” said Raoul, with his usual
politeness, “have you taken orders?”
“Why do you ask?” said the
stranger, in a tone so abrupt as to be
scarcely civil.
“For our information,” replied the
Count de Guiche haughtily.
The stranger touched his mule with
his heel, and moved onwards. With
a bound of his horse, De Guiche
placed himself before him, blocking
up the road. “Answer, sir” said he.
“The question was polite put, and
deserves a reply.”
“I am not obliged, I suppose, to
inform the first comer who and what
I am.”
With considerable difficulty De
Guiche repressed a violent inclination
to break the bones of the insolent
monk.
“In the first place,” said he, “we
will tell you who we are. My friend
here is the Viscount of Braguelonne,
and I am the Count de Guiche. It is
no mere caprice that induces us to
question you; we are seeking spiritual
aid for a dying man. If you are a
priest, I call upon you in the name of
humanity to afford him the assistance
he implores; if, on the other hand,
you are not in orders, I warn you to
expect the chastisement which your
impertinence merits.”
The monk’s pale face became livid,
and a smile of so strange an expression
overspread it, that Raoul, whose
eyes were fixed upon him, felt an
involuntary and unaccountable uneasiness.[Pg 602]
“He is some spy of the Imperialists,”
said the viscount, putting his
hand upon his pistols. A stern and
menacing glance from the monk replied
to the accusation.
“Well, sir,” said De Guiche, “will
you answer?”
“I am a priest,” replied the young
man, his face resuming its former calm
inexpressiveness.
“Then, holy father,” said Raoul,
letting his pistol fall back into the
holster, and giving a tone of respect to
his words, “since you are a priest, you
have now an opportunity of exercising
your sacred functions. A man
wounded to death is at the little inn
which you will soon find upon your
road, and he implores the assistance
of one of God’s ministers.”
“I will go to him,” said the monk
calmly, setting his mule in motion.
“If you do not, sir,” said De
Guiche, “remember that our horses
will soon overtake your mule, that we
possess sufficient influence to have you
seized wherever you go, and that then
your trial will be very short. A tree
and a rope are to be found every
where.”
The eyes of the monk emitted an
angry spark, but he merely repeated
the words, “I will go to him,” and
rode on.
“Let us follow,” said De Guiche;
“it will be the surest plan.”
“I was about to propose it,” said
Raoul. And the young men followed
the monk at pistol-shot distance.
On arriving in sight of the roadside
tavern, they saw their servants approaching
it from the opposite direction,
leading their horses, and carrying
the wounded man. On perceiving
the monk, an expression of joy illuminated
the countenance of the sufferer.
“And now,” said Raoul, “we have
done all we can for you, and must
hasten onwards to join the prince’s
army. There is to be a battle to-morrow,
it is said, and we would not
miss it.”
The host had got everything ready,
a bed, lint and bandages, and a messenger
had been dispatched to Lens,
which was the nearest town, to bring
back a surgeon.
“You will follow us,” said Raoul
to the servants, “as soon as you have
conveyed this person to his room. A
horseman will arrive here in the course
of the afternoon,” added he to the
innkeeper, “and will probably enquire
if the Viscount de Braguelonne has
passed this way. He is one of my
attendants, and his name is Grimaud.
You will tell him that I have passed,
and shall sleep at Cambrin.”
By this time the litter had reached
the door of the inn. The monk got
off his mule, ordered it to be put in
the stable without unsaddling, and
entered the house. The two young
men rode away, followed by the benedictions
of the wounded man.
The litter was just being carried
into the inn, when the hostess hurried
forward to receive her guests. On
catching sight of the sufferer, she
seized her husband’s arm with an exclamation
of terror.
“Well,” said the host, “what is
the matter?”
“Do you not recognise him?” said
the woman, pointing to the wounded
man.
“Recognise him! No—yet—surely
I remember the face. Can it
be?”——
“The former headsman of Bethune,”
said his wife, completing the
sentence.
“The headsman of Bethune!” repeated
the young monk, recoiling with
a look and gesture of marked repugnance.
The chief of Raoul’s attendants
perceived the disgust with which the
monk heard the quality of his penitent.
“Sir,” he said, “although he may
have been an executioner, or even if
he still be so, it is no reason for refusing
him the consolations of religion.
Render him the service he claims at
your hands, and you will have the
more merit in the sight of God.”
The monk made no reply, but entered
a room on the ground-floor,
in which the servants were now placing
the wounded man upon a bed. As
he did so, every one left the apartment,
and the penitent remained alone
with his confessor. The presence of
Raoul’s and De Guiche’s followers
being no longer required, the latter
remounted their horses, and set off at
a sharp trot to rejoin their masters,
who were already out of sight.
They had been gone but a few[Pg 603]
minutes, when a single horseman rode
up to the door of the inn.
“What is your pleasure, sir?” said
the host, still pale and aghast at the
discovery his wife had made.
“A feed for my horse, and a bottle
of wine for myself,” was the reply.
“Have you seen a young gentleman
pass by,” continued the stranger,
“mounted on a chestnut horse, and
followed by two attendants.”
“The Viscount de Braguelonne?”
said the innkeeper.
“The same.”
“Then you are Monsieur Grimaud?”
The traveller nodded assent.
“Your master was here not half
an hour ago,” said the host. “He
has ridden on, and will sleep at Cambrin.”
Grimaud sat down at a table, wiped
the dust and perspiration from his
face, poured out a glass of wine, and
drank in silence. He was about to
fill his glass a second time, when a
loud shrill cry was heard, issuing
from the apartment in which the
monk and the patient were shut up
together. Grimaud started to his
feet.
“What is that?” exclaimed he.
“From the wounded man’s room,”
replied the host.
“What wounded man?”
“The former headsman of Bethune,
who has been set upon and sorely
hurt by Spanish partisans. The Viscount
de Braguelonne rescued and
brought him hither, and he is now confessing
himself to an Augustine friar.
He seems to suffer terribly.”
“The headsman of Bethune,” muttered
Grimaud, apparently striving to
recollect something. “A man of
fifty-five or sixty years of age, tall
and powerful; of dark complexion,
with black hair and beard?”
“The same; excepting that his
beard has become grey, and his hair
white. Do you know him?”
“I have seen him once,” replied
Grimaud gloomily.
At this moment another cry was
heard, less loud than the first, but
followed by a long deep groan. Grimaud
and the innkeeper looked at
each other.
“It is like the cry of a man who is
being murdered,” said the latter.
“We must see what it is,” said
Grimaud.
Although slow to speak, Grimaud
was prompt in action. He rushed to
the door, and shook it violently; it
was secured on the inner side.
“Open the door instantly,” cried
he, “or I break it down.”
No answer was returned. Grimaud
looked around him, and perceived a
heavy crowbar standing in a corner
of the passage. This he seized hold
of, and before the host could interfere,
the door was burst open. The room
was inundated with blood, which was
trickling from the mattrass; there was
a hoarse rattling in the wounded
man’s throat; the monk had disappeared.
Grimaud hurried to an open
window which looked upon the court-yard.
“He has escaped through this,”
said he.
“Do you think so?” said the host.
“Boy, see if the monk’s mule is still
in the stable.”
“It is gone,” was the answer.
Grimaud approached the bed, and
gazed upon the harsh and strongly
marked features of the wounded
man.
“Is he still alive?” said the host.
Without replying, Grimaud opened
the man’s doublet to feel if his heart
beat, and at the same time the innkeeper
approached the bed. Suddenly
both started back with an exclamation
of horror. A poniard was buried
to the hilt in the left breast of the
headsman.
What had passed between the priest
and his penitent was as follows.
It has been seen that the monk
showed himself little disposed to delay
his journey in order to receive the
confession of the wounded man; so
little, indeed, that he would probably
have endeavoured to avoid it by flight,
had not the menaces of the Count de
Guiche, and afterwards the presence
of the servants, or perhaps his own
reflections, induced him to perform
to the end the duties of his sacred
office.
On finding himself alone with the
sufferer, he approached the pillow of
the latter. The headsman examined
him with one of those rapid, anxious
looks peculiar to dying men, and made
a movement of surprise.[Pg 604]
“You are very young, holy father,”
said he.
“Those who wear my dress have
no age,” replied the monk severely.
“Alas, good father, speak to me
more kindly! I need a friend in these
my last moments.”
“Do you suffer much?” asked the
monk.
“Yes, but in soul rather than in
body.”
“We will save your soul,” said the
young man; “but, tell me, are you
really the executioner of Bethune, as
these people say?”
“I was,” replied the wounded man
hurriedly, as though fearful that the
acknowledgment of his degrading profession
might deprive him of the assistance
of which he stood in such
imminent need. “I was, but I am
so no longer; I gave up my office
many years ago. I am still obliged
to appear at executions, but I no
longer officiate. Heaven forbid that
I should!”
“You have a horror of your profession,
then?”
The headsman groaned.
“So long as I only struck in the
name of the law and of justice,” said
he, “my conscience was at rest, and
my sleep untroubled; but since that
terrible night when I served as instrument
of a private vengeance, and
raised my sword with hatred against
one of God’s creatures—since that
night”——
The headsman paused, and shook
his head despairingly.
“Speak on,” said the monk, who
had seated himself on the edge of the
bed, and began to take an interest
in a confession that commenced so
strangely.
“Ah!” exclaimed the dying man,
“what efforts have I not made to
stifle my remorse by twenty years of
good works! I have exposed my own
existence to preserve that of others,
and have saved human lives in exchange
for the one I had unwarrantably
taken. I frequented the
churches, sought out the poor to
console and relieve them; those who
once avoided became accustomed to
see me, and some have even loved
me. But God has not pardoned me;
for, do what I will, the memory of my
crime pursues me, and each night in
my dreams the spectre of that woman
stands menacing before me.”
“A woman! Was it a woman,
then, whom you assassinated?” cried
the monk.
“And you, too,” exclaimed the
headsman—”you, too, use that word,
assassinated. It was an assassination,
then, not an execution, and I am
a murderer!”
He shut his eyes and uttered a
hollow moan. The monk feared probably
that he would die without completing
his confession, for he hastened
to console him.
“Go on,” said he. “I cannot yet
know how far you are guilty. When
I have heard all, I will decide. Tell
me, then, how you came to commit
this deed.”
“It was night,” resumed the headsman,
in faltering accents: “a man
came to my house to seek me, and
showed me an order. I followed him.
Four other gentlemen were waiting
for him; they put a mask upon my
face, and led me with them. I was
resolved to resist, if what they required
me to do appeared unjust. We
rode on for five or six leagues almost
without uttering a word; at last we
halted—and they showed me, through
the window of a cottage, a woman
seated at a table. ‘That,’ said
they, ‘is she whom you are to
decapitate.'”
“Horrible!” exclaimed the monk.
“And you obeyed?”
“Father, that woman was a monster;
she had poisoned her husband,
had tried to assassinate her brother-in-law,
who was one of the men that
now accompanied me; she had murdered
a young girl whom she thought
her rival; and, before leaving England,
had instigated the assassination of
the king’s favourite.”
“Buckingham?” exclaimed the
monk.
“Yes, Buckingham—that was the
name.”
“She was an Englishwoman,
then?”
“No—a Frenchwoman, but she
had been married to an English nobleman.”
The monk grew pale, passed his
hand across his forehead, and, rising
from the bed, approached the door
and bolted it. The headsman[Pg 605]
thought that he was leaving him, and
implored him to return.
“I am here,” said the monk, resuming
his seat. “Who were the
five men who accompanied you?”
“One was an Englishman; the
other four were French, and wore the
uniform of the mousquetaires.”
“Their names?” demanded the
monk.
“I do not know them. But the
four Frenchmen called the Englishman
‘My lord.'”
“And the woman; was she
young?”
“Young and beautiful, most beautiful,
as she kneeled before me imploring
mercy. I have never been able
to understand how I had the courage
to strike off that pale and lovely
head.”
The monk seemed to be under the
influence of some violent emotion; his
limbs trembled, and he appeared
unable to speak. At last, mastering
himself by a strong effort—”The
name of this woman?” said he.
“I do not know it. She had been
married twice, once in France and
once in England.”
“And you killed her!” said the
monk, vehemently. “You served as
instrument to those dastardly villains
who dared not kill her themselves.
You had no pity on her youth, her
beauty, her weakness! You killed
her!”
“Alas! holy father,” said the
headsman, “this woman concealed,
under the exterior of an angel, the
vices of a demon; and when I saw
her, when I remembered all that I
had myself suffered from her”——
“You? And what could she have
done to you?”
“She had seduced my brother, who
was a priest, had fled with him from
his convent, lost him both body and
soul.”
“Your brother?”
“Yes, my brother had been her
first lover. Oh, my father! do not
look at me thus. I am very guilty,
then! You cannot pardon me!”
The monk composed his features,
which had assumed a terrible expression
during the latter part of the dying
man’s confession.
“I will pardon you,” said he, “if
you tell me all. Since your brother
was her first lover, you must know
her maiden name. Tell it me.”
“Oh, my God! my God!” exclaimed
the headsman—”I am dying!
Absolution, holy father! absolution!”
“Her name,” said the monk, “and
I give it to you.”
The headsman, who was convulsed
with agony, both physical and moral,
seemed scarcely able to speak. The
monk bent over him as if to catch the
smallest sound he should utter.
“Her name,” said he, “or no absolution.”
The dying man seemed
to collect all his strength.
“Anne de Bueil,” murmured he.
“Anne de Bueil!” repeated the
monk, rising to his feet and lifting his
hands to heaven, “Anne de Bueil!
Did you say Anne de Bueil?”
“Yes, yes, that was her name;
and now absolve me, for I am dying.”
“I absolve you?” cried the monk,
with a laugh that made the sufferer’s
hair stand on end; “I absolve you?
I am no priest!”
“You are no priest!” cried the
headsman; “but who and what are
you, then?”
“I will tell you, miscreant! I am
John de Winter, and that woman”——
“And that woman”——gasped
the executioner.
“Was my mother!”
The headsman uttered a shriek, the
long and terrible one which Grimaud
and the innkeeper had heard.
“Oh, pardon, pardon!” murmured
he—”forgive me, if not in God’s
name, at least in your own. If not
as a priest, as a son.”
“Pardon you!” replied the pretended
monk; “pardon you! God
may perhaps do it, but I never will.
Die, wretch, die! unabsolved, despairing,
and accursed.” And, drawing
a dagger from under his gown, he
plunged it into the breast of the
headsman. “Take that,” said he,
“for my absolution.”
It was then that the second cry,
followed by a long moan, had been
uttered. The headsman, who had
partially raised himself, fell back upon
the bed. The monk, without withdrawing
his dagger from the wound,
ran to the window, opened it, jumped
out into the little flower-garden below,[Pg 606]
and hurried to the stable. Leading
out his mule, he plunged into the
thickest part of the adjacent forest,
stripped off his monk’s garb, took a
horseman’s dress out of his valise,
and put it on. Then, making all
haste to the nearest post-house, he
took a horse, and continued with the
utmost speed his journey to Paris.
The headsman lives long enough
to inform Grimaud of what has passed;
and Grimaud, who was present at
the decapitation of Lady de Winter,
returns to Paris, to put Athos and his
friends on their guard against the
vengeance of her son. Mordaunt,
alias De Winter, is one of Cromwell’s
most devoted and unscrupulous agents,
and is proceeding to the French capital
to negotiate with Mazarine on the
part of the Parliamentary general.
Guided by what he has heard from
the executioner of Bethune, he discovers
who the men are by whose
order his mother was beheaded, and
he vows their destruction. The four
friends soon afterwards meet in England,
whither D’Artagnan and Porthos
have been sent on a mission to Cromwell;
whilst Athos and Aramis have
repaired thither to strive to prop the
falling fortunes of Charles the First.
We cannot say much in favour of that
portion of the book of which the scene
is laid on English ground. M. Dumas
is much happier in his delineations of
Frondeurs and Mazarinists than of
Puritans and Cavaliers; and his account
of Charles the First, and of the
scenes prior to his execution, is horribly
Frenchified.
After numerous narrow escapes
from Mordaunt, who pursues them
with unrelenting rancour, and succeeds
in assassinating their friend and
his uncle, Lord de Winter, the four
guardsmen embark on board a small
vessel to return to France. Mordaunt
discovers this, gets the captain and
crew out of the way, replaces them
by one Groslow and other creatures
of his own, and conceals himself on
board. His plan is, so soon as the
vessel is a short distance out at sea,
to escape in a boat with his confederates,
after firing a train communicating
with some barrels of powder
in the hold. There is some improbability
in this part of the story; but
gunpowder plots have special privilege
of absurdity. The guardsmen,
however, discover the mischief that is
brewing against them, just in time to
escape through the cabin windows,
and swim off to the boat, which is
towing astern.
Scarcely had D’Artagnan cut the
rope that attached the boat to the
ship, when a shrill whistle was heard
proceeding from the latter, which, as
it moved on whilst the boat remained
stationary, was already beginning to
be lost to view in the darkness. At
the same moment a lantern was
brought upon deck, and lit up the
figures of the crew. Suddenly a great
outcry was heard; and just then the
clouds that covered the heavens split
and parted, and the silver light of
the moon fell upon the white sails
and dark rigging of the vessel. Persons
were seen running about the
deck in bewilderment and confusion;
and Mordaunt himself, carrying a
torch in his hand, appeared upon the
poop.
At the appointed hour, Groslow had
collected his men, and Mordaunt, after
listening at the door of the cabin, and
concluding from the silence which reigned
that his intended victims were buried
in sleep, had hurried to the powder
barrels and set fire to the train. Whilst
he was doing this, Groslow and his
sailors were preparing to leave the
ship.
“Haul in the rope,” said the former,
“and bring the boat along-side.”
One of the sailors seized the rope
and pulled it. It came to him without
resistance.
“The cable is cut!” exclaimed the
man; “the boat is gone.”
“The boat gone!” repeated Groslow;
“impossible!”
“It is nevertheless true,” returned
the sailor. “See here; nothing in
our wake, and here is the end of the
rope.”
It was then that Groslow uttered
the cry which the guardsmen heard
from their boat.
“What is the matter?” demanded
Mordaunt, emerging from the hatchway,
his torch in his hand, and rushing
towards the stern.
“The matter is, that your enemies[Pg 607]
have escaped you. They have cut the
rope, and saved themselves in the
boat.”
With a single bound Mordaunt was
at the cabin-door, which he burst open
with his foot. It was empty.
“We will follow them,” said Groslow;
“they cannot be far off. We
will give them the stem; sail right
over them.”
“Yes; but the powder—I have
fired the train!”
“Damnation!” roared Groslow,
rushing to the hatchway. “Perhaps
there is still time.”
A horrible laugh and a frightful
blasphemy were Mordaunt’s reply;
and then, his features distorted by
rage and disappointed hate rather
than by fear, he hurled his torch into
the sea, and precipitated himself after
it. At the same moment, and before
Groslow had reached the powder barrels,
the ship opened like the crater of
a volcano, a gush of fire rose from it
with a noise like that of fifty pieces of
artillery, and blazing fragments of
the doomed vessel were seen careering
through the air in every direction.
It lasted but an instant; the red glow
that had lit up the sea for miles around
vanished; the burning fragments fell
hissing into the water; and, with the
exception of a vibration in the air, all
was calm as before. The felucca had
disappeared; Groslow and his men
were annihilated.
Our four guardsmen had witnessed
this terrible spectacle with mute awe
and horror, and when it was over,
they remained for a moment downcast
and silent. Porthos and D’Artagnan,
who had each taken an oar, forgot to
use them, and sat gazing at their companions,
whilst the boat rocked to and
fro at the will of the waves.
“Ma foi!” said Aramis, who was
the first to break the pause, “this
time I think we are fairly rid of
him.”
“Help, gentlemen, help!” just
then cried a voice that came sweeping
in piteous accents over the troubled
surface of the sea. “Help! for heaven’s
sake, help!”
The guardsmen looked at each
other. Athos shuddered.
“It is his voice!” said he.
All recognised the voice, and
strained their eyes in the direction in
which the felucca had disappeared.
Presently a man was seen swimming
vigorously towards them. Athos extended
his arm, pointing him out to
his companions.
“Yes, yes,” said D’Artagnan; “I
see him.”
“Will nothing kill him?” said
Porthos.
Aramis leaned forward and spoke
in a whisper to D’Artagnan. Mordaunt
advanced a few yards, and
raised one hand out of the water in
sign of distress.
“Pity! gentlemen,” cried he;
“pity and mercy! My strength is
leaving me, and I am about to sink.”
The tone of agony in which these
words were spoken awakened a feeling
of compassion in the breast of
Athos.
“Unhappy man!” he murmured.
“Good!” said D’Artagnan. “I
like to see you pity him. On my
word, I think he is swimming towards
us. Does he suppose we are going to
take him in? Row, Porthos, row.”
And D’Artagnan plunged his oar
into the water. Two or three long
strokes placed twenty fathoms between
the boat and the drowning man.
“Oh! you will have mercy!” cried
Mordaunt. “You will not let me
perish!”
“Aha! my fine fellow,” said Porthos,
“we have you now, I think,
without a chance of escape.”
“Oh, Porthos!” murmured the
Count de la Fère.
“For heaven’s sake, Athos,” replied
Porthos, “cease your eternal
generosity, which is ridiculous under
such circumstances. For my part I
declare to you, that if he comes within
my reach, I will split his skull with
the oar.”
D’Artagnan, who had just finished
his colloquy with Aramis, stood up in
the boat.
“Sir,” said he to the swimmer,
“be so good as to betake yourself in
some other direction. The vessel
which you intended for our coffin is
scarcely yet at the bottom of the sea,
and your present situation is a bed of
roses compared to that in which you
intended to put us.”
“Gentlemen!” said Mordaunt in
despairing accents, “I swear to you
that I sincerely repent. I am too[Pg 608]
young to die. I was led away by
a natural resentment; I wished to
revenge my mother. You would all
have acted as I have done.”
“Pshaw!” said D’Artagnan, who
saw that Athos was becoming more
and more softened by Mordaunt’s
supplications. The swimmer was
again within three or four fathoms of
the boat. The approach of death
seemed to give him supernatural
strength.
“Alas!” said he, “I am going to
die, then. And yet I was right to
avenge my mother. And besides, if
it were a crime, I repent of it, and
you ought to pardon me.”
A wave that passed over his head,
interrupted his entreaties. He again
emerged, and made a stroke in the
direction of the boat. D’Artagnan
took his oar in both hands. The unhappy
wretch uttered a groan of despair.
Athos could bear it no longer.
“D’Artagnan!” cried he, “my
son D’Artagnan, I entreat of you to
spare his life. It is so horrible to let
a man die when you can save him by
stretching out your hand. I cannot
witness such a deed; he must be
saved.”
“Mordieu!” replied D’Artagnan,
“why do you not tie our hands and
feet, and deliver us up to him at once?
The thing would be sooner over. Ha!
Count de la Fère, you wish to perish
at his hands: well, I, whom you call
your son—I will not suffer it.”
Aramis quietly drew his sword,
which he had carried between his
teeth when he swam off from the ship.
“If he lays a hand upon the boat,”
said he, “I sever it from his body,
like that of a regicide, as he is.”
“Wait a moment,” said Porthos.
“What are you going to do?” said
Aramis.
“Jump overboard and strangle
him,” replied the giant.
“Oh, my friends!” said Athos, in
a tone of entreaty that was irresistible;
“remember that we are men and
Christians! Grant me the life of this
unhappy wretch!”
D’Artagnan hung his head: Aramis
lowered his sword: Porthos sat
down.
“Count de la Fère,” exclaimed
Mordaunt, now very near the boat,
“it is you whom I implore. Have
pity upon me, and that quickly, for
my strength is exhausted. Count de
la Fère, where are you?”
“I am here, sir,” replied Athos,
with that noble and dignified air that
was habitual to him. “Take my
hand, and come into our boat.”
“I cannot bear to witness it,” said
D’Artagnan; “such weakness is really
pitiable.” And he turned towards
his two remaining friends, who, on
their part, recoiled to the other side
of the boat, as if unwilling to touch
the man to whom Athos alone did not
fear to give his hand. Mordaunt
made an effort, raised himself up, and
seized the arm extended to him.
“So,” said Athos, leaning over the
gunwale of the boat—”now place
your other hand here;” and he offered
him his shoulder as a support, so that
his head nearly touched that of Mordaunt;
and for a moment the two
deadly foes seemed to embrace each
other like brothers. Mordaunt grasped
the count’s collar with his cold and
dripping fingers.
“And now, sir, you are saved,” said
Athos; “compose yourself.”
“Ah, my mother!” exclaimed
Mordaunt, with the look of a demon,
and an accent of hatred impossible to
render, “I can offer you but one victim,
but it is the one you would yourself
have chosen!”
D’Artagnan uttered a cry; Porthos
raised his oar; Aramis sprang forward,
his naked sword in his hand. But it
was too late. By a last effort, and
with a yell of triumph, Mordaunt
dragged Athos into the water, compressing
his throat, and winding his
limbs round him like the coils of a
serpent. Without uttering a word, or
calling for help, Athos strove for a
moment to maintain himself on the
surface of the water. But his movements
were fettered, the weight that
clung to him was too great to bear up
against, and little by little he sank.
Before his friends could get to his assistance,
his head was under water,
and only his long hair was seen floating;
then all disappeared, and a circle
of foam, which in its turn was rapidly
obliterated, alone marked the spot
where the two men had been engulfed.
Struck dumb by horror, motionless,
and almost suffocated with grief and
indignation, the three guardsmen remained,[Pg 609]
with dilated eyes and extended
arms, gazing down upon the dark
waves that rolled over the body of
their friend, the brave, the chivalrous,
the noble-hearted Athos. Porthos
was the first to recover his speech.
“Oh, Athos!” said he, tearing his
hair, and with an explosion of grief
doubly affecting in a man of his gigantic
frame and iron mould; “Oh,
Athos! are you indeed gone from
us?”
At this moment, in the midst of the
vast circle which the rays of the moon
lit up, the agitation of the water
which had accompanied the absorption
of the two men, was renewed,
and there appeared, first a quantity of
fair hair, then a pallid human face,
with eyes wide open, but fixed and
glazed, then a body, which, after
raising its bust out of the water, fell
softly backwards, and floated upon
the surface of the sea. In the breast
of the corpse was buried a dagger, of
which the golden hilt sparkled in the
moonbeams.
“Mordaunt! Mordaunt!” cried the
three friends; “it is Mordaunt! But
Athos! where is he?”
Just then the boat gave a lurch,
and Grimaud uttered an exclamation
of joy. The guardsmen turned, and
saw Athos, his face livid with exhaustion,
supporting himself with a trembling
hand upon the gunwale of the
boat. In an instant he was lifted in,
and clasped in the arms of his friends.
“You are unhurt?” said D’Artagnan.
“Yes,” replied Athos. “And
Mordaunt?”
“Oh! thank God, he is dead at last.
Look yonder.”
And D’Artagnan forced Athos to
look in the direction he pointed out,
where the body of Mordaunt, tossed
upon the wave, seemed to pursue the
friends with a look of insult and mortal
hate. Athos gazed at it with an
expression of mingled pity and melancholy.
“Bravo! Athos,” cried Aramis,
with a degree of exultation which he
rarely showed.
“A good blow,” exclaimed Porthos.
“I have a son,” said Athos, “and
I wished to live. But it was not I
who killed him. It was the hand of
fate.”
Soon after the escape of Monsieur de
Beaufort, the Parisians, stirred up by
various influential malecontents—one
of the chief of whom is the famous
Jean de Gondy, Coadjutor of Paris,
and afterwards Cardinal de Retz—break
out into open insurrection.
Mazarine’s life is menaced; the queen-mother
and the young king are virtually
prisoners of the Frondeurs. The
Prince of Condé, with the laurels he
has gained on the battle-field of Lens
yet fresh upon his brow, hurries to
Paris to take part against the Fronde;
the queen and Mazarine are anxious
to escape from the capital in order to
carry on the war in the open field
instead of in the narrow streets, fighting
in which latter, or from behind
their barricades, the ill-disciplined
troops of the insurgents are nearly as
efficient as the most practised veterans.
How to manage the escape is the
difficulty. The gates of the city are
guarded by armed citizens; there appears
no possibility of egress. In
this dilemma, Anne of Austria bethinks
her of the man to whose address
and courage she had, twenty
years previously, been so deeply indebted;
D’Artagnan is called in to
her assistance. He succeeds in smuggling
the cardinal out of Paris, and
then returns to fetch Louis XIV. and
the queen-mother.
Instead of re-entering Paris by the
gate of St Honoré, D’Artagnan, who
had time to spare, went round to that
of Richelieu. The guard stopped him,
and when they saw by his plumed
hat and laced cloak that he was an
officer of mousquetaires, they insisted
upon his crying out, “Down with Mazarine.”
This he did with so good a
grace, and in so sonorous a voice, that
the most difficult were fully satisfied.
He then walked down the Rue Richelieu,
reflecting how he should manage
the escape of the queen, for it would
be impossible to take her away in one
of the royal carriages, with the arms
of France painted upon it. On passing
before the hotel of Madame de
Guéménée, who passed for the mistress
of Monsieur de Gondy, he perceived
a coach standing at the door.
A sudden idea struck him.
“Pardieu!” said he, “it would be
an excellent manœig;uvre.” And, stepping
up to the carriage, he examined[Pg 610]
the arms upon the panels, and the
livery of the coachman, who was
sleeping on the box.
“It is the Coadjutor’s carriage,”
said D’Artagnan to himself. “Providence
is decidedly in our favour.”
He opened the door without noise,
got into the coach, and pulled the
check-string.
“To the Palais Royal,” cried he to
the coachman.
The man, waking in a fright, made
no doubt that the order came from
his master, and drove off at full speed
to the palace. The gates of the court
were just closing as he drove in. On
pulling up at the steps, the coachman
perceived that the footmen were not
behind the carriage, and, supposing
that M. de Gondy had sent them
somewhere, he got off his box and
opened the door. D’Artagnan jumped
out, and just as the coachman, alarmed
at seeing a stranger instead of his
master, made a step backwards, he
seized him by the collar with his left
hand, and with his right put a pistol
to his breast.
“Not a word,” said D’Artagnan,
“or you are a dead man.”
The coachman saw that he had
fallen into a snare. He remained
silent, with open mouth and staring
eyes. Two mousquetaires were walking
up and down the court; D’Artagnan
called them, handed over the
coachman to one of them, with orders
to keep him in safe custody, and desired
the other to get on the box of
the carriage, drive it round to the
door of the private staircase leading
out of the palace, and there to wait
till he came. The coachman’s livery
coat and hat went with the carriage.
These arrangements completed, D’Artagnan
entered the palace, and knocked
at the door of the queen’s apartments.
He was instantly admitted; Anne of
Austria was waiting for him in her
oratory.
“Is every thing prepared?” said
she.
“Every thing, madam.”
“And the cardinal?”
“He has left Paris without accident,
and waits for your majesty at
Cours la Reine.”
“Come with me to the king.”
D’Artagnan bowed and followed
the queen. The young king was already
dressed, with the exception of
his shoes and doublet. He seemed
greatly astonished at being thus roused
in the middle of the night, and overwhelmed
his valet-de-chambre, Laporte,
with questions, to all of which
the latter replied—”Sire, it is by
order of her majesty.” The bed-clothes
were thrown back, and the
sheets were seen worn threadbare and
even into holes. This was one of the
results of Mazarine’s excessive parsimony.
The queen entered, and D’Artagnan
remained at the door of the
apartment. As soon as the child saw
his mother, he escaped from Laporte’s
hand and ran up to her. She signed
to D’Artagnan to approach.
“My son,” said Anne of Austria,
showing him the mousquetaire, who
stood with his plumed hat in his hand,
calm, grave, and collected, “this is
M. D’Artagnan, who is brave as one
of those knights of old whose histories
you love to hear repeated. Look at
him well, and remember his name, for
he is about to render us a great service.”
Louis XIV. gazed at D’Artagnan
with his large proud eyes; then, slowly
lifting his little hand, he held it out to
the officer, who bent his knee and
kissed it.
“Monsieur D’Artagnan,” repeated
the young king. “It is well, madam;
I shall remember it.”
At this moment a loud murmuring
noise was heard approaching the palace.
“Ha!” said D’Artagnan, straining
his ears to distinguish the sound—”The
people are rising.”
“We must fly instantly,” said the
queen.
“Madam,” said D’Artagran, “you
have deigned to give me the direction
of this night’s proceedings. Let your
majesty remain and learn what the
people want. I will answer for every
thing.”
Nothing is more easily communicated
than confidence. The queen,
herself courageous and energetic, appreciated
in the highest degree those
two virtues in others.
“Do as you please,” said she. “I
trust entirely to you.”
“Does your majesty authorize me
to give orders in your name?”
“I do, sir.”[Pg 611]
D’Artagnan hurried from the room.
The tumult was increasing; the mob
seemed to surround the Palais Royal.
On all sides were heard seditious cries
and clamours. Presently M. de Comminges,
who was on guard that night
at the Palais Royal, craved admittance
to the queen’s presence. He
had about two hundred men in the
court-yard and stables, and he placed
them at her majesty’s disposal.
“What do the people want?” said
Anne of Austria to D’Artagnan, who
just then re-appeared.
“A report has been spread, madam,
that your majesty has left the Palais
Royal, taking the king with you. The
mob demand a proof of the contrary,
or threaten to demolish the palace.”
“Oh! this time it is too bad,” said
the queen. “I will soon show them
that I am not gone.”
D’Artagnan saw by the expression
of Anne’s face, that she was about to
give some violent order. He hastened
to interfere.
“Madam,” said he, in a low voice,
“have you still confidence in me?”
“Entire confidence, sir,” was the
reply.
“Then let your majesty send away
M. de Comminges, and order him to
shut himself up with his men in the
guard-room and stables. The people
wish to see the king, and the people
must see him.”
“See him! But how? On the
balcony?”
“No, madam; here, in his bed,
sleeping.”
The queen reflected a moment, and
smiled. There as a degree of duplicity
in the course proposed that
chimed in with her humour.
“Let it be as you will,” said she.
“Monsieur Laporte,” said D’Artagnan;
“go and announce to the
people, that in five minutes they shall
see the king in his bed. Say also that
his majesty is sleeping, and that the
queen requests them to be silent, in
order not to awaken him.”
“But they cannot all come,” said
Anne. “A deputation of two or four
persons.”
“All of them, madam.”
“But it will last till to-morrow
morning.”
“In a quarter of hour it will be
over. I know the mob, madam; it is
a great baby that only wants flattery
and caresses. Before the king, these
noisy rioters will be mute and timid
as lambs.”
“Go, Laporte,” said the queen.
The young king approached his mother.
“Why do you do what these people
ask?” said he.
“It must be so, my son,” said
Anne of Austria.
“But if they can tell me that it
must be so, I am no longer king.”
The queen remained silent.
“Sire,” said D’Artagnan, “will
your majesty permit me to ask you a
question?”
“Yes, sir,” replied Louis, after a
moment’s pause, occasioned by surprise
at the guardsman’s boldness.
“Does our majesty remember,
when playing in the park at Fontaine-bleau,
or the gardens at Versailles,
to have seen the heavens become
clouded, and to have heard the thunder
roll?”
“Certainly I do,” answered Louis.
“Well, the noise of that thunder
told your majesty, that, however disposed
you might be to play, you must
go in-doors.”
“Certainly, sir; but I have been
told that the voice of the thunder is
the voice of God.”
“Well, sire, let your majesty listen
to the voice of the people, and you will
perceive that it greatly resembles that
of the thunder.”
As he spoke, a low deep roar, proceeding
from the multitude without,
was borne upon the night breeze to
the windows of the apartment. The
next instant all was still and hushed.
“Hark, sire,” said D’Artagnan,
“they have just told the people that
you are sleeping. You see that you
are still king.”
The queen looked with astonishment
at the singular man, whose
brilliant courage made him the equal
of the bravest; whose keen and ready
wit rendered him the equal of all.
Laporte entered the room, and announced
that the message he had
taken to the people had acted like
oil upon the waves, and that they
were waiting in respectful silence, till
the five minutes, at the expiration of
which they were to see the king,
should have elapsed. By the queen’s[Pg 612]
order, Louis was put into bed, dressed
as he was, and covered up to the
throat with the sheets. His mother
stooped over him, and kissed his forehead.
“Pretend to sleep, Louis,” said
she.
“Yes,” said the king, “but not
one of those men must touch me.”
“Sire,” said D’Artagnan, “I am
here; and if one of them had that
audacity, he should pay for it with his
life.”
The five minutes were over. Laporte
went out to usher in the mob;
the queen remained standing near the
door; D’Artagnan concealed himself
behind the curtains of the bed. Then
was heard the march of a great multitude
of men, striving to step lightly
and noiselessly. The queen raised
with her own hand the tapestry that
covered the doorway, and placed her
finger on her lips. On beholding her,
the crowd paused, struck with respect.
“Come in, gentlemen—come in,”
said the queen.
There was apparent in the mob a
degree of hesitation which resembled
shame; they had expected resistance,
had anticipated a contest with the
guards, bloodshed and violence; instead
of that, the gates had been
peaceably opened, and the king, ostensibly
at least, was unguarded save by
his mother. The men in front of the
throng stammered out an excuse, and
attempted to retire.
“Come in, gentlemen,” said Laporte,
“since the queen desires it.”
Upon this invitation, a man, bolder
than the rest, entered the room,
and advanced on tiptoe towards the
bed. He was followed by others,
and the chamber was rapidly filled,
as silently as if the new-comers had
been the most humble and obsequious
courtiers. D’Artagnan saw every
thing through a hole he had made in
the curtain. In the man who had
first entered, he recognised his former
servant Planchet, who, since he had
left his service, had been a sergeant
in the regiment of Piedmont, and who
was now a confectioner in the Rue
des Lombards, and an active partisan
of the Fronde.
“Sir,” said the queen, who saw
that Planchet was a leader of the mob,
“you wished to see the king, and the
king is here. Approach, and look at
him, and say if we resemble persons
who are going to escape.”
“Certainly not, your majesty,”
said Planchet, a little astonished at
the honour done to him.
“You will tell my good and loyal
Parisians,” continued Anne of Austria,
with a smile of which D’Artagnan
well understood the meaning,
“that you have seen the king in bed,
and sleeping, and the queen about to
go to bed also.”
“I will tell them so, madam, and
those who accompany me will also
bear witness to it, but”——
“But what?” said the queen.
“I beseech your majesty to pardon
me,” said Planchet “but is this
really the king?”
The queen trembled with suppressed
anger.
“Is there one amongst you who
knows the king?” said she. “If so,
let him approach, and say if this be
his majesty or not.”
A man, muffled in a cloak, which
he wore in such a manner as to conceal
his face, drew near, and stooping
over the bed, gazed at the features of
Louis. For a moment D’Artagnan
thought that this person had some
evil design, and he placed his hand
upon his sword; but as he did so, the
cloak slipped partially from before the
man’s face, and the guardsman recognised
the Coadjutor, De Gondy.
“It is the king himself,” said the
man. “God bless his majesty!”
“God bless his majesty!” murmured
the crowd.
“And now, my friends,” said Planchet;
“let us thank her majesty, and
retire.”
The insurgents bowed their thanks,
and left the room with the same caution
and silence with which they had
entered it. When the last had disappeared,
followed by Laporte, the
remaining actors in this strange scene
remained for a moment looking at
each other without uttering a word:
the queen standing near the door;
D’Artagnan half out of his hiding-place;
the king leaning on his elbow,
but ready to fall back upon his pillow
at the least noise that should indicate
the return of the mob. The noise of
footsteps, however, grew rapidly more[Pg 613]
remote, and at last entirely ceased.
The queen drew a deep breath of relief;
D’Artagnan wiped the perspiration
of anxiety from his brow; the
king slid out of his bed.
“Let us go,” said Louis.
Just then Laporte returned.
“I have followed them to the gates,
madam,” said the valet-de-chambre;
“they informed their companions that
they had seen the king and spoken to
the queen, and the mob has dispersed,
perfectly satisfied.”
“The wretches!” murmured Anne
of Austria; “they shall pay dearly for
their insolence.” Then, turning to
D’Artagnan, “Sir,” said she, “you
have this night given me the best
advice I ever received in my life.
What is next to be done?”
“We can set out when your majesty
pleases. I shall be waiting at
the foot of the private staircase.”
“Go, sir,” said the queen. “We
will follow you.”
D’Artagnan descended the stairs,
and found the carriage at the appointed
place, with the guardsman sitting
on the box. He took the hat and
coat of M. de Gondy’s coachman, put
them on himself, and took the guardsman’s
place. He had a brace of pistols
in his belt, a musquetoon under
his feet, his naked sword behind him.
The queen appeared, accompanied by
the king, and by his brother, the Duke
of Anjou.
“The Coadjutor’s carriage!” exclaimed
she, starting back in astonishment.
“Yes, madam,” said D’Artagnan
“but be not alarmed. I shall drive
you.”
The queen uttered a cry of surprise,
and stepped into the coach. The
king and his brother followed, and sat
down beside her. By her command,
Laporte also entered the vehicle.
The mantelets of the windows were
closed, and the horses set off at a
gallop along the Rue Richelieu. On
reaching the gate at the extremity of
the street, the chief of the guard advanced
at the head of a dozen men,
and carrying a lantern in his hand.
D’Artagnan made him a sign.
“Do you recognise the carriage?”
said he to the sergeant.
“No,” was the reply.
“Look at the arms.”
The sergeant put his lantern close
to the pannel.
“They are those of M. le Coadjuteur,”
said he.
“Hush!” said d’Artagnan. “Madam
de Guéménée is with him.”
The sergeant laughed. “Open the
gate,” said he; “I know who it is.”
Then, approaching the mantelet—”Much
pleasure, Monseigneur,” said
he.
“Hold your tongue!” cried D’Artagnan,
“or you will lose me my
place.”
The gate creaked upon its hinges;
D’Artagnan, seeing the gate open,
flogged his horses, and set off at a
rapid trot. In five minutes he had
rejoined the cardinal’s coach.
“Mousqueton,” cried D’Artagnan
to M. du Vallon’s servant, “open the
door of his majesty’s carriage.”
“It is he!” exclaimed Porthos,
who was waiting for his friend.
“In a coachman’s livery!” cried
Mazarine.
“And with the Coadjutor’s carriage,”
said the queen.
“Corpo di Dio, Monsieur d’Artagnan!”
said the cardinal, “you are
worth your weight in gold!”
We cannot attempt to give more
than these slight glimpses of the eight
volumes now lying before us, in which
the extravagance and exaggeration of
many of the incidents are only redeemed
by the brilliant diction and
animated narrative of their clever
but unscrupulous author. It would
be too lengthy to give even a
sketch of the chain of incidents that
succeeds those above detailed, or to
show how, according to M. Dumas,
D’Artagnan and his friends became
instrumental to the conclusion of the
treaty by which the hostilities between
Frondeurs and Mazarinists are for
the time brought to a close. The first
act of the war of the Fronde is over;
Louis XIV., now within a year of his
majority, re-enters the capital with
Anne of Austria and Mazarine,
D’Artagnan, now captain of mousquetaires,
riding on one side of his carriage,
and Porthos, now Baron du
Vallon, on the other. Baron Porthos
goes back to his estates, happy and
glorious; Aramis and Athos return to
the seclusion whence the stirring times
had called them forth, the latter leaving[Pg 614]
his son in charge of D’Artagnan,
who is to take the young man with
him to the Flemish wars. The restless
spirit of the Gascon abhors the
idea of repose.
“Come, D’Artagnan,” said Porthos,
as he got upon his horse to depart,
“take my advice; throw up your commission,
hang up your sword, and
accompany me to Du Vallon. We
will grow old together, whilst talking
of our past adventures.”
“Not so,” replied D’Artagnan.
“Peste! the campaign is just opening,
and I mean to make it. I hope to
gain something by it.”
“And what do you hope to become?”
“Pardieu! who can tell? Marshal
of France, perhaps.”
“Ah, ah!” said Porthos, looking at
D’Artagnan, to whose gasconading he
had never been able quite to accustom
himself. And the two friends parted.
“You will prepare your best apartment
for me, Madeleine,” said D’Artagnan
to his handsome hostess, as he
re-entered his hotel. “I must keep
up appearances, now that I am Captain
of Mousquetaires.”
By a Provisional Committee of Contributors.
While in floods the harvest lies,
Speculation let us cherish,
Let the Railway market rise!
Sick with losses, sad with cares,
Quit your burden now or never,
Cut the shop and deal in shares.
Half-pay captain, younger son,
Boldly throw while all are winners,
Laugh henceforth at debt and dun.
Shock’d at skittles, cards, or dice,
Thinks, except for Sunday travelling,
Railway gaming is no vice.
Quit the turf or loaded bone;
Like your brother-black Othello,
Own your occupation’s gone.
“Bulls” and “Bears,” and birds of prey,
See the coming spoliation,
Scent the premiums far away.
Show awhile your front so bright,
Then from your pursuers stealing,
Vanish sudden out of sight.
[Pg 615]
For the locomotive race;
Post your tin upon the engine,
Go ahead, and keep the pace.
Envious squires and nobles stare;
Even the Hebrew gewgaw vender
Turns sharebroker in despair.
Hints with horrid breath, “Old Clo’;”
Putting forth another feeler,
“Any shares?” he whispers low.
Nostrums, news, are at an end;
“Easy shaving” don’t affect us,
Silent even “The Silent Friend.”
Lazenby has lost his zest;
Widow Welch has ceased from troubling,
Weary Moses is at rest.
Deep within the torrent dip;
Even our children, young and tender,
Play at games of nursery scrip.
Quagmires black, and mountains grey,
Careless where or how it crosses,
Speculation finds the way.
Every mountain is made low;
Where we once were roughly jolted,
Light and lively now we go.
Hark! the whistle shrilly shrieks!
Speed—but mark! we don’t insure ye
‘Gainst the boiler’s frolic freaks.
This precaution prudence begs:
When you’ve seen your luggage enter’d,
Also book your arms and legs.
Blown into the air, survive—
These are trifles, while the broker
Quotes our shares at Ninety-five.
To his mangled remnants;—still
Calmly answers each Director,
“Charge the damage to the bill.”
[Pg 616]
(As the poet now would sing)
Him who meddles with hot iron,
Seem to us a pleasant thing.
Cross like nets the country soon;
Soon a railway (Atmospheric,)
Speeds our progress to the moon.
Soon the rapid trains will bring
Ores from Mars and fires from Venus,
Lots of lead from Saturn’s Ring;
Mercury from Maia’s Son;
And when summers look refractory,
Bottled sunbeams from the sun.
Seems to some that heavenward track,
T’other way there’s much more traffic,
Though not many travel back.
What a curve will Hades take!
When with joy the Shades discern us,
How Hell’s terminus will shake!
With the Central will combine,
Rattling both without compunction
Down the Tartarus incline!
For we’ve bridged its fiery way;
And the steamer on Cocytus
Long ago has ceased to pay.
Does the Stygian bark resign,
Glad to find a situation
As policeman to the line.
Who remains our sins to snub?
Pluto, Minos, Rhadamanthus,
All have joined the “Railway Club.”
Follow where her currents flow;
Sure to prosper—or to perish,
Follow, though to Styx we go!
The records of travellers in the
Livre des Etrangers at Modena, had
prepared us to expect nothing tolerable
at the night halts in our journey
through the Apennines to our projected
place of séjour during the great heats of
summer, the Bagni di Lucca. At the
mountain locandas, we were always
prepared, not to say resigned, to
encounter those various distresses
which seem light evils at a distance—knowing
that we could not starve as
long as eggs and maccaroni were to
be found, and even as to lodging we
were too old travellers to flinch at
trifles. The rural inn at Piave, which
looked more inviting than the great
one of the small place, was delighted
to receive us, and gave us good trout,
tolerable bread, and excellent honey:
we were in the midst of a lovely
country, we heard a limpid stream
running within a few yards of our
window; and what had we to fear?
But night came, and with it more annoyances
than one bargains for even
in Italy. A floor of thin planks which
had never fitted, and of which the
joinings, which had never been of the
kind called callidæ, were now widened
by time, was all that parted our small
bedroom from that of the horses.
Through these, and also through large
rat-holes, there came up copious ammoniacal
smells, which our mucous
membrane resented from the first;
and well it had fared with us had this
been all. We had never been so near
horses at night, and had no idea they
made such an incessant noise. One
horse stabled and littered for the night
were bad enough, but we had a whole
stableful; and just as we were forgetting
the fleas, and forgiving the
mosquitos, and sleep led on by indigestion
was heavy on our eyelids,
a snort, loud as a lion’s roar, made us
start. Then there came a long succession
of chump, chump, from the
molar teeth, and a snort, snort, from
the wakeful nostril of our mute companions,
(equo ne credite, Teucri!)—one
stinted quadruped was ransacking
the manger for hay, another was
cracking his beans to make him
frisky to-morrow, and more than one
seemed actually rubbing his moist
nose just under our bed! This was
not all; not a whisk of their tails
escaped us, and when they coughed,
which was often, the hoarse roncione
shook the very tressels of our bed; in
short, we never suffered such real
nightmare before. We dreamt stethoscopes
and racks. But morning came,
and, with it, morning freshness and
morning sound. The wood-pigeons are
cooing, the green hills just opposite
seem to have come closer up to our window
to wish us good-day; so we throw
open our little casement, to let out the
gaseous compounds from bed and
stable. How elegantly do the dew-bedded
vines take hold of the poplars
and elms, and hang their festoons of
ripening fruit from branch to branch!
But the sun begins to break a brilliant
pencil of rays over the hill-top,
nor will he take long to leave the screen
and uncover himself; indeed, in less
than a quarter of an hour, he will have
stared us quite out of countenance, and,
long before the hour of his advent shall
have been completed, the birds, which
till now have been all activity, will
become torpid, the pigeons will have
given over their cooing, and the sparrow
his chirp; so the fish that has not
yet breakfasted had better make haste,
for his are chariot-wheels which have
been looked after overnight, and
linchpins that never come out; nor
has he had one break-down or overturn
since he first set off on his Macadamized
way. In haste to escape
from the heat of the plains of Tuscany,
we were not sorry when we
saw the douaniers of Pistoia, the last
of its cities. This town is dulness,
not epitomized, but extended over a
considerable space; its streets are
many, long, and, what is not usual
in Italy, wide. There is no population
stirring; the very piazza is without
activity; and, if you leave it, you
may walk a mile between very large
houses, churches, convents, and palaces,
without meeting any one. Pistoia,[Pg 618]
in short, is an improvement on
Oxford in the long vacation—the
place, however, has its ancient fame,
has given birth to two or three distinguished
literati, and figured in the
civil wars. The fifteenth century records
among others the name of Cini,
whose epitaph we saw in the cathedral;
and the author of the Riciardetto
was, we believe, also one of its
citizens. In its immediate vicinity
fell Catiline. They say the Italian
language is spoken here with great
purity of accent, which is remarkable,
as it is only twenty miles from the
guttural and inharmonious speech of
Florence. It was not our purpose to
explore its decayed manufactures, if
such there still exist at all, of fire-arms
and organs; indeed, we know not if
pistols and organ-pipes have any thing
particular to do with it; so, after refreshment
of the cattle, we passed on
through a beautiful country at its
most beautiful season, and thought
we had seldom seen any thing more
striking than the views from Serravalle,
or those about Pescia and Monte Catino.
The high, almost the highest Apennines
were right a-head; and could
we have taken the wings of the bird,
or of the morning, and lighted on
any of those peaks at no great distance,
we should have looked directly
down on to the Mediterranean, and
almost into the gulf of La Spezzia;
we should have seen the long Ligurian
promontory in the distant horizon
to the right, and have embraced
Leghorn, Elba, Gorgona,
and the coast as far as Piombino,
in the opposite direction. An
imperceptible ascent conducts from
the town of Lucca towards its baths;
and you may expect, in about three
hours, to have accomplished its sixteen
miles. The road follows the
long windings and beautiful valleys of
the Serchio, of which, harmless as it
looks, we read on all the bridges records
of its occasional violence, and of
their repeated destruction. After a
morning’s ride, to which there are
few equals even in Italy or Switzerland,
we begin to get our books, and
paper, and light luggage, out of the
nets and pockets of the carriage—for
there are the Bagni Caldi, about a
mile before us. It is not our purpose
to describe the humours of an Italian
watering-place; but let it not be supposed
that this retreat is the happy
thought of our own restless population.
The English have had nothing
to do with bringing the baths of
Lucca into notice or fashion, although
they are at present among its principal
inhabitants from June to September.
Hither flock in summer the
families who have established themselves
in winter-quarters at Florence
or Pisa; and here they soon get
possession of all the cracked pianos,
and strolling music-masters who come
on speculation, and forthwith begin a
series of screaming lessons, called
singing, executed by English young
women, studious of cheap accomplishments,
to the infinite distress of all
who pass by their open windows, at
whatever hour! As the baths are
frequented by the little court of Lucca,
there is a residenza, a casino, and
tables for play. There are two or
three good hotels or tables-d’hôtes,
and there is a shabby little coffee-house,
and a handful of Balzacs and
Paul de Kocks at one circulating library.
There is one butcher and one baker
at each of the villages, privileged dispensers
of their respective commodities.
There is a scarcity of poultry,
of fresh butter, and vegetables; but
there is abundance of maccaroni.
There are two grocers, who both supply
amateurs with English pickles, Harvey’s
sauce, Warren’s blacking,
Henry’s magnesia, James’s powder,
and the other necessaries of life. The
houses are generally let for the season,
and the rent of the best is as
high as £4 a-week. The furniture is
old and bad, but tolerably clean.
Ascend any of the hills, and you look
down on roofs that have scarcely any
chimneys. Whenever you ride or
walk, you have a hill on the right
and left of you, and a river making
its way against the opposition of huge
masses of stone, and angular impediments
from the turns of the valley
itself. On these hills, you have uniformly
vines below; and when you
get above the vines, you walk entirely
among the chestnut-trees which constitute
the real riches of the country.
The best office, however, of the hills, is
not the production of fruit-trees, but[Pg 619]
the screen they afford against the
Italian sun. The early sunset here
is worth all the wine of the territory,
which is scarce and very bad. In the
evenings of July and August, there is
a turn-out of equipages that have
figured on the Boulevards and in
Hyde Park, which commonly make
a halt opposite the little shabby coffee-house,
to eat bad ices, and do the
agreeable to each other—the rush-bottomed
chairs at the door being occupied
the while by a set of intelligent
young men, with mustache, who smoke
bad cigars, and cultivate as elsewhere
the charm of each others’ classical
conversation. Montaigne was here
in the 15th century, and Fallopius,
he of the trumpets, came here to be
cured of deafness—which is one of
the infirmities which the Latin inscription
declares to have yielded to
the use of the waters. Lorenzo di
Medici came to talk platonism and
the fine arts at a place which will
never know either any more; and,
from a Latin letter extant, was summoned
from the Bagni to the death-bed
of his wife. Ladies have often
been recommended to the baths to be
cured of sterility; and, from what we
have seen, we think there are far
more unpromising places. Doctors,
whose names only are known, but
who were probably men of learning,
have written on these salutary
springs, and modern flippancy has
at present forborne them. We
have no Quack to patronize them;
the “numen aquæ” is not violated
in print at least by jobbing apothecaries;
but there is Gentile di Foligno,
and Ugolino di Monte Catino,
and Savonarola, and Bandinelli
(1483,) and Fallopio (1569,) and
Ducini (1711,) who have written
books, of which the object, as they are
in Latin, is not assuredly what there
is too much reason to believe it is,
when such books are now presented
to the world. Of the waters, (which,
like those of Bath, contain minute
portions of silex and oxide of iron,)
the temperature differs at the different
establishments—and there are
three; 43° Reaumur is assigned as the
highest, and 35° 24′ to two others.
We were stranded at this pleasant
place of endurable ennui for
three long months, during which there
was no going out from nine to five
p.m. Our society afforded little resource,
our reading less. When the
weather permitted—that is, in the
delicious, incomparable month of
October—we made little excursions
to Barga, Ponte Nero, &c. &c.,
and always returned delighted; nor
were our walks of shorter distance
unproductive of interest. The Lucchese
are the most industrious people in the
world, and their agriculture made us,
pro tempore, amateurs of rural economy.
We will not bore the reader
with Georgics such as ours; but if
he will accept, in place of picture
galleries and churches, the “quid
faciat lætas segetes” of this far from
miserable population, we will cheerfully
take him with us in our walks.
Agriculture Round Lucca.
The bearded wheat, or triticum,
not the siligo, or common wheat of our
English culture, was the plant which,
whenever the attributes of Ceres
were to be represented on ancient
coins, was selected for that purpose;
but the Lucchese territory, where the
Cerealia in general abound, offers
few specimens of either kind. These
productions seem afraid of their ears
in the neighbourhood of the Great
Turk, who is the great tyrant here,
and, together with the rice, monopolizes
three-fourths of all the land devoted
to the culture of grain; the
millet (miglio,) the panixa (panico,)
Indian wheat (sagena,) together with
the lupins, and a variety of peas,
beans, and lentiles, occupy the remainder.
“The Great Turk is a
great eater, is he not?” “Yes,” replied
the peasant who cultivated him,
“mangia come Cristiano,”—he eats
like a Christian all he can get out of
the ground; only, the more he gets
the better he looks for it—which is
not always the case with Christians.”
There are two kinds of Gran Turco, or
maize; that sown in May is of rather
better quality than the other, and[Pg 620]
produces on an average 10 lbs. more
per sack in weight than that which
is sown afterwards in June. In order
to secure a good crop, it is necessary
that the ground should be well manured
with lupins, which are either
grown for this single purpose the
year before, and left to rot, or boiled
to prevent their germination, and then
scattered over the field. The Grand
Turk commonly carries but one head
on his shoulders, but occasionally we
have remarked two or more on the
same stem. In the year 1817, the
sack (160 lbs.) fetched fifty-eight
pauls; while wheat was seventy-eight,
and even the chestnut flour sold
at fifty; so that, even in the Lucchese
territory, they have their approach
to famine in bad years.
Sagena.
Pliny mentions the Sagena, under
the name of Saracenic millet, as a
thing which came from India, and was
first brought into Italy in his own
time. Herodotus speaks of its cultivation
by the Babylonians. The
Saracens used it in the fourteenth
century for making bread, as do the
Lucchese to this day; it is, however,
lightly esteemed, and not used at all
when other corn abounds, but thrown
into the hencoop to fatten poultry.
It is a beautiful thing to see the high
jungle of this most elastic plant bending
to the breeze, and displaying, as
it moves, its beaded top, looking at a
distance like so many flowers; but,
when seen nearer, exhibiting racemes
(on highly polished stems) of small
pedunculated berries, in mitre-looking
capsules. When the seed has been
shaken from the plant, the tops are
brought together, and form those excellent
besoms which, throughout southern
Europe, supply the place of birch-broom,
than which they are more elastic,
not so brittle, and much cleaner.
The ultimate fibrils of this plant are
sometimes sold in little bundles for the
purpose of being slit, and receiving
the small Neapolitan firework called
gera foletti, which scintillates like a
fire-fly. Other kinds of millet and
pannick are also grown here; care being
taken to plant them far from the vine
and mulberry, as they make considerable
demands on the soil. Rice is
said to have constituted the sole aliment
of the republicans of early
Rome, and it is still largely cultivated
in many parts of Italy. In the low-land
about Viareggio, it monopolizes
the ground almost as much as the
Grand Turk in the more interior parts
of the country.
Lupins
Lupins are largely cultivated, both
for their own intrinsic value, and to
induce the growth of other plants.
“We are bitter,” say the Lupins in
an Italian work on agriculture; “but
we enrich the earth which lacks other
manure, and by our bitterness kill
those insects which, if not destroyed,
would destroy our successors in the
soil. You owe much, O husbandmen!
to us Lupins.”
Hemp.
Invaluable plant—pride of intelligent
agriculture—that tendest thine
own fibre—and strength to him that
rightly cultivates thee—and constitutest
the greatest element of mechanical
power! What does not England—the
world itself—owe to that growth
which we now contemplate! Armies
are encamped within thy walls—thou
towest forth the ship of discovery on
her venturous way, and carriest man
and his merchandise to the Equator
and to the Pole! Vain were the auspicious
breeze unless it blew upon thy
opening sails; and what were the
sheet-anchor, but for that cable of
thine which connects it with the ship.
Vegetable iron! incomparable hemp!
Extemporaneous memory can scarcely
follow thy services. Talk of the
battering-ram—but what propelled it
forward? The shot, whizzing in the[Pg 621]
teeth of adverse winds, carries thy coil
to snatch the sailor from the rock
where he stands helpless and beyond
aid from all the powers or productions
of man and nature but thine! Thy ladder,
and thine alone, can rescue from the
house on fire! Look at the fisheries
all over the world—the herrings of
Scotland and the cod of the Baltic
might defy us but for thee. What
were wells and windlasses without
thee? useless as corkscrews to empty
bottles. Thou art the strong arm of
the pulley and the crane. Gravitation
itself, that universal tyrant, had
bound all things to the earth but for
thy opposition. The scaffolds were
thine from which grew the Colosseum,
and the Pyramids have arisen in thine
arms. The kite of science, which
went cruising among thunder-clouds
to bring down to a modern Prometheus
the spark which ignites the
storm, was held by fibres of thine.
The diver and the miner cling to thee
for safety, and they that hunt the
wild-bird’s egg on the sea-shaken
cliff, as they swing over the frightful
abyss. With the lasso the bold
Matador, like the Retiarius of the
ancient arena, makes the cast that
is for life. Then the fine arts!—Carrara
sends her block for the
Laocoon by aid of thine; and what
were all the galleries in Europe but a
collection of gilt frames, but for
thy backing and support. By thy
subserviency alone (for what were
panel or laminated copper for such
gigantic works?) did Raffaelle bequeath
so many legacies of his immortal
genius. It is the strength of thy
fibres that is the strength of the loaded
supper-tables of Paul Veronese;
and the velvets, the furs, the satins
of Titian and Vandyke, are quilted
upon thee. Nor disdainest thou to
render to man, who bruises thee to
try thy virtue, a thousand humbler
services. Thou preservest our horses
from flies, our fruit from birds; and
who has not felt how thou cheerest
the weary length of continental travelling,
by the crack of thy whipcord
at the approach of a new relay?
Here our friend Anamnesis seemed
fatigued, as if he thought he had spun
a sufficiently long yarn on the subject;
so we prevailed on him to
prosecute the walk, as evening was
beginning to close in—not, indeed,
without apprehension that he would
make a stand at several other interesting
plants on which it might suit
him to prelect!
Hemp, when cut, is left to dry for
a week; it is then immersed for an
other week in water; after which it is
flayed of its skin—a process which is
conducted either by the hand, leaving
the stem in this case entire; or by subjecting
the whole plant to a bruising
process, conducted by a machine.
Besides the above-mentioned grain,
the ground produces plenty of vegetables,
but of an inferior quality, as
are all Italian fruits, and most of the
leguminous productions also, from
want of care. Even as to flowers, you
would find it difficult to make up a
bouquet, unless of ferns, which here
abound. The only cultivated flower,
except a few dahlias and sunflowers,
are the yellow petals of the lucchini, a
kind of vegetable marrow, which creeps
and creeps till its twisted tendrils and
broad leaves occupy, by continual encroachment,
the whole field where
they germinate. Besides the fruit
of this plant, which we begin to be
supplied with about August, its young
leaf and stalk are boiled like kail for
common greens; and its yellow flower,
a little later, makes a frittura, which
is in request. Fruits are plentiful,
and some of them good; but, for the
greater part, of a very inferior quality.
Strawberries, and particularly raspberries,
(lampóni,) are found throughout
the season; which, commencing
with these, and a scanty supply of
currants and gooseberries, (the latter
very poor indeed, and the first quite
inferior to our own,) brings us fine
figs of many species and in vast quantities.
Apples and pears have their
kinds, and many distinctive names,
but are without flavour. The great
supply of the raspberry and small
Alpine strawberry is about midsummer
The next-door-hood of all the
Scotch families is now fragrant, “on
all lawful days,” with the odour of
boiling down fruit for jams and marmalades
for winter consumption. As
autumn comes on, heaps of watermelons,
piled like cannon-balls under
the chestnut-trees, display their promising
purple flesh, and look cooling
and desirable, but are not to be attempted[Pg 622]
twice under penalty of gastric
inconvenience. Plums and nuts
abound, and are followed by a second
course of hard, unripe, and tasteless
nectarines and peaches. The season
is closing fast, for the prickly pods of
the ripening chestnut now begin to
gape, and the indifferent grapes of the
district attain their imperfect maturity,
and are gathered for the wine-press.
September is in its last week,
and in less than another month we
must all migrate somewhere for the
winter. The baths, on the 15th of
October, are quite empty.
Trees.
A good walnut-tree is as good to a
poor man as a milk-cow. “I would
not sell either of those walnut-trees in
my garden for thirty scudi a-piece,” said
a peasant to us; and, observing that
we looked as if we would not like to
tempt him, asked us if we had seen
the large walnut-tree of Teraglia, (we
had, and had pic-nicked very nearly
under it,) “because,” added he, “the
proprietor of that tree refused sixty
scudi for it last week, e ha ragione, for
it is a nonpareil. A good tree like those
in my garden yields me eight sacks of
shelled fruit on an average every year;
and a sack of walnuts fetches from a
scudo to ten pauls (four shillings and
sixpence) in the market. So that my
trees, between them, bring me in one
hundred and sixty pauls (i.e. £4 English)
every year.” Indeed! and the
chestnut-trees opposite? Oh! in this
land of chestnut-trees we don’t pay
prezzi d’affezione for them—a good tree
standing in the plain may cost about
eight or ten scudi, and may yield about
four sacks of shelled fruit in a good
year; but it is a capricious tree even
in the plain; while those on the mountain,
the roots of which derive a precarious
subsistence from the uncertain
soil, are liable to be blown down, and
are made pollards of at an early age
to prevent this mishap; also, they are
frequently burned down by bonfires
kindled under them to destroy the furze.
The chestnut shoot is only four years
old before it begins to bear. Three
pounds of fresh chestnuts fetch about
one penny—dried, or in flour, about
double that price. The peasants bake
a little cake of the chestnut flour called
“netche,” about the thickness of a
crimpet, and having much the flavour
and appearance of potato scones.
This paste they bake between two hot
stones, with a couple of the leaves of
the chestnut (dried for the purpose by
the peasants) interposed. The baking
takes scarcely a minute, and the cakes
are then piled and packed, and sent
far and wide. The arms and the tops
of the chestnuts are made into charcoal,
so that no part of this important
tree is lost. We are here in the very
midst of forests of chestnut only—far
as the eye can reach in every direction,
and as far as vegetation will go
up every mountain side, its grateful
green forms a pleasing contrast to
those gloomy frequenters and favourites
of the mountain, the sombre pine
and dusky olive.
Several fine-sized olive-trees were
shown to us for sale, and said to be
good fruit-bearers, (no olive bears fruit
under ten years,) for twenty-five scudi
per tree. These trees were computed to
yield about two and a quarter to three
sacks of berries; whereof every sack
yielded a profit of three scudi for one
hundred to one hundred and ten pounds
of oil, which represents about the
quantity generally expressed. In retail,
Lucca oil, at the present moment,
is about one paul, and olives
about three farthings per pound.
Oaks.
We observe three kinds of oaks which
here both flourish and abound. The
Farnia, the Querci, and the Leccio—the
last evidently a corruption of
Ilex. The first kind grows with
amazing rapidity; in twenty years it is
a head and shoulders above all the
other trees which began life with it.
It has very long acorns, which are less
astringent than those of either of the
other trees, and very much preferred
by pigs. A common oak felled for
ship timber costs, where it stands,
from ten to fourteen scudi, and they
are in great request for the Leghorn
market.[Pg 623]
Insects.
Insects do not greatly abound in
the neighbourhood about Lucca.
Even the mosquito winds his horn
less frequently in our valley, than his
universality elsewhere would lead you
to expect. Our beds are free from
bugs, and fleas are not very troublesome.
Of the out-of-doors insects,
those which live upon the vegetable
kingdom are not very numerous, nor
of much variety. The Cassida, who
rejoices in lettuce, brings up his
family in other districts where the
lettuce abounds. Wanting the tamarisk,
we miss our little Curculio, who
thrives upon its leaves; and the
Bruchus pisi, for want of peas, is frequently
caught in the bean-tops.
But the republican armies of ants are
immense, and the realm of bees is uncircumscribed;
as no birds of prey,
neither the audacious robin, nor the
woodpecker, tapping away on the hollow
beech-tree, diminish their hordes.
But if the fowls of the air be few, the
nets of entomologists abound. Slaters
of an immense kind, and spotted, and
small mahogany-coloured Blattidæ, are
found under stones, which also conceal
hordes of predatory beetles and
scorpions, which bristle up at you as
you expose them; and nests of tiny
snakes, that coil and cuddle together,
from the size of crowquills to the
thickness of the little finger. During
June and July, the monotonous
Cicadæ spring their rattles in the trees
around, and one comes at last even to
like their note, in spite of its sameness.
A little later, flies and wasps
send their buzzing progeny into our
dining-rooms, to tease us over our
dessert, like troublesome children: at
the same period, some of the larger
families of Longicorns abound, and
one of them, Hamaticherus moschatus,
musks your finger if you lay hold of
him. In the July and August evenings,
fire-flies scintillate on a thousand
points around you, and swarm along
the hedges, lighting each other to bed,
till about midnight, which is their
curfew; for you seldom meet one of
these lantern-bearers later, though
you may still, in returning from a late
party, be stopped with momentary
admiration at beholding a magnificent
glow-worm burning her tail away at
a great rate, and lighting up some
dark recess unvisited by star or
moon, herself a star, and giving sufficient
light to enable you to read the
small print of a newspaper a foot off!
But who shall attempt to describe his
first acquaintance with the fire-fly!
We have seen birthday illuminations
in London and in Paris; we have
seen the cupola of St Peter’s start
into pale yellow light, as the deepening
shadows of night shrouded all
things around; we have seen the
Corso, on Moccoletti night, a long
fluctuating line of ever renewed light,
from the street to the fourth story—an
illumination sui generis, and “beautiful
exceedingly;” but noise and confusion
are around all these as you
approach them. But, oh! to plunge
suddenly into an atmosphere filled
with Lucciole in the quiet gloaming of
an Italian sky, amidst the olive
groves and plantations of Indian corn,
with no noise but the drowsy hum of
the huge stag beetle, (the only patrole
of the district,) or the yet fainter
sounds of frogs complaining to each
other of the sultriness of the night, or
the monotonous hymn, at the peasant’s
door, addressed to the Virgin! Your
first impression is unmixed delight—your
next, a wish probably that you
could introduce the fire-fly into England.
Could one empty a few hatfuls
along Pall-Mall or Bond Street,
on opera nights, what an amazement
would seize the people! We swept
them up into the crown of our hat,
and could not get enough of them;
then we set them flying about our
room, putting out the lights and shutting
the shutters; and then we caught
them, and began to look more closely
at the sources of our delight, and to
examine the acts and deeds of these
wonderful little creatures. As to the
light itself, we soon perceived that, in
reality, the fire-fly emitted it from two
sources; for, besides his steady light,
which never varied, there came, we
saw, at intervals, flicks or sparks
of far greater brilliancy, like the
revolving light of the beacon on the
sea-shore, only that the light here
was never wholly eclipsed, but merely[Pg 624]
much abated. We soon perceived,
too, that those sudden jets of light
came and went at vastly irregular
intervals; sometimes in very quick
succession, sometimes less frequently—from
which observation, we concluded
that this dispensation of his
rich endowment did not proceed from
any motion of the fluids in the animal
economy, analogous to our own circulation—it
being far too irregular and
inconstant to depend on any such
regulated movement. On removing
the head of a Lucciola, this intermitting
light immediately ceased; but the
other—the permanent, steady, and
equable light—remained unchanged,
and was not extinguished for from
sixty to seventy hours after the
death of the insect, unless the body
was immersed in oil or alcohol, which
extinguished it presently. We found,
that though oil and alcohol quickly
extinguished the light, it became suddenly
much brighter when fading,
by plunging the insect into hot water;
but we did not find that it could be
restored when it had once entirely
ceased, by this or any other means,
as some French naturalists have affirmed;
and as to its exploding a jar
of hydrogen, as others have written,
we disbelieve it, because the temperature
of the insect is far too low. We
think, then, for the present, that there
are two distinct repositories, or two
different sources, of light in the fire-fly;
and that while one depends on
the head, and is a strictly vital phenomenon,
the other is altogether independent
of any physiological law of
the nervous or circulating system.
We have a great respect for ants;
but we do not go the length of some
of their historians, or believe them to
be, any more than ourselves, infallible.
We have seen a laborious ant
(magni Formica laboris) tugging a
snail-shell (for some reason only
known to himself) up a hill, stopping
to take breath, and going cheerily to
work again till he had nearly accomplished
his ascent, and found himself
on the very edge of its summit. Here
he has been surrounded by friends,
officious busy-bodies, who, intending no
doubt to help him, have got into the
shell, in place of lending him a hand,
till their added load was too much,
and the unfortunate ant has been
obliged to loose its hold and let them
go, shell and all! Then off they
would send, very much frightened no
doubt at the overturn; while he, having
remained stationary a moment as
if to watch its results, takes his resolution,
and proceeds on his journey
without his load. In brushing the
grass for insects, we have constantly
found that the ants, with their mouths
full, fight with each other, or with
their brother captives, and are quite
unaware of their bondage. For while
most other insects, on opening the
net, are glad to escape by flying or
leaping, these will remain as if to
secure their booty, and turn even
misfortunes to account. Often have
we watched their battles, which are
battles indeed!—battles, in which
every man of them seems to think the
day depends on his own courage and
activity. We have never been able
to make out which were the best battalions
of these variously coloured
troops; for all of them fight to the
death, and show no quarter. We have
seen on some large tree the ants running
up and down, and picking off
individual enemies from a horde of
smaller kind and reddish colour below.
We have occasionally knocked
off one or two of the giants, who, falling
alive into the midst of their enemies,
were surrounded, spread-eagled,
trampled upon, and either lacerated
to death, or killed by their own formic
acid, in a very short space of time indeed.
We have seen all this and marvelled;
but we were never sufficiently
in the confidence of either the invaders
or the invaded to know their motives
for fighting. It could not be for territory,
for they had all the world before
them; it could not be for food,
for they were full.
We never could make out why flies
seem fond of walking over dead spiders;
for we will not impute to them our
unworthy feelings of enduring hatred
and hostility. That insects had no
brains in their heads to direct and
guide their progressive movements,
or form focuses for their passions,
had long ago to us been plain. Besides
all that we once committed ourselves
by writing on the subject, we[Pg 625]
have done many other cruel things;
such as dividing insects, (whether at
the union of the head with corselet, or of
the corselet with the abdomen,) and
we have found that the segments to
which the members were articulated
carried on their functions without the
head. The Elytra would open the
wings, and the legs would move, as
by association they had moved in the
perfect insect. The guidance of the
head was destroyed, yet the legs
pushed the abdomen and corselet on;
so that a disapproving friend had to
divide his sympathy, and to feel for
each of the pieces. And what appeared
to us worthy of remark was, that
whereas, when a snake was decollated,
it was only the tail that continued to
wriggle—when a worm was divided,
all the segments writhed in the same
way, and manifested an equal irritability;
showing the difference between
creatures of annulated structure,
according as they have or have
not a brain. A new argument against
the brain as the organ of sensation,
was afforded to us by the conduct of
many insects of voracious propensities.
We took locusts and grilli; we
held them by their wings, and we
presented them with their own legs
for dinner; and on our veracity we
can affirm, that on no single occasion
did the animal fail to seize his foot;
and having demolished the toes and
the tibia, with all the meat upon it,
proceed to demolish up to the very
end of the trochanter! Nor were
they more tender of their own antennæ,
of which, when we had duly
convinced a sceptical friend, he exclaimed—It
seems impossible; but
there is no doubting the fact!
Insects (who would have thought
it?) lose a great deal by insensible
transpiration; from one-tenth to one-quarter
of their whole weight, as we
have abundantly ascertained by
series of experiments, for which we
have the tables to show. A very interesting
fact respecting the difference
of irritability of insects from that of
the higher animals, is this: the temperature
of man and the mammalia is
in health always the same, and varies
very inconsiderably in disease. External
heat and external cold do not produce
a blood, in man, warmer at the
equator than at the pole. This is not the
case with insects, whose mean temperature
may be about 80°; but the
thermometer inserted into their bodies
may be made to rise or fall by bringing
any cold or warm body in contact
with their external surface. You may
thus sink the temperature of an insect
to 50° or raise it to 100°, and the
insect continue alive. This is a very
curious fact, and shows the inaccuracy
of Hunter’s description or definition of
life—”That it was that which resisted
the physical agency of cold and heat.”
Insectorum duorum (e genere Cantharidum)
in coitu deprehensorum, extincto
a nobis uno, alterum per dies
plures, nullo alio quàm organorum
sexus vinculo sibi adstrictum, amicæ
suæ corpus sursum et deorsum trahentem,
mirantes vidimus!—Spanish flies,
you exclaim!—as if he had not taken
a dose of his own powder; but after
the joke is over, we think this is
another poser for the advocates of
insect intelligence. We found that
if either of two insects was destroyed
in coition, that state was not
interrupted for two or three days.
The insects on which are observed
this remarkable circumstance, were
the Cantharis oclemero, and some
others. Spanish flies, you will say?
That accounts for it; but at present
we are not mystifying our indulgent
readers.
Shooting Fish.
Long before the middle of September
we are frequently startled, before
we have proceeded a hundred yards,
by the popping of guns amongst the
vineyards and chestnut woods, but
more frequently in the direction of
the stream that winds along our valley—and
the sight of one or two
of the chasseurs on the road may well
surprise any not accustomed to the
sports of the Lucchese.—Here are two
of them, each with a gun on his
shoulder, coming up the stream. One
has shot three four-ounce dace, which
dangle by his side; the other has a bag
full of small fry, shot as they frisked
about in shoals near the water’s edge!
an ounce of sand exploded to receive[Pg 626]
about the same amount of fish! The
man who has shot the dace is proud
of his exploit, and keeps turning them
round and round to gauge their dimensions,
as if they were partridges!
Don’t think, however, they have
killed off all the fish of the stream.
Besides that string of four-ounce dace,
we have every now and then a sample
of barbel and trout. One man
has purchased the monopoly of the
fishery within two miles, and for
which he pays twelve crowns by
the year. He sells his trout at two,
and two and a half, pauls per pound,
and we should have thought that he
made a good thing of it; but they lose
their fish: the torrents come and empty
the holes, and they have nothing for
it but to stock them again—an event
which, he assured me, frequently took
place. Besides, fly-rods and flies
have been introduced by an English
shopkeeper, and there is no legal provision
against them.
Owls.
There comes a man with an owl in
a basket and another tied by the leg
on a pole covered with red cloth;
another accompanies him with a bundle
of reeds, through which a rod runs,
smeared all the way down with birdlime.
This apparatus he disposes on
a hedge or cover of any kind—the
little owl (Civetta) sits opposite on his
pole—the birds come to tease him,
and fly on the birdlime twig, when, if
it be a sparrow, he is effectually detained
by the viscus only—if a blackbird,
pop at him goes an old rusty
gun. “We sometimes catch twenty
tomtits before breakfast,” said a modest-looking
sportsman, modestly,
but not shamefacedly, showing us one
thrush and one linnet.
An image-man told me to-day, that
after the trade for classical models—Apollos
and Venuses—had gone out,
and nobody would buy, Tam o’ Shanter
and Souter Johnny operated a good
revival of the fine arts for several
months. How much, then, the models
from the antique, do towards improving
our taste! and how absurd to set
up institutions with the expectation
of making the populace other than the
gross, unideal, matter-of-fact thing it
is, and always was, no doubt, even in
Athens itself!
The Improvisatore.
We heard one of these monsters last
night. The arena for his exhibition
might, but for the known liberality of
society, be thought objectionable—being
none other than the English
place of worship. But tout est sain
aux sains—or aux saints, if you please.
Charity covereth many sins; and if
there be a place upon earth where
charity reigns, it is at what you call
watering-places. Pindar was right,
αριστον μεν
υδωζ. If we were enquired
of, and propitiated by a fee, as to the
effects of the waters here, we should
give it as our opinion that they act
directly on the picrochole, or bitter
principle of bile, and carry it, soft as
milk, through the duodenal passages.
Our Improvisatore has, we understand,
been six times painted, (we
know not what saloons are so fortunate
as to possess his portrait,) but we
believe he has not been described.
When we saw him, his hair danced
wildly over his shoulders, as if electrified:
he had a quick eye, and wore
enviably well-fitting ducks: his neck,
besides supporting his head and all its
contents, supported an inextricable
labyrinth of gold chains; from every
buttonhole of his waistcoat the chains
they came in, and the chains they
came out, like the peripatetic man on
the Boulevards who sells them: his
gloves, well-fitting, and buttoning at
the wrist, were of the whitest kid,
and grasped a yet whiter and highly-scented
cambric: his boots shone
bright with varnish, and his face with
self-complacency. As the room filled,
he went round, giving the girls permission
to write subjects on bits of
waste (wasted!) paper, which set them
thinking at a great rate. Presently, a
second circuit round the room, to collect
the orders payable at sight—a
title such as the Lucciola, Italia, The
Exile, Woman’s Love, Man’s Ingratitude;[Pg 627]
after which he proceeds to fold
up and puts them into a large glass
vessel. Presently a small hand, properly
incited, dives down for a second
into the interior of the vase, and
brings up, between two of its fair,
round, turquoise-encircled fingers, the
scrap of paper. Its pretty owner
blushes, and timidly announces, “Bellini’s
Tomb;” Bellini’s Tomb is buzzed
about the room. At this juncture the
Duke, who has been expected, sends a
messenger to announce that we are
not to wait for him—a sly fellow the
Duke! The bard now concentrates
himself for inspiration, but begs us to
talk on, and not mind him. While he
waits for the afflatus divinus, and consults
the muses—and in fact his eyes
soon begin to betray possession—he
passes his hand over his parturient
forehead, while the os magno sonaturum
is getting ready; the labour-pains
are evidently on him; he hurls back
his hair, and fixes his eyes upon the
moon, (who has been looking at him
for several minutes through the window
opposite.) Full of her influence,
and not knowing there is such a place
as Bedlam in the world, he starts upon
his legs, makes two or three rapid strides
up and down the room, like a lion taking
exercise, or a lord of council and
session in Scotland preparing to pronounce
sentence, and means to be delivered
(mercy on us!) exactly opposite
our chair! All are attentive to
the godlike man; you might hear a
pin drop: the subject is announced
once and again in a very audible
voice; the touch-paper is ignited, the
magazine will blow up presently! Incontinently
we are rapt off to Père la
Chaise, where the great composer lies
buried, and a form of communication
is made to us on this suitable spot,
that Bellini is dead; then comes, in
episode, a catalogue of all the operas
he ever wrote, with allusions to each,
and not a little vapouring and pathos,
while a host of heroes and heroines
we never before heard of, is let loose
upon us; presently, a marked pause,
and some by-play, makes it evident
that he sees something, and cannot
see what the thing is; he shortly,
however, imparts to us in confidence,
though in a very low tone, for fear of
disturbing it—he sees, he assures
us, a female form stealing to the
young man’s tomb—the form of a
widowed lady—who is she? e la sua
madre! This was startling, no doubt;
though we, or many of us, were like
the cat in Florian, to whom the monkey
was showing a magic lantern
without a light, and describing what
she ought to have seen. Believing
her, however, to be there on such
good authority, we were getting very
sorry for Bellini’s mother, when we
were unexpectedly relieved, by finding
it was only a bit of make-believe;
for it was now divulged, che questa
madre che piangea il suo figlio, was
not in fact his personal mother, but
“Italy” dressed up like his mother,
and gone to Paris on purpose to weep
and put garlands on the composer’s
tomb, amaranth and crocus, and whatever
else was in season. Thunders of
applause—we hope the new chapel is
insured!-for the assiduo ruptæ lectore
columnæ is as old as earthquake in
Italy. He now mopped his forehead,
and prepared for a new effort. The
English girls are already in raptures,
and their Italian masters, sitting by,
“ride on the whirlwind and direct the
storm.” The next subject which destiny
assigned to him, and inflicted on
us, was The Exile. A nicely manured
field or common place to sow and
reap on—and what a harvest it yielded
accordingly!—the dear friends! the
dear native hill! the honour of suffering
for the truth! (political martyrdom!)
the mother that bore him—(and
a good deal besides)—his helpless
children! (a proper number for
the occasion,)—all these fascinating
themes were dwelt on, one by one,
till, moved apparently at our emotion,
he dropt his menacing attitude, and,
mitigating his voice, assumed a resigned
demeanour, of which many of
his audience had long since set him
the example. He began to look down
mournfully, whereas he had a minute
ago looked up fiercely—a smile, to the
relief of the young ladies, stole over
his countenance, and having thrice
shaken his head to dispel whatever
gloomy thoughts might still be lingering
there, he carried us to the Exile’s
return, which brought of course the
natal soil and a second service of the
mother, sire, and son, with the addition
of a dog, a clump of trees, a church,
and a steeple. He compresses between[Pg 628]
his hands the yielding cambric
into a very small space, his body is
fixed, his legs are slightly apart, his
head wags, like a wooden mandarin’s,
with thoughts too big for utterance,
till the moment arrives for the critical
start, then, “Duplices tendens ad
sidera palmas,” he becomes quite Virgilian.
The unfurled cambric flutters
to the breeze of his own creation, and
coruscations of white kid and other
white materials pass and repass before
our eyes. He gives vent to his emotions
in tears, after a reasonable indulgence
in which, as he cannot (as
Tilburina’s confidante very properly
observes) stay crying there all night,
he gradually comes right again. Besides
all which, it is eight o’clock, and
he has still to do, and we to suffer,
Napoleon—whose ashes were just then
being carried to Paris, as we had read
in all the papers of last week. Glad
were we when they reached the Octroi,
and when the indulgent Barrière
passed them with all the honours of
the Douane. An old lady has twice
yawned, and many would follow her
example, but that the performer fascinates
his audience by staring at
them—like the boa at the poor bird
in the wood—and frightens them to
their seats for a few minutes longer.
At length one resolute chair moves;
two others are out of the ranks; new
centres of movement are establishing;
several shawls are seen advancing to
the door. The rout is complete, there
will be no rally, and the efforts of the
artist have been crowned (one hundred
and fifty scudi) with success. We
meet him every where. He honours
our table-d’hôte daily, where he
stays an hour and a half to bait—after
which we see him lounging in
the carriage of some fair compatriote
with herself and daughters. If we
are paying a morning visit, in he comes,
“glissarding it” into the drawing-room,
and bowing like a dancing-master;
nor does he disdain to produce
a small book of testimonials,
in which the subscribers have agreed
to give him a poetic character, and
compare him to a torrent, to a nightingale,
to an eagle, to an avalanche.
They who love flattery as a bee loves
honey, are all captivated, and almost
make love to him. Their albums are
rich in the spoils of his poetry, and
she is happy who, by her blandishment,
can detain him in conversation
for five minutes. Yet they own they
understand less than half of what he
says. Vexed with one to whom we
were talking, we thought rationally,
for permitting herself to be “so pestered
by a popinjay,”—”He is so
clever,” was the reply; “such an odd
creature, too. I wish you knew him. He
is in such a strange humour to-night.
Do you know he tells me he wishes
to marry an English girl? See! he is
gone into the balcony yonder to look
at the moon.” To be sure he was.
He came back looking somewhat wild,
and, walking in like a modern Prometheus,
down he sits, and the new inspiration
is presently bespoken for the
fly page of virgin scrap-book. Smoothly
flows the immortal verse, without
care, correction, or halt, for the lines
are the result of power that works
unerringly, (Pope blotted most disgracefully,)
and goes right ahead.
The precious morceau is concluded,
and the improvisatore’s name appears
in a constellation of zig-zags.
Tables D’hôtes—Mr Snapley.
Did you never meet Mr Snapley?—Mr
Snapley was the greatest of
bores—he bored holes in your self-complacency,
and riddled your
patience through and through; to put
up with him was hard, to put him
down was impossible, (your long
tolerated nuisance of fifty is always
incorrigible.) His bore was surprising
considering the smallness of his
calibre; like a meagre gimlet, he would
drill a small hole in some unimportant
statement, and then gather up
his opima spolia, and march off to the
sound of his own trumpet. For instance,
on convicting you of assigning
a fine picture to a wrong church or
gallery, he denied all your pretensions
to judge of the picture itself. He
had a reindeer’s length of tongue, (how
often did we wish it salted and dried!)
and the splutter of words it sent forth,
took off, as often happens, sufficient
observation of the miserably small
stock of ideas that he had to work
upon. He enjoyed, as we all do, the[Pg 629]
blameless pleasure of dining out as
often as he could; when, though he
did not consume all the provisions,
he would willingly have taken possession
of the whole of the talk, (that
being his notion of a conversation.)
When one had to dine at the same
table with him, one contrived to take
up a position as remote as possible
from the interruption of his thin, wiry,
ill-modulated voice—the false suavity
of which in saying impertinent things
was really so disagreeable, that one
would have renounced the society of
wit or beauty on the right hand, rather
than have been flanked by Mr Snapley
on the left, and thankfully have
accepted the companionship, pro hac
vice, of the plainest woman or the
dullest man of the party, to be only
completely out of his reach. Your
soup you might take in peace, for he
was at this time studying the composition
of the party, and the chances
of endurance or resistance inscribed
on the countenance of the guests; but
the moment an opportunity occurred
of correcting or cavilling with any of
those unprecise and generally unchallenged
observations, the interruption
of which is at the cost of the
quietness of the repast, Mr Snapley’s
voice was heard! You were too glad,
of course, to give up the trifling point
out of which he had raised a discussion;
but the earliest concession never
saved you, nor did you ever afterwards
escape the consciousness that
he was still hovering like a harpy
over the tablecloth, and ready to fall
foul of you again. Let the subject be
what it might, you had only to make
a remark in his presence, and without
his permission, to insure its contradiction.
“What a needless annoyance
in travelling it is for a family to
be stopped by douaniers, only to
extort money for not doing a duty
which would be absurd if done!”
“Why, really I don’t see that,” &c.
&c. “What a plague it is to send
your servant (a whole morning’s
work) from one subaltern with a
queer name, to another, for a lady’s
ticket to witness any of the functions
at the Sistine!” Well, it did appear
to him the simplest thing in the world;
it was ten times more troublesome
to see any thing in London! “What
a nuisance it is on quitting an Italian
city, to find the passport which has
already given you so much trouble
only available for three days, leaving
you liable to be stopped at the gate,
if sickness or accident have made you
transgress even by an hour!” “Why,
it is your own fault, it is so easy to get
it viséd again overnight.” All these
impertinencies were only πιδακος
εξ ιερης ολιγη λιβας. Besides all this,
Mr Snapley was a miserable monopolizer
of pompously advanced nothings.
He would not willingly suffer
any other man’s goose to feed upon
the common—he cared for nobody but
himself, and every thing that was or
he esteemed to be his—his very joints
were worked unlike those of another
man—he must have had a set of
adductors and abductors, of flexors and
extensors, on purpose. He was stiff,
priggish, precise, when he addressed
any gentleman with light hair and an
English complexion; but let him approach
any foreign buttonhole with a
bit of riband in it, then worked he
the muscles of his face into most grotesque
expression of interest or pleasure—(Tunc
immensa cavi spirant
mendacia folles!)—and you had a
famous display of grimace and deferential
civility, in bad French or
worse Italian. We have seen him
sneering and leering as he made his
way round a drawing-room at an
evening party, and bowing like a
French perruquier to some absurd
fool of a foreigner; and we have seen
him, a minute after, holding up his
head and cocking his chin in defiance,
if an English voice approached. When
any of us ventured to criticise any
thing foreign, he was up in arms, and
cock-a-hoop for the climate, the customs,
the constitution! He sneered
awfully at a simple gaucherie, but, to
make amends, had ever an approving
wink for the meanest irreverence;
any intellect, however feeble, being
secure of his praise if it only tried to
thwart the end for which it was given.
When not talking about himself,
which was seldom, he was evidently
occupied about his personel, with
which he was obviously satisfied. If
you talked of books, he settled for
you, in laconic sentences, works of
acknowledged merit—put down men of
uncontested superiority—but women
of title and tainted reputation, if they[Pg 630]
would but ask him to their parties,
became at once his favourites and his
oracles. He cunningly contrives to
get a good artist’s opinion on works of
art, and debits it as his own—a proceeding
which makes Mr Snapley
sometimes formidable in sculpture and
in painting. As to other topics, on
which educated men and accomplished
women converse, he would fain be as
profound as Locke with the one, and
as gallant as Fontenelle with the
other. For ourselves, who meet him
but too often, we would as soon approach
without necessity a huxter’s
mongrel growling under his master’s
cart, as venture near enough to examine
all the small-wares of one who
“hates coxcombs,” and is the very
prince of fops; laughs at pedants, and
only wants a little more learning to
attempt the character; with whom no
repetition of familiar acts can reconcile
you, and to whom no number of dinners
can conquer your repugnance.——Did
you ever meet Mr Snapley? We
are sure you must—the Snapleys are
a very old family—you may generally
know them by the nez retroussé,
(which our acquaintance, however,
had not.) We never knew but one
good-natured man with a nez retroussé,
and he was, if ever man was—a philanthropist.
Generally, however, beware
of the nez retroussé except in
women—you know its interpretation
chez elles;—and if you do, (on second
thoughts,) still beware.
Hints For Doctors.
Esquilias, dictumque petunt a Vimine collem—Juv.
* * * “I observed a gentleman in
black,” said our informant, “who
seemed to fix me across the table-d’hôte,
at dinner, in a way which soon
showed me I was an object of interest
to him. It was very odd! We were
not in Austria! I could not have offended
the police—nor in Spain, the
Inquisition. If I took of a particular
dish, his eye was on me again. They
did use to poison people in Italy, but
it was in the fifteenth century, and all
the Borgias were gone! What could
it mean? The very waiters seemed to
watch the man in black, and signals
of intelligence seemed to pass between
them as they went their rounds with
the dishes. After thus meeting the
eye of the unknown at intervals for
more than an hour, when the table
was beginning to clear, I rose, and
limped out of the room as well as my
complaints would let me, and was
sauntering a few steps from the door,
when judge of my terror on turning
round, to find him of the black coat at
my elbow! “In pain, sir, I see.” All
my alarm ceased in a moment. It was
pure philanthropy which had made me
an object of so much interest. “Yes,
sir, in great pain.” “You should take
care of yourself, sir. Rheumatic, are
you not?” “Very rheumatic.” “Well,
sir, you have come to the best place in
the world for rheumatism. The air,
the water, and proper treatment, will
soon set you up.” “Your report is
encouraging; but I have suffered too
long to hope much.” “Well, at any
rate, sir, let us not talk over your interesting
case in this heat. Come and
put your feet up on a chair in my
rooms, and we will drink a glass of soda-water
to your better health.” What
a kind-hearted man I had met with,
and how kind Providence is to us! I
now ventured to ask him his name.
“My name is Dr ——; and now, my
dear friend, just tell me your whole
case from the very beginning down to
now, for I am really interested in you.”
I told my case. “Put out your
tongue.” “Brown,” we thought we
heard him say. “Wrist—pulse
not amiss—but you require care, sir!
you require care! Clear case for the
medicine I gave so successfully last
week.” Finding myself thus fallen
into professional hands without intending
it, I said something introductory to
the mention of a fee. “True, I was
forgetting that; when one takes a
proper interest in one’s case, and hopes
to do good, fees are the last thing one
thinks of—two scudi if you please.”
So I found myself immediately booked
in a small memorandum-book, and
constituted his patient. Now came
civil promises to introduce me, &c.
&c. &c., and I took my leave delighted.
It is almost needless to say, that
in a very short time I found that my[Pg 631]
acquaintance had, like so many more,
commenced physician on the soil of
Italy. What will become of London
if all her apothecaries desert her at
this rate? For ourselves, reflecting on
the accomplishments of many of these
patriotic men, their learning, their
modesty, their disinterestedness, we
have often had a twinge of the philanthropic
extorted by the loss inflicted
on our native city—she may come
to want a doze of julap, and have
nobody to mix it!—and have said to
ourselves, as we have looked more
than one of these worthies in the face,
Ω αλειν Αθηναι,
Παλλαδος θ’ωρισματα,
Οιον στερησεσθ ανδρος!
One day after dinner a little bit of
gold rolled over the table to the
doctor, from a bluff-looking gentleman
opposite—it was well aimed—”There,
doctor! there’s your fee; but don’t you
begin again prating a parcel of stuff
to my wife about her complaints—she
is quite well—and if you frighten her
into illness, take notice, you will get
a different sort of fee next time!” All
this, half joke, half earnestly, must
have been very agreeable to the guests.
Private Music Party.
Let us try to describe the last
musical party at which we assisted.
A scramble amid piles of unbound
music; the right cahier found, snatched
up, and opened at the well-thumbed
solo with which she has already contended
for many a long hour, and now
hopes to execute for our applause.
Alas! the piano sounds as if it had
the pip; the paralytic keys halt, and
stammer, and tremble, or else run into
each other like ink upon blotting
paper, and the pedals are the only
part of the instrument which do the
work for which they were intended.
We should be sorry that our favourite
dog had his paw between them and
the lady’s slipper. The dust which
succeeds the concerto proves satisfactorily
that it is possible to be frisky
without being lively; its vulgarity is
so pronounced that it offends you like
low conversation. Another concerto
follows—ten folio pages! whew!!——Oh,
ye ebony and ivory devils! oh, for
an exorcist to put you to flight!
Cramped fingers are crossing each
other at a great rate; we really tremble
for the glue, and the pegs, and the
wires, and the whole economy of the
instrument, at that critical juncture
when the performers arrive at a piece
of mysterious notation, where a great
many tadpole-looking figures are
huddled together under a black rainbow.
At such a “passage” as this, it
seems one would think the house were
on fire, and no time to be lost; the
black mittens and the white now
Rob-Royishly invade each other’s territory;
each snatches up something and
carries it off, like the old marauders
of the Border country; and reprisals
are made, and lines of discord and
dissonance are establishing, which require
the police, the magistrate, and
the riot act. Bravo! bravo! bravo!
and the battle ceases, and the babble
commences. Place for the foreign train,
the performers par métier! Full of confidence
are they; amidst all their
smiles and obsequiousness, there is a
business air about the thing. As soon
as the pianist has asked the piano
how it finds itself, and the piano has
intimated that it is pretty well, but
somewhat out of tune, a collateral
fiddler and a violoncello brace up
their respective nerves, compare notes,
and when their drawlings and crookings
are in unison, a third piece of
music of indefinite duration, and as it
seems to us all about nothing, begins.
Our violinist is evidently not long
come out, and has little to recommend
him—he employs but a second-rate
tailor, wears no collar, dirty mustaches,
and a tight coat; he is ill at
ease, poor man, wincing, pulling down
his coat-sleeves, or pulling up his
braces over their respective shoulders.
His strings soon become moist with
the finger dew of exertion and trepidation;
his bow draws out nothing
but groans or squeals; and so, in order
to correct these visceral complaints, a
piece of rosin is awkwardly produced
from his trousers’ pocket, and applied
to the rheumatic member, with some
half-dozen brisk rubs in a parenthesis
of music. The effect is painfully ludicrous!——
I am sleepy, sleepy, begins the
piano! Sleepy, sleepy, mews Mr
Violin—very, very, very sleepy, dron[Pg 632]es
the drowsy four-stringed leviathan.
Oh, do try if you can’t say something,
something, something to enliven one
a bit! On this hint, the little violin
first got excited upon one string, and
then upon another, and then the bow
rode a hand-gallop over two at once;
then saw we four fingers flying as far
up the finger-board as they could go,
without falling overboard, near the
bridge—a dangerous place at all times
from the currents and eddies—and
there provoking a series of sounds, as
if the performer were pinching the
tails of a dozen mice, that squeaked
and squealed as he made the experiment.
The bow (like the funambulist
with the soles of his slippers fresh
chalked) kept glancing on and off,
till we hoped he would be off altogether
and break his neck; and now
the least harsh and grating of the
cords snaps up in the fiddler’s face,
and a crude one is to be applied; and
now—but what is the use of pursuing
the description? Let us leave the
old bass to snore away his lethargic
accompaniment for ten minutes more,
and the affair will end. The pianist,
the Octavius of the triumvirs, thinks
it necessary to excuse Signor ——,
telling us, “He has bad violin, he play
like one angel on good one”—but
hisht, hisht! the evening-star is rising,
and we are to be repaid, they say, for
all we have gone through! Signor * * *
is going to play. The maestro
advances with perfect consciousness
of his own powers; his gait is lounging,
he does not mean to hurry himself,
not he—his power of abstraction (from
the company) is perfect; he is going
to play in solitude before fifty people,
and only for his own amusement. He
placed himself at least a foot from the
piano, his knees touching the board,
his body rises perpendicularly from
the music-stool, his head turns for a
moment to either shoulder as if he
were glancing at epaulettes thereon,
and then he looks right ahead; he
neither has nor needs a book; with the
wide-extended fingers of both hands,
down he pounces, like a falcon, on the
sleeping keys, which, caught by surprise,
now speak out and exert all
their energies. Those keys, which a
few minutes ago vibrated so feebly,
and spoke so inarticulately, now pour
forth a continuous swell of the richest
melody and distinctest utterance. The
little wooden parallelograms at first
seem to be keeping out of their ranks
just to see what is going on, till, the
affair becoming warm, they can no
longer stand it, but grow excited and
take part in the general action. Relying
fully on the perfect obedience of
his light troops, and relaxing a little
from his erect attitude of command,
he gently inclines his body to the left,
leads his disposable force rapidly upwards
in that direction, where, having
surprised the post against which
they were dispatched, he recovers his
swerve, and they retrace with equal
precision and rapidity their course
from the wings to the centre.
Come, this is playing! This is
worth coming to; the instrument
seems but the organ of the man’s own
feelings; its mournful tones are only
a paraphrase of his sighs; its brilliant
arabesques are but the playful expression
of his own delight with every
thing and every body! His cheek is
warm, his eyes sparkle, his hands detonate
thunder and lightnings from
the keys, and he concludes as suddenly
as he began; the very silence is
felt, and the breathless guests, who
have watched the fingers and been
rapt by the tones, now burst forth
simultaneously in expressions of delight
and applause.
We read, no later than yesterday,
two very pungent leading articles in the
London daily journals, on the present
all-absorbing subject of railway speculation.
Both writers are evidently
well versed in the details of the novel
system; both possess some smattering
of political economy, sufficient at
least to enable them to form a judgment;
and both consistent in their
data and statistical information. Yet,
agreeing in these points, it is somewhat
singular to find that the Coryphæi
have arrived at diametrically
opposite conclusions. One of them
is quite clear, that if the present railway
mania (as he calls it) is permitted
to go on unchecked for a short
time further, the country will not only
be on the verge of bankruptcy, but a
general crash will be inevitable; that,
vast as the resources of Britain undoubtedly
are, she cannot, by any
exertion short of crippling her staple
commercial relations, furnish capital
enough for the fulfilment of a moiety
of the schemes already announced, and
thrown into the public market; that
the fact, which is incontestable, that a
large proportion of these shares were
originally, and are presently, held by
parties who have no means of paying
up the calls, but who are solely speculating
for the rise, must very soon
produce a reaction, and that such reaction
will be of the absolute nature
of a panic. Such are the opinions of
this writer, who is clearly of the restrictive
school. He holds, that the
government is bound, in such a crisis
as that which he rather states than
prophesies, to interfere at once with
an arbitrary order, and to prevent the
issue of any new schemes until those
already before the public are either
disposed of or exhausted.
How this is to be effected, the
writer does not sufficiently explain.
He points to immediate interference,
from which expression we are led to
believe he points at some such proceeding
as an Order in Council, to be
pronounced during the recess of Parliament.
If so, we may dismiss this
gentleman and his remedy in a very
summary manner. Such an Order in
Council would be worse than useless,
because it would be a manifest breach
of the constitution. As well might an
Order be issued to close our manufactories,
to restrict the amount of any
branch of produce, or to prevent parties
from forming themselves into
companies for the most blameless and
legitimate purpose. It is a strange
symptom of the credulousness of the
age, or rather of the ignorance of the
people in all matters relating to the
science of government, that, towards
the close of September last, some such
rumour was actually circulated and
believed, though its father was manifestly
a bear, and its birthplace the
Stock Exchange. But if this merely is
meant, that there lies with the Imperial
Parliament a controlling and interferential
power, and that the great
estates of the realm may be called
upon to use it, we do not question the
proposition. Whether, however, it
would be wise to use that power so
sweepingly as the journalist recommends,
or whether, practically, it could
be possible, are very serious considerations
indeed.
But the existence of any evil is denied
in toto by the other journalist.
In the crowded columns of the morning
prints, driven to supplement and even
extra-supplement by the overwhelming
mass of railway advertisements,
he can see no topic of alarm, but
“matter for high exultation, and almost
boundless hope.” His belief in
superabundance of capital, and its
annual enormous increment, is fixed
and steadfast. He considers the railways
as the most legitimate channel
ever yet afforded for the employment
of that capital, and the most fortunate
in result for the ultimate destinies
of the country. He compares—and
very aptly too—the essential difference
between the nature of the schemes
in which the public are now embarking
and those which led to the disastrous
results of 1825. His sole regret is,
that he must regard the present direction
of enterprise, “as an opportunity,
that is, facility of investment,
that from its nature can be but temporary,
though the profit of the investment
must, from the nature of[Pg 634]
things, be perpetual, and though even
the temporary facility may, and probably
will, last for some years.” This
is a hopeful, sunny-minded fellow,
with whose aspirations, did our conscience
permit us, we should be
thoroughly delighted to concur.
These writers may be taken as
examples of two numerous classes.
They are, in fact, the Trois Eschelles’
and Petit Andrés of the railroads.
The first consider every commercial
exertion consequent on a new discovery,
or the opening of a new channel
for investment, doubtful in itself, and
highly dangerous if hurriedly and unhesitatingly
adopted. The social system,
in their view, may suffer quite as
much from plethora as from inanition.
Too much blood is as unwholesome as
too little, notwithstanding of any
extraneous means to work it off.
“Slow and sure,” is their motto—”Carpe
diem,” essentially that of
their antagonists. And yet in one
thing, we believe, most individuals
holding these opposite opinions will
be found to concur. They all speculate.
Heraclitus signs his contract
with a shudder, and trembles as he
places his realized premium in the
bank. Democritus laughingly subscribes
his name to thousands, and
chuckles as he beholds his favourite
stock ascending in the thermometer of
the share-market. Heraclitus sells—Democritus
holds; and thus the great
point of wisdom at issue between them,
is reduced to a mere question of time.
But it is with their opinions, not
their practice, that we have to deal. As
usual, truth will be found to lie somewhere
between two opposite extremes.
We neither entertain the timid fear of
the one writer, nor the fearless enthusiasm
of the other. The present state
of matters presents, in a double sense,
a vast field of speculation, through
which we think it necessary to see our
way a little more clearly. Rash interference
may be as dangerous as the
principle of “laissez faire,” which in
fact is no principle at all, but a blind
abandonment to chance. Let us,
therefore, endeavour to borrow some
light from the experience of the past.
The desire of growing rapidly rich is
a very old epidemic in this country. It
is a disease which infests the nation
whenever capital, in consequence of
the success of trade and prosperous
harvests, becomes abundant; nor can
it, in the nature of things, be otherwise.
Capital will not remain unemployed.
If no natural channel is
presented, the accumulated weight of
riches is sure to make an outlet for
itself; and the wisdom or folly of the
irruption depends solely upon the
course which the stream may take.
Of false channels which have conducted
our British Pactolus directly
to a Dead Sea, from which there is no
return—we or our fathers have witnessed
many. For example, there
were the South American and Mexican
mining companies, founded on
the most absurd reports, and miserably
mismanaged, in which many millions
of the capital of this country were
sunk. Again, Mr Porter writes so
late as 1843—”A very large amount
of capital belonging to individuals in
this country, the result of their savings,
has of late years sought profitable
investments in other lands. It
has been computed that the United
States of America have, during the
last five years, absorbed in this manner
more than twenty-five millions
of English capital, which sum has
been invested in various public
undertakings, such as canals, railroads,
and banks in that country.
Large sums have also been, from time
to time, invested in the public securities
of that and other foreign governments,
not always, indeed, with a
profitable result.” We need hardly
remind our readers of the poignant
testimony of the Rev. Sydney Smith
as to the profit derived from such investments,
or the probable fate of the
actual capital under a repudiating
system.
These may be taken as two great
instances of the danger of foreign
speculation. The capital of the mining
companies was squandered with
no other effect than that of providing
employment, for a certain number of
years, to the lowest of the Mexican
peasantry; whereas the same amount,
applied to a similar purpose in this
country, would not only have produced
a handsome return to the invester,
but would have afforded work
and wages to a considerable portion
of the community. There is a reciprocity
between labour and capital which[Pg 635]
never ought to be forgotten. Labour
is the parent of all capital, and capital,
therefore, should be used for the fostering
and assistance of the power by
which it is produced. Here, however,
it was removed, and became, to all
intents and purposes, as useless and
irrecoverable as the bullion on board
of a vessel which has foundered at sea.
This, therefore, may be regarded
as so much lost capital; but what
shall we say to the other instance?
Simply this—that whoever has lost
by the failure of American banks, by
repudiation, or by stoppages of dividends,
need not claim one single iota
of our compassion. With British
money has the acute Columbian united
state to state by more enduring
ties than can be framed within the
walls of Congress—with it, he has
overcome the gigantic difficulties of
nature—formed a level for the western
waters where none existed before—pierced
the interminable forests with
his railroads, and made such a rapid
stride in civilization as the world has
never yet witnessed. What of all
this could he have done on his own
resources? Something, we must allow—because
his spirit of enterprise
is great, even to recklessness, and a
young and forming country can afford
to run risks which are impossible for
an older state—but a very small part,
unquestionably, without the use of
British capital. We cannot, and we
will not, believe that any considerable
portion of these loans will be ultimately
lost to this country. Great
allowance must be made for the anger
and vexation of the prospective sufferers
at the first apparent breach of
international faith, and it is no wonder
if their lament was both loud, and
long, and heavy. But we think it is
but a fair construction to suppose that
our Transatlantic brethren, in the
very rapidity of their “slickness,”
have carried improvement too far,
given way to a false system of
credit among themselves, and so,
having outrun the national constable,
have found themselves compelled to
suspend payment for an interval,
which, in the present course of their
prosperity, cannot be of long continuance.
So at least we, having lent the
American neither plack nor penny, do
in perfect charity presume; but in the
mean time he has our capital—say now
some thirty millions—he has used it
most thoroughly and judiciously for
himself, and even supposing that we
shall not ultimately suffer, what gain
can we qualify thereby?
If John Doe hath an estate of some
twenty thousand acres in tolerable
cultivation, which, nevertheless, in
order to bring it to a perfect state of
production, requires the accessaries of
tile-draining, planting, fencing, and
the accommodation of roads, it is
quite evident that his extra thousand
pounds of capital will be more profitably
expended on such purposes than
on lending it to Richard Roe, who
has double the quantity of land in a
state of nature. For Richard, though
with the best intentions, may not find
his agricultural returns quite so speedy
as he expected, may shake his head
negatively at the hint of repayment
of the principal, and even be rather
tardy with tender of interest at the
term. John, moreover, has a population
on his land whom he cannot
get rid of, who must be clothed and
fed at his expense, whether he can
find work for them or no. This latter
consideration, indeed, is, in political
economy, paramount—give work to
your own people, and ample work if
possible, before you commit in loan
to your neighbour that capital which
constitutes the sinews alike of peace
and of war.
We believe there are few thinking
persons in this country who will dispute
the truth of this position. Indeed,
the general results of foreign speculation
have been unprofitable altogether,
as is shown by the testimony of
our ablest commercial writers. One
of them gives the following summary:—”Large
sums have, from time to
time, been lent to various foreign
states by English capitalists, whose
money has been put to great hazard,
and, in some cases, lost. On the
other hand, many foreign loans have
been contracted by our merchants,
which have proved highly profitable,
through the progressive sale of the
stock in foreign countries at higher
than the contract prices. It is evidently
impossible to form any correct
estimate of the profit or loss which
has resulted to the country from these
various operations; the general impres[Pg 636]sion
is, that hitherto the losses
have much exceeded the gains.” In
that general impression we most cordially
concur—indeed, we never heard
any man whose opinion was worth
having, say otherwise.
But in the absence of home speculation
it is little wonder that, for the
chance of unfrequent gain, men should
choose, rather than leave their capital
unemployed, to run the risk of the
frequent loss. It does not, however,
follow, as a matter of course, that
home speculation shall always prove
profitable either to the invester or to
the nation at large. We have said
already, that the proper function of
capital is to foster and encourage
labour; but this may be carried too
far. For example, it is just twenty
years ago, when, at a time of great
prosperity in trade—the regular products
of this country being as nearly
as possible equal to the demand—a
large body of capitalists, finding no
other outlet for their savings, gave an
unnatural stimulus to production, by
buying up and storing immense
quantities of our home manufactures.
This they must have done upon some
abstruse but utterly false calculation
of augmented demand from abroad,
making no allowance for change of
season, foreign fluctuation, or any
other of the occult causes which influence
the markets of the world.
The result, as is well known, was most
disastrous. Trade on a sudden grew
slack. The capitalists, in alarm, threw
open the whole of their accumulated
stock at greatly depreciated prices.
There was no further demand for manufacturing
labour, because the world
was glutted with the supply, and hence
arose strikes, panic, bankruptcy, and
a period of almost unexampled hardship
to the workman, and of serious
and permanent loss to the master
manufacturer. Speculation, therefore,
in an old branch of industry, is perilous
not only to the invester but to the
prosperity of the branch itself. The
case, however, is widely different when
a new and important source of industry
and income is suddenly developed
in the country.
We shall look back in vain over our
past history to find any parallel at all
approaching to the present state and
prospects of the railway system.
Forty-four years have elapsed since
the first public railway in Great Britain
(the Wandsworth and Croydon)
received the sanction of the legislature.
Twenty-five years afterwards,
at the close of 1826, when the Manchester
and Liverpool bill was passed,
the whole number of railroad acts
amounted to thirty-five: in 1838 it had
increased to one hundred and forty-two.
The capital of these railways,
with the sums which the proprietors
were authorized to borrow, cannot be
taken at less than Sixty Millions
Sterling.
Now, it is very instructive to remark,
that until the opening of the
Liverpool and Manchester line in
September 1830, not one single railway
was constructed with a view to the
conveyance of passengers. The first
intention of the railway was to provide
for the carriage of goods at a
cheaper rate than could be effected by
means of the canals, and for the accommodation
of the great coal-fields
and mineral districts of England. In
the Liverpool and Manchester prospectus—a
species of document not
usually remarkable for modesty or
shyness of assumption—the estimate
of the number of passengers between
these two great towns was taken at
the rate of one half of those who
availed themselves of coach conveyance.
Cotton bales, manufactures,
cattle, coals, and iron, were relied on
as the staple sources of revenue. Had
it not been for the introduction of the
locomotive engine, and the vast improvements
it has received, by means
of which we are now whirled from
place to place with almost magical
rapidity, there can be no doubt that
the railways would, in most instances,
have proved an utter failure. The
fact is singular, but it is perfectly ascertained,
that the railroads have not
hitherto materially interfered with the
canals in the article of transmission of
goods. The cost of railway construction
is incomparably greater than that
attendant on the cutting of canals, and
therefore the land carriage can very
seldom, when speed is not required,
compete with the water conveyance.
But for passengers, speed is all in all.
The facility and shortness of transit
creates travellers at a ratio of which
we probably have as yet no very[Pg 637]
accurate idea. Wherever the system
has had a fair trial, the number of passengers
has been quadrupled—in some
cases quintupled, and even more; and
every month is adding to their numbers.
But 1838, though prolific in railways,
was still a mere Rachel when
compared with the seven Leahs that
have succeeded it. The principle of
trunk lines, then first recognised, has
since been carried into effect throughout
England, and adopted in Scotland,
though here the system has not yet
had full time for development. The
statistics of the railways already completed,
have fully and satisfactorily
demonstrated the immense amount
of revenue which in future will be
drawn from these great national undertakings,
the increase on the last
year alone having amounted to upwards
of a million sterling. That
revenue is the interest of the new
property so created; and, therefore,
we are making no extravagant calculation
when we estimate the increased
value of these railways at twenty
millions in the course of a single year.
That is an enormous national gain,
and quite beyond precedent. Indeed,
if the following paragraph, which we
have extracted from a late railway
periodical, be true, our estimate is
much within the mark. “The improvement
in the incomes of existing
railways still continues, and during
the last two months has amounted to
upwards of £200,000 in comparison
with the corresponding two months
of 1844. The lines which have reduced
their fares most liberally, are
the greatest gainers. At this rate of
increase of income, the value of the
railway property of the country is
becoming greater by upwards of
£2,000,000 sterling per month.” It is,
therefore, by no means wonderful that
as much of the available capital of the
country as can be withdrawn from
its staple sources of income should be
eagerly invested in the railways, since
no other field can afford the prospect
of so certain and increasing a return.
The question has been often mooted,
whether government ought not in the
first instance to have taken the management
of the railways into its own
hands. Much may be said upon one
or other side, and the success of the
experiment is, of course, a very different
thing from the mere prospect of
success. Our opinion is quite decided,
that, as great public works, the government
ought most certainly to
have made the trunk railways or, as
in France, to have leased them to
companies who would undertake the
construction of them for a certain
term of years, at the expiry of which
the works themselves would have
become the property of the nation.
Never was there such a prospect afforded
to a statesman of relieving the
country, by its own internal resources,
of a great part of the national debt.
Public works are not unknown or
without precedent in this country; but
somehow or other they are always
unprofitable. At the cost of upwards
of a million, government constructed
the Caledonian Canal, the revenue
drawn from which does not at the
present moment defray its own expenses,
much less return a farthing of
interest on this large expenditure of
capital. Now it is very difficult to see
why government, if it has power to
undertake a losing concern, should not
likewise be entitled, for the benefit of
the nation at large, to undertake even
greater works, which not only assist
the commerce of the nation, but might
in a very short period, comparatively
speaking, have almost extinguished
its taxation. It is now, of course, far
too late for any idea of the kind.
The golden opportunity presented
itself for a very short period of time,
and to the hands of men far too timid
to grasp it, even if they could have
comprehended its advantages. Finance
never was, and probably never
will be, a branch of Whig education,
as even Joseph Hume has been compelled
a thousand times piteously
and with wringing of the hands to
admit—and whose arithmetic could
we expect them even to know, if they
admitted and knew not Joseph’s?
But this at least they might have done,
when the progress of railroads throughout
the kingdom became a matter of
absolute certainty. The whole subject
should have been brought under the
consideration of a board, to determine
what railways were most necessary
throughout the kingdom, and what
line would be cheapest and most advantageous
to the public; and when these
points had once been ascertained, no
competition whatever should have been
allowed. The functions of the Board[Pg 638]
of Trade were not nearly so extensive;
they had no report of government engineers,
and no data to go upon save
the contradictory statements of the
rival companies. Hence their decision,
in almost every instance, was
condemned by the parties interested,
who, having a further tribunal in
Parliament, where a thousand interests
unknown to the Board of Trade could
be appealed to, rushed into a protracted
contest, at an expenditure
which this year is understood to have
exceeded all precedent. We have
no means of ascertaining the expenses
of such a line as the London and York,
which was fought inch by inch through
the Committees of both Houses with
unexampled acrimony and perseverance.
We know, however, that the
expenses connected with the Great
Western, and the London and Birmingham
bills, amounted respectively
to £88,710 and £72,868, exclusive
altogether of the costs incurred by the
different parties who opposed these
lines in Parliament. It has been
stated in a former number of this
Magazine—and we believe it—that
the parliamentary costs incurred for
the Scottish private and railway bills,
during the last session alone, amounted
to a million and a half.
Now, though a great part of the
money thus expended is immediately
returned to circulation, still it is a
severe tax upon the provinces, and
might very easily have been avoided
by the adoption of some such plan
as that which we have intimated
above; and we shall presently venture
to offer a few practical remarks
as to the course which we think is
still open to the government for
checking an evil which is by no means
inseparable from the system.
But, first, we are bound to state
that, as yet, we can see no grounds
for believing that the nominal amount
of capital invested in the railways
which have obtained the sanction of
Parliament is beyond, or any thing
approaching to, the surplus means of
the country. Foreign speculation,
except in so far as regards railroads,
(and these are neither so safe nor so
profitable an investment as at home,)
seems for the present entirely to have
ceased. The last three years of almost
unequalled prosperity have accumulated
in the country a prodigious deal of
capital, which is this way finding an
outlet; and though it may be true
that the parties who originally subscribed
to these undertakings may
not, in the aggregate, be possessed of
capital enough to carry them successfully
to an end, still there has been
no want of capitalists to purchase the
shares at a premium—not, as we verily
believe, for a mere gambling transaction,
but for the purposes of solid investment.
We base our calculations
very much upon the steadily maintained
prices of the railways which
passed in 1844, and which are now
making. Now, these afford no immediate
return—on the contrary, a
considerable amount of calls is still
due upon most of them, and the
earliest will probably not be opened
until the expiry of ten months from
the present date. It is quite obvious
that, in this kind of stock, there can
be no incentive to gambling, because
the chances are, that any new lines
which may be started in the vicinity
of them shall be rivals rather than
feeders; and if capital were so scarce
as in some quarters it is represented
to be, it is scarce possible that these
lines could have remained so firmly
held. Let us take the prices of the
principal of these from the Liverpool
share-lists as on 27th September.
| Share. | Paid. | Selling Price. | |
| 25 | 10 | Blackburn and Preston, | 19¾ to 20¼ |
| 50 | 15 | Chester and Holyhead, | 20 to 20½ |
| 50 | 25 | Lancaster and Carlisle, | 53½ to 54½ |
| 50 | 15 | Leeds and Bradford, | 61 to 63 |
| 25 | 12½ | East Lancashire, | 22 to 22½ |
| 20 | 9 | North Wales Mineral, | 14¾ to ¼ |
| 10 | 1 | North Wales Mineral New, | 5¼ to 5½ |
| 25 | 15 | North British, | 25 to 26 |
| 50 | 20 | South Devon, | 34 to 36 |
These lines have, in the language
of the Stock Exchange, passed out of
the hands of the jobbers, and most of
them are now too heavy in amount
for the operations of the smalle[Pg 639]r
speculators. We therefore look upon
their steadiness as a high proof, not
only of their ultimate value, but of the
general abundance of capital.
It is hardly possible as yet to draw
any such deduction from the present
prices of the lines which were passed
in the course of last session. Upon
many of these no calls have yet been
made, and consequently they are still
open to every kind of fluctuation. It
cannot, therefore, be said that they
have settled down to their true estimated
value, and, in all probability,
erelong some may decline to a certain
degree. Still it is very remarkable,
and certainly corroborative of our
view, that the amazing influx of new
schemes during the last few months—which,
time and circumstance considered,
may be fairly denominated a
craze—has as yet had no effect in
lowering them; more especially when
we recollect, that the amount of deposit
now required upon new railways
is ten per cent on the whole capital,
or exactly double of the ratio of the
former deposits. We give these facts
to the terrorists who opine that our
surplus capital is ere now exhausted,
and that deep inroads have been made
upon the illegitimate stores of credit;
and we ask them for an explanation
consistent with their timorous theory.
At the same time, we would by no
means scoff at the counsel of our
Ahitophels. A glance at the newspapers
of last month, and their interminable
advertising columns, is quite
enough to convince us that the thing
may be overdone. True, not one out
of five—nay, perhaps, not one out of
fifteen—of these swarming schemes,
has the chance of obtaining the sanction
of Parliament for years to come;
still, it is not only a pity, but a great
waste and national grievance, that so
large a sum as the deposits which are
paid on these railways should be
withdrawn—it matters not how long—from
practical use, and locked up to
await the explosion of each particular
bubble. We do think, therefore,
that it is high time for the legislature
to interfere, not for any purpose of
opposing the progress of railways,
but either by establishing a peremptory
board of supervision, or portioning
out the different localities with
respect to time, on some new and
compendious method.
Last session the committees, though
they performed their duties with much
zeal and assiduity, were hardly able
to overtake the amount of business
before them. It was not without
much flattery and coaxing that the
adroit Premier, of all men best formed
for a general leader of the House of
Commons, could persuade the unfortunate
members that an unfaltering
attendance of some six hours a-day
in a sweltering and ill-ventilated room,
where their ears were regaled with a
constant repetition of the jargon connected
with curves, gradients, and
traffic-tables, was their great and
primary duty to the commonwealth.
Most marvellous to say, he succeeded
in overcoming their stubborn will.
Every morning, by times, the knight
of the shire, albeit exhausted from the
endurance of the over-night’s debate,
rose up from his neglected breakfast,
and posted down to his daily cell in
the Cloisters. Prometheus under the
beak of the vulture could not have
shown more patience than most of
those unhappy gentlemen under the
infliction of the lawyer’s tongue; and
their stoicism was the more praiseworthy,
because in many instances
there seemed no prospect, however
remote, of the advent of a Hercules
to deliver them. The only men who
behaved unhandsomely on the occasion
were some of the Irish members,
advocates of Repeal, who, with more
than national brass, grounded their
declinature on the galling yoke of the
Saxon, and retreated to Connemara,
doubtless exulting that in this instance
at least they had freed themselves
from “hereditary bonds.” It
may be doubted, however, whether
the tone of the committees was materially
deteriorated by their absence.
Now, we have a great regard for the
members of the House of Commons
collectively; and, were it on no other
account save theirs, we cannot help
regarding the enormous accumulation
of railway bills for next session with
feelings of peculiar abhorrence. Last
spring every exertion of the whole
combined pitchforks was required to
cleanse that Augean stable: can Sir
Robert Peel have the inhumanity
next year to request them to buckle
to a tenfold augmented task? In our[Pg 640]
humble opinion, (and we know something
of the matter,) flesh and blood
are unable to stand it. The private
business of this country, if conducted
on the ancient plan, must utterly
swamp the consideration of public
affairs, and the member of Parliament
dwindle into a mere arbiter between
hostile surveyors; whilst the ministry,
delighted at the abstraction of both
friend and foe, have the great game
of politics unchecked and unquestioned
to themselves. The surest way to
gag a conscientious opponent, or to
stop the mouth of an imprudent ally,
is to get him placed upon some such
committee as that before which the
cases of the London and York, and
Direct Northern lines were discussed.
If, after three days’ patient hearing of
the witnesses and lawyers, he has one
tangible idea floating in his head, he
is either an Alcibiades or a Bavius—a
heaven-born genius or the mere
incarnation of a fool!
Let it be granted that the present
system pursued by Parliament, more
especially when its immediate prospects
are considered, is an evil—and
we believe there are few who will be
bold enough to deny it—it still remains
that we seek out a remedy.
This is no easy task. The detection
of an error is always a slight matter
compared with its emendation, and
we profess to have neither the aptitude
nor the experience of a Solon.
But as we are sanguine that wherever
an evil exists a remedy also may
be found, we shall venture to offer
our own crude ideas, in the hope that
some better workman, whose appetite
for business has been a little allayed
by the copious surfeit of last year, may
elaborate them into shape, and emancipate
one of the most deserving, as
well as the worst used, classes of her
Majesty’s faithful lieges. And first,
we would say this—Do not any longer
degrade the honourable House of
Commons, by forcing on its attention
matters and details which ought to
fall beneath the province of a lower
tribunal: do not leave it in the power
of any fool or knave—and there are
many such actively employed at this
time—who can persuade half a dozen
of the same class with himself into
gross delusion of the public, to occupy
the time, and monopolize the nobler
functions of the legislature, in the consideration
of some miserable scheme,
which never can be carried into effect,
and which is protracted beyond endurance
simply for the benefit of its
promoters. We do not mean that Parliament
should abandon its controlling
power, or even delegate it altogether.
We only wish that the initiative—the
question whether any particular
project is likely to tend to the public
benefit, and, if so, whether this is a
fit and proper time to bring it forward—should
be discussed elsewhere. A
recommendation of the Board of Trade,
which still leaves the matter open,
is plainly useless and inoperative.
It has been overleaped, derided, despised,
and will be so again—we
scarcely dare to say unjustly; for no
body of five men, however intelligent,
could by possibility be expected to
form an accurate judgment upon such
an enormous mass of materials and
conflicting statements as were laid
before them. And yet, preliminary
enquiry there must be. The movement
is far too great, and charged
with too important interests, to permit
its march unchecked. Of all tyrannical
bodies, a railway company
is the most tyrannical. It asks to be
armed with powers which the common
law denies to the Sovereign herself.
It seeks, without your leave, to
usurp your property, and will not buy
it from you at your own price. It
levels your house, be it grange or
cottage, lays down its rails in your
gardens, cuts through your policy, and
fells down unmercifully the oaks which
your Norman ancestor planted in the
days of William Rufus. All this you
must submit to, for the public benefit
is paramount to your private feelings;
but it would be an intolerable grievance
were you called upon to submit
to this, not for the public benefit, but
for the mere temporary emolument of
a handful of unprincipled jobbers.
Therefore there must be enquiry,
even though Parliament, strangled
with a multitude of projects, should
delegate a portion of its powers elsewhere.
And why not? It required no great
acuteness of vision to see, that, even
had the railway mania not risen to
this singular height, some such step
must erelong have been rendered[Pg 641]
imperative by the growing necessities
and altered circumstances of the
country. The leading feature of our
age is the institution of joint-stock
societies. We have taken up very
lately the views which Æsop hinted
at some thousands of years ago, in
his quaint parabolic manner, and
which Defoe, who lived a century and
a half before his time, most clearly
enunciated and described. We have
found the way, at last, to make small
capitals effect the most gigantic results,
by encircling them with the
magic ties of combination. No matter
when it was discovered; the principle
has never yet been thoroughly
acted upon until now, and we know
not how far it may be carried. Our
fathers, for want of this principle,
ruined themselves by isolated attempts—we
are in no such danger, if we do
not yield ourselves to the madness of
extravagant daring. Put railways
aside altogether, and the number of
private bills which are now brought
before Parliament is perfectly astounding.
Twenty years ago, such an influx
would have daunted the heart of the
stoutest legislator; and yet, with all
this remarkable increase, we have
clung pertinaciously to the same machinery,
and expect it to work as well
as when it had not one tithe of the
labour to perform.
We have always been, and we shall
always continue to be, the strenuous
advocates of local boards, as by far
the soundest, cheapest, and most natural
method of administering local
affairs. We can recognise no principle
in the system by which a Scottish
bill is entrusted to the judgment
of a committee consisting of strangers,
who are utterly ignorant of
locality, vested interest, popular feeling,
and every other point which ought
to influence the consideration of such
a matter. One would think, by the
care which is invariably taken to exclude
from the committee every man
whose local knowledge can qualify
him to form an opinion, that in ignorance
alone is there safety from venality
and prejudice—a supposition
which, to say the least, conveys no
compliment to the character or understanding
of the British statesman.
And yet this is the system which has
hitherto been most rigidly adopted.
We have judges in our law courts
whose impartiality is beyond all suspicion.
They are placed on a high, conspicuous
pinnacle in the sight of the
nation, to do justice between man and
man; they are fenced and fortified by
the high dignity, almost sanctity, of
their calling, against clamour, idle
rumour, private interest, or any other
element that might disturb the course
of equity, and therefore their decisions
are received on all sides with reverential
acquiescence. Why should not
the private business of the country be
placed upon the same footing? Let
there be three commissions issued—three
permanent local boards established
in England, Scotland, and Ireland,
under the superintendence, if necessary,
of the Board of Trade; let Parliament
lay down rules for their guidance,
and let every measure which at present
would be launched de plano into the
House of Commons, be first submitted
to their consideration; and let
their determination to reject or postpone
be final, unless the legislature
shall see fit, by a solemn vote, to reverse
that portion of their report. In
this way a multitude of loose and undigested
schemes would be thrown
back upon the hands of their promoters,
without clogging the wheels of
Parliament; and such only as bear ex
facie to be for the public advantage,
would be allowed to undergo the more
searching ordeal of a committee.
These boards would literally cost the
country nothing, even although the
constituent members of them were
paid, as they ought to be for the performance
of such a duty, very highly.
Each company applying for a bill might
be assessed to a certain amount, corresponding
to the value of its stock;
as it is but fair that the parties who
have created the exigency, and whose
avowed object is profit, should defray
the attendant expense.
Supposing that the principle of these
boards were admitted, it seems to us
that Parliament has still to exercise
a great and serious duty in laying
down rules for their guidance. This
is perhaps the most difficult subject
connected with the railway system;
and we approach it with diffidence,
as it is inseparable, nay, must be
based upon the two grand considerations
of capital and labour[Pg 642]. We
shall endeavour to explain our meaning
a little more minutely.
The reader will gather from what
we have written above, that we entertain
no fear that the nominal capital
invested in the railways which have
already received the sanction of Parliament,
is now more than the surplus
capital floating in the country which
can be applied to such a purpose
without injuring any portion of our
staple manufactures or commerce.
On the contrary, we think that it is
very greatly below that mark, and
therefore that it matters little, in
a general point of view, by whom the
stock is presently held. Sooner or
later it must find its way into the
hands of the capitalists, a class whose
numbers are notoriously every day on
the increase. Even were this not the
case, and the balance otherwise, it
must be recollected that the investment
of that capital is not the thing
of a moment. Four years, probably,
may elapse before all the railways
which have obtained bills can be completed,
and during that time the calls
are gradual. Unless, therefore, there
shall occur some untoward and unforeseen
cause, such as a continental war
or a general stoppage of trade, the
accumulation of capital in this country
will be at least equally progressive.
There is thus a future increment corresponding
to the period of the completion
of these public works, which may very
fairly be taken into consideration, at
least, as a kind of security that we have
not hitherto advanced with too rash or
hasty steps. But with the unchecked
influx of new schemes, this security,
which at best is but contingent, must
disappear, and a further enormous absorption
of capital, the existence of
which is not satisfactorily proved, be
called for. In such a state of things, it
is unquestionably the duty of government
to use its controlling power. The
payment of ten per cent deposit is no
guarantee at all. Whilst new stocks
are at premium, a hundred pounds,
in the hands of an enterprising speculator,
may figure as the representative
of many thousands in twenty different
railway schemes. The limit of
disposable capital in the country must—if
all the new projects are permitted
to go on—be reached, and that erelong;
then comes a period of gambling
whilst money is cheap and credit
plentiful—a sudden contraction of
currency—and a crash.
It has been found utterly impossible
to ascertain the amount of capital at
any time floating in Great Britain.
We can, therefore, only guess from
certain commercial symptoms when it
is nearly exhausted. On this point the
money articles in the London journals
have of late contained many significant
hints. The settlements on the Stock
Exchange are weekly becoming more
difficult, and an enormous per centage
is said to be paid at present for temporary
accommodation. It is understood,
also, that the banks are about
to raise the rate of discount; from
which we infer that their deposits are
being gradually withdrawn, since
there is no other circumstance whatever
that ought to operate a change.[7]
But really it requires no calculation
and no foresight to see, that the mere
amount of deposits required for the
new schemes must erelong lock up
the whole available capital of Great
Britain. Let those who think this is
a bold assertion on our part, attend
to the following fact. We have
taken from The Railway Record, the
amount of new railway schemes advertised
in a single week, at the beginning
of October. The number of the
schemes is forty; and they comprehend
the ephemera of England and
Ireland only—Scotland, which, during
that period, was most emulously at
work, seems, by some unaccountable
accident, to have been overlooked.
Of the amount of capital to be invested
in no less than eleven of these,
we have no statement. The promoters
apparently have no time to attend[Pg 643]
to such trifling details; and, doubtless,
it will be early enough to announce
the capital when they have playfully
pounced upon the deposits. But there
is some candour in twenty-nine
provisional committees, and their accumulated
nominal capital proves to
be—how much, think you, gifted
reader, and confident dabbler in new
stock? Why, merely this—twenty-five
millions eight hundred and
thirty thousand pounds!!! Now—for
we wish always to speak and
write within the mark—let us calculate
the eleven Harpocrates Companies
and the Northern Schemes, (which
are more than eleven,) at fourteen or
fifteen additional millions; and you
thus have parties engaged, in the
course of a single week, for forty
millions sterling, or about one-twentieth
part of the whole national
debt; which, according to this rate of
subscription, may be extinguished by
our surplus capital in the short space
of five months. And this is the
country, where, three years ago, the
manufacturer and miner were starving,
Manchester almost in a state of
siege, and Staley-bridge in absolute
insurrection! Happy Britain, where
every man has discovered the philosopher’s
stone!
After this, need we say any thing
more upon the great topic of capital?
Were the nation now in its sober
senses, the facts which we have stated,
and for the accuracy of which we
pledge ourselves, would surely be
enough to awaken it to a true conception
of the vortex into which it is
plunging. But as every man will no
doubt think—with the ordinary self-delusion
of our kind—that the scheme
in which he is individually embarked
is an exception from the common
rule; let us ask each speculator candidly
to make answer, whether he has
minutely examined the merits of the
line which he has adopted, or whether
he has thrown himself into it upon the
assurances of others, and the mere
expectations of a premium? If the
former, let him hold. We war with
no man’s deliberate judgment; and
that there are many projected lines in
Great Britain which must ultimately
be carried, and which will prove most
profitable to the shareholders, is beyond
all manner of doubt. Whether
they may receive the sanction of the
legislature so soon as the proprietor
expects, is a very different question.
But if the latter, his case is far otherwise.
We have seen the prospectus
of several of the most gigantic
schemes now in the market, by means
of which the whole length of England
is to be traversed, and these have
undergone no further survey than the
application of a ruler to a lithographic
map, and a trifling transplantation of
the principal towns, so as to coincide
with the direct and undeviating rail.
There is hardly a sharebroker in the
kingdom who is not cognisant of this
most flagrant fact; and by many of
them the impudent impositions have
been returned with the scorn which
such conduct demands. It is hardly
possible to conceive that these schemes
were ever intended to meet the eye of
Parliament; but, if not, why were
they ever started? The reflection is
a very serious one for those who have
deposited their money.
Such projects, of course, are the
exceptions, and not the rule. Still,
their existence, and the support which
they have unthinkingly obtained, are
very lamentable symptoms of the
recklessness which characterises the
present impulse. Were the tone of
commercial enterprise healthy, and
kept within due bounds, there would
be nothing of this; neither should we
hear, as we do every day, of shares
which, immediately after their allocation,
attain an enormous premium,
and, after having fluctuated for a week
or two, subside to something like
their real value.
Are we then justified or not in saying,
that it is the imperative duty of
the legislature to look to this question
of capital; that it is bound to see
that the country does not pledge itself
so utterly beyond its means; and that
the advance of the railway system
must be made slow and steady, in
order to render its basis secure?
But there is another point beyond
this. Supposing that all our remarks
on the subject of capital were erroneous,
and that our financial views
were as puerile as we believe them to
be strictly sound—we fall back upon
an element which is more easily ascertained,
and that is, Labour. We
hold it to be a clear economical[Pg 644]
maxim, that beyond a certain point,
at all events within a given time, capital,
however abundant it may be,
cannot create labour. It has passed
into a sort of truism that there is nothing
which money cannot accomplish—analyse
it, and you will find that it
is not a truism but a popular fallacy.
There are many, many things which
money cannot accomplish. It has no
power to clear the social atmosphere
from crime; it may mar the morals of
a people, but it cannot make them;
and still less can it usurp the stupendous
functions of the Deity. It may
rear labour, but it cannot by any possibility
create it, after such a fashion
as the crop that sprang from the sowing
of the Cadmean teeth. Let us
illustrate this a little.
Probably—nay, certainly—there
never was a country in which labour
has been so accurately balanced as in
Great Britain. Our population has
been for a number of years upon the
increment; but the increase has been
of the nature of supply, consequent
and almost dependent upon the demand.
The wages paid to the children
in manufacturing districts have
swelled that portion of our population
to a great degree, though probably
not more than is indispensable
from the fluctuating nature of commerce.
But, so far as we can learn
from statistical tables, the number of
agricultural labourers—that is, those
who are strictly employed in the cultivation
of the land, and who cannot
be spared from that most necessary
task—has been rather on the decrease.
Our business, however, is neither
with manufacturer nor with agriculturist,
but with a different class—those,
namely, who are engaged in
the public works of the country. Let
us take Mr Porter’s estimate, according
to the census of 1831.
“The summary of the returns of
1831, respecting the occupations of
males twenty years of age and upwards,
throws considerable light upon the subject,
by exhibiting them under several
subdivisions. The males belonging to
the families included in the non-agricultural
and non-manufacturing classes,
were given at the last census under four
distinct heads of description, viz.:—
“Capitalists, Bankers, Professional, and
other educated men.
“Labourers employed in labour, not
Agricultural.
“Other males, twenty years of age,
except servants.
“Male servants, twenty years of age.
“The whole number of males included
under these heads, amounts to 1,137,270.
Of these, 608,712 were actually employed
in labour, which although, usually
speaking, it was neither manufacturing
nor trading, was yet necessary
in the successful prosecution of some
branch of trade or manufactures, such
as mining, road-making, canal-digging,
inland navigation, &c.“
Of these 600,000, now probably
augmented by a tenth, how many can
be spared from their several employments
for the construction of the railways,
and how many are at this moment
so employed, with their labour
mortgaged for years? This is a question
which Parliament ought most certainly—if
it can be done—to get answered
in a satisfactory manner. It
must be remarked, that in this class
are included the miners, who certainly
cannot be withdrawn from their present
work, which in fact is indispensable
for the completion of the railways.
If possible, their numbers must
be augmented. The stored iron of the
country is now exhausted, and the
masters are using every diligence in
their power to facilitate the supply,
which still, as the advancing price of
that great commodity will testify, is
short of, and insufficient for the demand.
From the agricultural labourers
you cannot receive any material
number of recruits. The land, above all
things, must be tilled; and—notwithstanding
the trashy assertions of popular
slip-slop authors and Cockney sentimentalists,
who have favored us
with pictures of the Will Ferns of the
kingdom, as unlike the reality as may
be—the condition of those who cultivate
the soil of Britain is superior to
that of the peasantry in every other
country of Europe. The inevitable
increase of demand for labour will
even better their condition, according
to the operation of a law apparent to
every man of common sense, but
which is hopelessly concealed from
the eyes of these spurious regenerators
of the times. It is impossible
to transform the manufacturer, even
were that trade slack, into a railway
labourer; the habits and constitution of
the two classes being essentially differ[Pg 645]ent
and distinct. Indeed, as the writer
we have already quoted well remarks—”Experience
has shown that uneducated
men pass with difficulty, and
unwillingly, from occupations to which
they have been long accustomed,” and
nothing, consequently, is more difficult
than to augment materially and
suddenly the numbers of any industrial
class, when an unexpected demand
arises. To us, therefore, it
seems perfectly clear, that even if the
capital were forthcoming, there is not
labour enough in the country for the
simultaneous construction of a tithe of
the projected schemes.
There are considerations connected
with this matter which entail a great
responsibility upon the government.
The capitalists are, in fact, putting at
its disposal the means of maintaining
a great portion of the poorer population
for many years to cone. If this
be properly attended to, emigration,
which principally benefits the labourer,
may be discontinued. We have now
arrived at a pass when the absence of
those who have already emigrated
becomes a matter of regret. There is
work to be had nearer than the Canadian
woods or the waterless prairies
of Australia—work, too, that in its
results must be of incalculable benefit
to the community. But the government
is bound to regulate it so, that,
amidst superabundance of wealth, due
regard is paid to the Economy of
Labour. It is rumoured that some
railway directors, fully aware of the
facts which we have stated, are meditating,
in their exuberant haste for
dividends, the introduction of foreign
labourers. We doubt whether, under
any circumstances, such a scheme is
practicable; but of this we entertain
no doubt, that it is as mischievous a
device as ever was forged in the
cabinet of Mammon! Some years
ago the cuckoo cry of the political
quacks was over-population. Now it
seems there is a scarcity of hands, and
in order to supply the want—for we
have drained the Highlands—we are
to have an importation from Baden or
Bavaria, without even the protecting
solemnity of a tariff. If this be true,
it seems to us that government is
bound to interpose by the most stringent
measures. It is monstrous to
think, that whereas, for many years
past, for mere slackness of labour, we
have been encouraging emigration
among the productive classes of our
countrymen to a very great degree;
draining, as it were, the mother
country to found the colonies, and
therein resorting to the last step
which a paternal government, even
in times of the greatest necessity,
should adopt—now, when a new experiment,
or social crisis—call it which
you will—has arisen, when labour has
again reached the point where the demand
exceeds the supply, we are to
admit an influx of strangers amongst
us, and thereby entail upon ourselves
and posterity the evils of prospective
pauperism. We have been already
too prone, in matters relating rather
to the luxuries than the necessities of
our social system, to give undue preference
to the foreigner. British art
has, in many branches, been thereby
crippled and discouraged, and a cry,
not unnatural surely, has ere now
been raised against the practice. But
how incomparably more dangerous it
would be to inundate the country with
an alien population, whose mere brute
strength, without a particle of productive
skill, is their only passport
and certificate! This too, be it
observed, is not for the purpose of
establishing or furthering a branch of
industry which can furnish permanent
employment, but merely for carrying
out a system of great change certainly,
but of limited endurance. If labour
required to be forced, it would
certainly be more for our advantage to
revise our penal institutions, and to
consider seriously whether those who
have committed offences against our
social laws, might not be more profitably
employed in the great works of
the kingdom, than by transplanting
them as at present to the Antipodes at
a fearful expense, the diminution of
which appears, in all human probability,
impossible.
If, then, we are right in our premises,
the two leading points which
Parliament must steadily regard in
forming its decisions connected with
the new schemes, are the sufficiency
of unfettered capital and the adequate
supply of labour. Our conviction is,
that neither exist to any thing like the
extent which would be required were
the present mania allowed to run it[Pg 646]s
course unchecked. But, on the other
hand, a total stoppage of improvement
might be equally dangerous; and it
will therefore be necessary to steer a
middle course, and to regulate the
movement according to certain principles.
Let us, then, first consider
what lines ought not to be granted.
At the head of these we should
place the whole bundle of rival companies
to railways already completed
or in progress. We are not of the
number of those who stand up for exclusive
commercial monopoly; but we
do think that there is a tacit or implied
contract between the state and
the proprietors of the sanctioned lines,
which ought to shield the latter against
rash and invidious competition. The
older railways are the parents of the
system; without them, it never could
have been discovered what gradients
were requisite, what works indispensable,
what savings practicable. The
expense of their construction we know
to have been, in many instances, far
greater than is contained in the modern
estimates, and the land which
they required to occupy was procured
at extravagant prices. Now it does
seem to us in the highest degree unfair,
that the interest of these companies
should be sacrificed for the sake
of what is called the “direct” principle.
A saving of twenty or thirty miles between
Newcastle and London, is now
thought to be a matter of so much importance
as to justify one or more independent
lines, which, despising intermediate
cities and their traffic, still hold
their even course as the crow flies, from
point to point, and thereby shorten
the transit from the south to the
north of England by—it may be—the
matter of an hour. We did not use
to be quite so chary of our minutes:
nor, though fully aware of the value
of time, did we ever bestow the same
regard upon the fractional portions of
our existence. What the nation requires
is a safe, commodious, and
speedy mode of conveyance, and we
defy the veriest streak-of-lightning
man to say, that the present companies
in operation do not afford
us that to our heart’s content. It
is but a very few years ago since
we used to glorify ourselves in the
rapidity of the mail-coach, doing its
ten miles an hour with the punctuality
of clockwork. Now we have
arrived at the ratio of forty within
the same period, and yet we are not
content. Next year, within fourteen
hours we shall be transported from
Edinburgh to London. That, it
seems, is not enough. A company
offers to transport us by a straighter
line in thirteen; and for that purpose
they ask leave of the legislature to
construct a rival line at the expense
of a few millions! Now, keeping in
mind what we have said as to capital,
is not this, in the present state of
things, most wanton prodigality? The
same “few millions”—and we rather
suspect they are fewer than is commonly
supposed—would open up
counties hitherto untouched by the
railway system—would give us communication
through the heart of the
Highlands, through the remoter districts
of Wales, through the unvisited
nooks of Ireland, and, in so doing,
would minister not only to the wants
of the community, but in an inconceivable
degree to the social improvement
of the people. Among the list
of proposed schemes for next session,
there are many such; and surely our
government, if its functions correspond
to the name, is bound, in the
first instance, to give a preference to
these; and—since all cannot be accomplished
at once—to assist the
schemes which volunteer the opening
of a new district, rather than the
competition of mushroom companies
where the field is already occupied.
There is also a filching spirit
abroad, which ought decidedly to be
checked. Scarce a main line has been
established from which it has not
been found necessary, for the purposes
of accommodation, to run several
branches. Until about a year ago,
it was generally understood that these
adjuncts ought to be left in the hands
of the original companies, who, for
their own sakes, were always ready
to augment their traffic by such feeders.
Now it is widely different.
Four or five miles of cross country is
reckoned a sufficient justification for
the establishment of an independent
company, who, without any consultation
with the proprietors of the main
line, or enquiry as to their ultimate
intentions, seize upon the vacant
ground as a waif, and throw thems[Pg 647]elves
confidently upon the public.
If the matter does not end in a lease,
the unfortunate public will be the
losers, since it is manifestly impossible
that a little Lilliput line can be
cheaply worked, independent of the
larger trunk. This class of schemes
also should receive their speedy
quietus; for what would be the use of
permitting the promoters to attempt
the proof of an impossible case?
England has already made a great
portion of her railroads, but neither
Scotland nor Ireland as yet have attained
the same point. Now, in a
general point of view, it will hardly
be denied, that it is of far greater importance
to have the country thoroughly
opened up, throughout its
length and breadth, than to have an
accumulation of cross and intersecting
railways in one particular district.
We are asking no favouritism, for it
has become a mere matter of choice
between companies, as to which shall
have the earlier preference. In point
of policy, the legislature ought certainly
to extend every possible favour
to the Irish lines. It may be that in
this railway system—for Providence
works with strange agents—there lies
the germ of a better understanding between
us, and the dawn of a happier
day for Ireland. At any rate, to its
pauper population, the employment
afforded by companies, where no absenteeism
can exist, is a great and
timely boon, and may work more
social wonders than any scheme of
conciliation which the statesman has
as yet devised. Idleness and lack of
employment are the most fertile sources
of agitation; let these be removed,
and we may look, if not with confidence,
at least with hope, for a cessation of
the stormy evil. By all means, then,
let Ireland have the precedence. She
needs it more than the other countries
do, and to her claims we are all disposed
to yield.
But England owes Scotland something
also. For a long series of
years, amidst great political changes,
through good and through evil report,
this Magazine has been the consistent
champion of our national interests;
and, whether the blow was
aimed at our country by seeming
friend or open foe, we have never
hesitated to speak out boldly. More
than twenty years ago, a measure was
passed by the United Parliament,
which literally brought down ruin
upon the Highlands of Scotland, and
from the effects of which many of the
districts have never recovered. Along
all the western coast and throughout
the islands, the manufacture of kelp
was the only branch of industry within
the reach of a poor and extended population,
who, from their very poverty,
were entitled to the most kindly regard
of government. But, as it is believed,
at the instigation of one member of
the cabinet, himself largely connected
with foreign trade, without enquiry
and without warning, the market was
thrown open to competition from
without, barilla imported, and the
staple product of the north of Scotland
annihilated. To this fatal, and, we
hesitate not to say, most wanton measure,
we attribute the periods of distress,
and the long-continued depression,
which, in very many lamentable
instances, have been the ruin of our
ancient families, and in consequence
of which the Highland glens have
been depopulated. It was a cruel
thing to do, under any circumstances—a
wicked thing, when we remember
the interest by which it was carried.
There is now a great opportunity of
giving us a reasonable compensation.
From the introduction of the railway
system, we anticipate a new era of
prosperity to Scotland—a time when
we shall not have to devote ourselves
to the melancholy task of decreasing
the population by a harsh or inhuman
exile—when the crofts of the valleys
shall again be tilled, and the household
fires shall be lighted on the now
deserted hearthstone. Therefore, in
the event of a restriction, we so far
claim precedence. Let the work,
however, be impartially distributed
throughout the kingdoms, and there
can be no ground any where for complaint.
Only let our haste be tempered
with prudence, and our enthusiasm
moderated down to a just coincidence
with our means.
During all this torrent of speculation,
what is the Currency doing? No
man seems to know. The nation has
found a paper of its own quite as effective
as that which is doled out by
the chartered bank. The brokers are,
in fact, becoming bankers, and payme[Pg 648]nts
of all kinds are readily made in
scrip. This is an instructive fact, and
may somewhat tend to disturb the
triumph of the theorists who uphold
the doctrine of a restrictive trade in
money. We do not rely on the safety
of the system, but we look upon it as
a strong proof that our monetary regulations
are wrong, and that there
is not only a wish, but several practical
ways, effectually to evade its fetters.
We are not, however, going
into that question, though it is by no
means unconnected with our present
subject. At the same time we should
like to see this same article of scrip,
which is fast approximating to notes,
a little more protected. Has it never
occurred to the mind of the Chancellor
of the Exchequer, or to the Premier,
who has a most searching eye, that a
very profitable source of revenue to
the public, and one which would hardly
be grudged, might be derived from
the simple expedient of requiring that
all scrip should be stamped? There is
no practical difficulty in the matter.
Companies already formed, if they do
not desire the benefit of a stamp—the
best, and indeed at present the only
security against the forger—may be
called upon to pay their quota, corresponding
to the number of their shares,
from the fund of their Parliamentary
deposit. New companies, again, might
be imperatively required to issue
stamps; and we confidently believe
that no tax whatever would be more
cheerfully assented to. Let the currency
doctors do what they will, they
never can drive scrip from the market.
Would it not, then, be a measure of
good policy to enlist it as a serviceable
ally?
Whether these observations of
ours may stand the test of another
year’s experience, is certainly matter
of doubt. The period of a single
month makes wild changes in the
prospects of the system, and involves
us not only in new calculations but in
a newer phase of things. At any rate
it can do no harm, in the present period
of excitement, to preach a little moderation,
even though our voice should
be as inaudible as the chirp of a sparrow
on the house-top. The speculative
spirit of the age may be checked
and controlled, but it cannot be put
down, nor would we wish to see it
pass away. All great improvement
is the fruit of speculation, upon which,
indeed, commerce itself is based. We
have, therefore, no sympathy for that
numerous class of gentlemen who profess
a pious horror for every venture
of the kind, who croak prophetical
bankruptcies, and would disinherit
their sons without scruple, if by any
accident they detected them in dalliance
with scrip. A worthier, but a
more contracted, section of the human
race does not exist. They are the
genuine descendants of the Picts;
and, had they lived in remoter days,
would have been the first to protest
against the abolition of ochre as an
ornament, or the substitution of broadcloth
for the untanned buffalo hide.
The nation must progress, and the
true Conservative policy is to lay
down a proper plan for the steadiness
and endurance of its march. The
Roman state was once saved by the
judicious dispositions of a Fabius, and,
in our mind, Sir Robert Peel cannot
do the public a greater service than
to imitate the example of the Cunctator.
He has the power, and, more
than any living statesman, the practical
ability, to grapple with such a
subject in all its details. That Parliament
must do something, is apparent
to every reflecting man. The machinery
of it cannot dispose, as heretofore,
of the superabundant material.
It must devise some method of regulation,
and that method must be clear
and decisive. A question more important
can hardly be conceived, and
so with the legislature we leave it.
FOOTNOTE:
[7] Since this article was sent to press, the Bank of England has raised its rates
of discount one-half per cent. Our prognostication, therefore, has been verified
sooner than we expected, and we are not sorry to find that great establishment
thus early indicating its opinion that speculation has been pushed too far. We see
no ground of alarm in the rise, but rather a security for a more healthy and moderate
market.